Manual Operador Bobcat 3x

Even if you have operated this type of equipment before,
it is very important that your new machines operations and

functions are explained to you by a JCB Dealer
Representative following delivery of your new machine.
es
Dear JCB Customer

Your Local JCB Dealer is:
ic
Following the installation you will know how to gain

maximum productivity and performance from your new
product.
OPERATOR MANUAL
rv
Please contact your local JCB dealer if the Installation

Form has not yet been completed with you.
Se
THIS MANUAL SHOULD ALWAYS STAY WITH THE MACHINE
BACKHOE LOADER - 3CX, 4CX ECO

ENGLISH - 9821/1300 - ISSUE 1 - JANUARY 2011
Copyright 2004 JCB SERVICE.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by any other means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying or otherwise, without prior permission from JCB SERVICE.
A4-2-BHL - Printed In England
Se
rv
ic
es
Notes:
9821/1300
Contents
Contents
Page No.
Safety Notices
Important Information ................................................................................... ix
The Operator Manual .............................................................................. ix
Safety Warnings ...................................................................................... ix
Se
rv
ic
es
Introduction
About This Manual ......................................................................................... 1
Machine Model and Serial Number .......................................................... 1
Using this Manual ..................................................................................... 1
Left Side, Right Side ................................................................................. 1
Cab/Canopy ............................................................................................. 1
Cross References ..................................................................................... 1
Machine Description ...................................................................................... 2
The JCB Backhoe Loader ........................................................................ 2
Intended Use ............................................................................................ 2
Component List ........................................................................................ 2
Safety Check List ........................................................................................... 3
Safety - Yours and Others ........................................................................ 3
General Safety ......................................................................................... 3
Operating Safety ...................................................................................... 5
Maintenance Safety .................................................................................. 8
Safety Labels ............................................................................................... 13
Introduction ............................................................................................. 13
Safety Label Identification ...................................................................... 14
Identifying Your Machine ............................................................................. 17
Machine Identification Plate ................................................................... 17
Component Identification Plates ............................................................. 18
Transmission Identification Numbers ..................................................... 19
ROPS/FOPS Certification plate .............................................................. 21
FOPS Data Plate .................................................................................... 21
Machine Security ......................................................................................... 22
Introduction ............................................................................................. 22
JCB Plantguard ...................................................................................... 22
LiveLink .................................................................................................. 22
Construction Equipment Security And Registration Scheme (CESAR) . 22
Operation
Introduction .................................................................................................. 23
Before Entering the Cab .............................................................................. 24
Entering and Leaving the Cab ..................................................................... 25
Doors and Windows .................................................................................... 26
Opening and Closing the Door ............................................................... 26
Opening and Closing the Side Windows ................................................ 26
Opening and Closing the Rear Window ................................................. 27
Seat Controls ............................................................................................... 29
Introduction ............................................................................................. 29
Standard Seat ......................................................................................... 29
Electrical Options ................................................................................... 31
Seat Belt ...................................................................................................... 32
Inertia Reel Seat Belt ............................................................................. 32
Visibility Aids ................................................................................................ 33
Mirrors .................................................................................................... 33
Cab Layout (Manual Controls) ..................................................................... 34
Component Key ...................................................................................... 35
Contents
Se
rv
ic
es
Contents
Page No.
Cab Layout (Easy Controls) ........................................................................ 36
Component Key ...................................................................................... 37
Cab Layout (Advanced Easy Controls) ....................................................... 38
Component Key ...................................................................................... 39
Drive Controls, Switches and Instruments ................................................... 40
Drive Controls ......................................................................................... 40
Switches ................................................................................................. 47
Instruments ............................................................................................. 56
Hydraulic Flow Control (EcoDIG) ........................................................... 61
TorqueLock (ECOLoad) .......................................................................... 64
Extreme Cold Climate Heater Switch (Optional) .................................... 65
Air Conditioning and Cab Heater Controls ............................................. 69
Operating Levers ......................................................................................... 70
Introduction ............................................................................................. 70
Control Layouts ...................................................................................... 70
Loader Controls ...................................................................................... 71
Backhoe Controls ................................................................................... 83
Stabiliser Controls ................................................................................ 104
Auxiliary Controls ................................................................................. 106
Safety Equipment ...................................................................................... 112
Boom and Slew Locks .......................................................................... 112
Control Lever Locks (If Fitted) .............................................................. 114
Overload Warning System (If Fitted) .................................................... 115
Beacon ................................................................................................. 116
Fire Extinguisher (If Fitted) ................................................................... 117
Before Starting the Engine ......................................................................... 118
Starting The Engine ................................................................................... 120
Preparing The Machine For Travel ............................................................ 122
Backhoe Attachments .......................................................................... 122
Tucked In Travel Position ..................................................................... 122
Central Protruding Travel Position ........................................................ 123
Road Travel Position ............................................................................ 123
Site Travel Position ............................................................................... 125
Getting The Machine Moving ..................................................................... 127
Operating Practices .............................................................................. 127
Stopping and Parking the Machine ............................................................ 130
Working With The Machine ....................................................................... 132
Operating Practices and Site Safety .................................................... 132
Clothing and Safety Equipment ............................................................ 132
Danger Zone ........................................................................................ 132
Log Moving/Handling ............................................................................ 132
Safety Practices ................................................................................... 133
Working With The Loader ..................................................................... 134
Working With The Backhoe .................................................................. 138
Lifting (Object Handling) ....................................................................... 156
Getting the Machine Unstuck ............................................................... 159
Operating Environment .............................................................................. 160
Operating in Low Temperatures ........................................................... 160
Operating in High Temperatures .......................................................... 160
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Areas ...................................................... 160
Operating in Coastal Regions .............................................................. 160
Operating on Wet or Soft Ground ......................................................... 160
Refuelling the Machine .............................................................................. 161
Low Fuel Levels ................................................................................... 161
Filling the Tank ..................................................................................... 161
ii
ii
Contents
es
Contents
Page No.
Moving A Disabled Machine ...................................................................... 163
Towing and Retrieval ............................................................................ 163
Lowering a Load ................................................................................... 165
Transporting The Machine ......................................................................... 166
Lifting A Machine ....................................................................................... 168
Storage of the Machine ............................................................................. 171
Introduction ........................................................................................... 171
Storage Area ........................................................................................ 171
Prepare the Machine for Storage ......................................................... 171
Put the Machine into Storage ............................................................... 171
During Storage ..................................................................................... 171
Take the Machine Out of Storage ......................................................... 172
Se
rv
ic
Routine Maintenance
Service Requirements ............................................................................... 173
Introduction ........................................................................................... 173
Owner/Operator Support ...................................................................... 173
Service/Maintenance Agreements ....................................................... 173
Initial Service and Inspection ................................................................ 173
Fit for Purpose Tests for Lifting Equipment ........................................... 174
Obtaining Replacement Parts ............................................................... 174
Health and Safety ...................................................................................... 175
Lubricants ............................................................................................. 175
Battery .................................................................................................. 177
Service Schedules ..................................................................................... 179
Introduction ........................................................................................... 179
How to Use the Service Schedules ...................................................... 179
Calendar Equivalents ........................................................................... 179
Pre-start Cold Checks, Service Points and Fluid Levels ...................... 180
Functional Test and Final Inspection .................................................... 184
Fluids, Lubricants and Capacities .............................................................. 186
Coolant Mixtures .................................................................................. 188
Fuels ..................................................................................................... 189
Tools .......................................................................................................... 192
Toolbox (If fitted) ................................................................................... 192
Carrying Tools onto the Machine .......................................................... 192
Prepare the Machine for Maintenance ...................................................... 193
Introduction ........................................................................................... 193
How to Make the Machine Safe (Loader Arm Lowered) ...................... 194
How to Make the Machine Safe (Loader Arm Lifted) ........................... 194
Cleaning the Machine ................................................................................ 196
Introduction ........................................................................................... 196
Preparing the Machine for Cleaning ..................................................... 196
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................... 197
Checking for Damage ................................................................................ 200
Check the Machine Body and Structure ............................................... 200
Check the Tyres ................................................................................... 200
Check the Seat and Seat Belt .............................................................. 200
Check the Hydraulic Hoses and Fittings .............................................. 200
Check the Electrical Circuits ................................................................. 201
Checking The ROPS/FOPS Structure .................................................. 201
iii
iii
Contents
Se
rv
ic
es
Contents
Page No.
Greasing .................................................................................................... 203
Introduction ........................................................................................... 203
Preparing the Machine for Greasing .................................................... 203
Loader Arms ......................................................................................... 204
Backhoe and Quickhitch ....................................................................... 205
Front Axle (2 Wheel Drive Machines) ................................................... 206
Front Axle (4 Wheel Drive Machines) ................................................... 206
Front Axle (All Wheel Drive Machines) ................................................. 207
Rear Axle (All Wheel Drive Machines) ................................................. 207
Extending Dipper .................................................................................. 208
Driveshafts ........................................................................................... 208
6-in-1 Clamshovel ................................................................................ 209
Stabilisers (Centremount Machines) .................................................... 209
Loader Quickhitch ................................................................................ 209
Power Sideshift .................................................................................... 209
Kingpost ............................................................................................... 210
Knuckle (If Fitted) ................................................................................. 210
Backhoe Quickhitch (Hydraulic) ........................................................... 211
Access Panels ........................................................................................... 212
Introduction ........................................................................................... 212
Engine Cover ........................................................................................ 212
Front Grille ............................................................................................ 215
Heater and Air Conditioning ...................................................................... 216
Cleaning the Cab Heater Fresh Air Filter ............................................. 216
Changing the Cab Air Conditioning Recirculation Filters (If Fitted) ...... 217
Brakes ....................................................................................................... 218
Park Brake ............................................................................................ 218
Electrical System ....................................................................................... 220
Battery .................................................................................................. 220
Jump Starting The Engine .................................................................... 222
Fuses (Manual Controls) ...................................................................... 223
Fuses (Easy Controls / Advanced Easy Controls) ............................... 224
Link Box Fuses ..................................................................................... 225
Relays (Manual Controls) ..................................................................... 226
Relays (Easy Controls / Advanced Easy Controls) .............................. 227
Engine ....................................................................................................... 229
Oil and Filter ......................................................................................... 229
Cooling System .................................................................................... 231
Front End Accessory Drive Belt ........................................................... 233
Air Filter ................................................................................................ 235
Fuel System ............................................................................................... 236
Introduction ........................................................................................... 236
Water Separator and Engine Fuel Filter ............................................... 236
Bleeding the System ............................................................................ 241
Hydraulic System ....................................................................................... 242
Introduction ........................................................................................... 242
Releasing the Hydraulic Pressure ........................................................ 242
Hydraulic Tank Filler Cap ..................................................................... 243
Oil and Filter ......................................................................................... 244
Hose Burst Protection Valves (If fitted) ................................................. 248
Transmission ............................................................................................. 249
Gearbox ................................................................................................ 249
Axles (All Wheel Steer Machines) ........................................................ 252
Axles (Two Wheel Steer Machines) ...................................................... 254
iv
iv
Contents
es
Contents
Page No.
Tyres and Wheels ...................................................................................... 256
Tyre Inflation ......................................................................................... 256
Wheel Nuts ........................................................................................... 257
Wheel Alignment ....................................................................................... 258
Introduction ........................................................................................... 258
Electronic Steer Mode Selector ............................................................ 258
Wear Pads ................................................................................................. 259
Extending Dipper Wear Pads ............................................................... 259
Stabiliser Legs (Sideshift Machines Only) ............................................ 261
Powered Sideshift ...................................................................................... 262
Chain Adjustment ................................................................................. 262
Windscreen Washer .................................................................................. 263
Checking the Level ............................................................................... 263
Fire Extinguisher (if fitted) .......................................................................... 264
Checking the Fire Extinguisher ............................................................ 264
Se
rv
ic
Optional Attachments
Introduction ................................................................................................ 265
Attachments For Your Machine ................................................................. 266
Connecting/Disconnecting Hydraulic Hoses .............................................. 267
Introduction ........................................................................................... 267
Connecting the Hydraulic Hoses .......................................................... 267
Disconnecting the Hydraulic Hoses ...................................................... 268
Quick Release Couplings ..................................................................... 269
Directly Mounted Backhoe Attachments .................................................... 271
Installing Directly Mounted Backhoe Attachments ............................... 271
Auxiliary Attachment Operation (If Fitted) .................................................. 272
Auxiliary Return Hose Options ............................................................. 272
Loader Quickhitch (If Fitted) ...................................................................... 273
Loader Quickhitch Carriage .................................................................. 273
Loader Quickhitch Attachments ............................................................ 275
Backhoe Quickhitch - Mechanical Type (If Fitted) ..................................... 280
Installing The Quickhitch ...................................................................... 280
Removing The Quickhitch .................................................................... 281
Installing Backhoe Quickhitch Attachments .......................................... 281
Removing Backhoe Quickhitch Attachments ........................................ 282
Shovel - Forks (If Fitted) ............................................................................ 284
Safety and Control ................................................................................ 284
Preparing the Forks for Use ................................................................. 284
Preparing For Road Travel ................................................................... 285
Preparing For Site Travel ..................................................................... 285
Adjust The Fork Spacing ...................................................................... 285
Daily Maintenance ................................................................................ 285
Tool Carrier and Forks (If Fitted) ................................................................ 286
Preparing the Forks for Use ................................................................. 286
Adjust the Fork Spacing ....................................................................... 287
Preparing for Road Travel .................................................................... 287
Preparing for Site Travel ....................................................................... 287
Preparing for Shovel Operation ............................................................ 287
Hammer (If Fitted) ..................................................................................... 288
Hammer Operation (Manual and Easy Control Machines) ................... 288
High and Low Flow Attachments (Advanced Easy Control Machines) . 290
Changing the 1 inch (Diameter) Return Line Filter (If Fitted) ............... 291
Contents
es
Contents
Page No.
Bi-Directional and Hammer Circuits (If fitted) ............................................ 292
Procedure ............................................................................................. 292
Hydraulic Tool Circuit (H.T.C) (If fitted) ...................................................... 296
Connecting the Hand Held Tool ............................................................ 296
Operating The Tool ............................................................................... 297
Disconnecting the Hand Held Tool ....................................................... 297
Hose Reel (If fitted) .................................................................................... 298
Location on Machine ............................................................................ 298
Using the Hose Reel ............................................................................ 298
Side Tip Shovel (If Fitted) .......................................................................... 299
Safety Decals ....................................................................................... 299
Side Tip Operation ................................................................................ 300
Work Platforms .......................................................................................... 302
Se
rv
ic
Specifications
Lifting (Object Handling) Regulations and Safe Working Loads ................ 303
Introduction ........................................................................................... 303
Loader End ........................................................................................... 304
Excavator End ...................................................................................... 306
3CX / 4CX Backhoe Excavator Bucket Weights And Dimensions ............ 309
General Purpose Buckets (Standard Profile) - Bolt on Teeth ............... 309
General Purpose Buckets (Deep Profile) - Bolt on Teeth ..................... 309
Heavy Duty Buckets (Standard Profile) - Bolt on Teeth ........................ 310
Heavy Duty Buckets (Standard Profile) - USA ..................................... 311
Ditching / Grading Buckets ................................................................... 311
Tapered Ditching Buckets ..................................................................... 311
Jaw Bucket ........................................................................................... 311
Excavator Quick Hitch .......................................................................... 312
3CX/ 4CX Loader Bucket Weights And Dimensions ................................. 313
Loader Shovels .................................................................................... 313
Loader Quickhitches ............................................................................. 314
Fork Frames, Forks and Accessories ................................................... 314
Static Dimensions ...................................................................................... 315
3CX Machines ...................................................................................... 315
3CX Super Machines ........................................................................... 317
4CX Machines ...................................................................................... 319
Hydraulic Hose Burst Pressures ................................................................ 321
Noise Data ................................................................................................. 322
Introduction ........................................................................................... 322
All Machines ......................................................................................... 322
Vibration Data ............................................................................................ 323
Introduction ........................................................................................... 323
4CX, 3CX Super ................................................................................... 324
3CX ...................................................................................................... 326
Tyre Sizes And Pressures ......................................................................... 328
Travel Speed ............................................................................................. 332
Warranty Information
Machine Service Record Sheet ................................................................. 333
Registration Information ............................................................................ 335
vi
vi
Contents
Se
rv
ic
es
Contents
Page No.
European Community Standards
EC Declaration of Conformity .................................................................... 337
Introduction ........................................................................................... 337
Explanation of the EC Declaration of Conformity ................................. 339
vii
vii
Contents
Page No.
Se
rv
ic
es
Contents
viii
viii
Safety Notices
Important Information
T1-042
The Operator Manual
Safety Warnings
!MWARNING
Do not operate the machine without an Operator Manual,

or if there is anything on the machine you do not
understand.
In this publication and on the machine, there are safety

notices. Each notice starts with a signal word. The signal
word meanings are given below.
!MDANGER
Denotes an extreme hazard exists. If proper

precautions are not taken, it is highly probable that the
operator (or others) could be killed or seriously
injured.
rv
Treat the Operator Manual as part of the machine. Keep it

clean and in good condition. Replace the Operator Manual
immediately if it is lost, damaged or becomes unreadable.
es
INT-1-4-2
ic
You and others can be killed or seriously injured if you

operate or maintain the machine without first studying
the Operator Manual. You must understand and follow
the instructions in the Operator Manual. If you do not
understand anything, ask your employer or JCB
dealer to explain it.
This safety alert system identifies

important safety messages in this
manual. When you see this symbol, be
alert, your safety is involved, carefuly
read the message that follows, and inform
other operators.
INT-1-2-1
!MWARNING
Se
Denotes a hazard exists. If proper precautions are not

taken, the operator (or others) could be killed or
seriously injured.
INT-1-2-2
!MCAUTION
INT-1-2-3
Denotes a reminder of safety practices. Failure to

follow these safety practices could result in injury to
the operator (or others) and possible damage to the
machine.
ix
9821-1300-1
ix
Safety Notices
Important Information
Se
rv
ic
es
Page left intentionally blank
9821-1300-1
Introduction
About This Manual
Machine Model and Serial Number
Left Side, Right Side
This manual provides information for the following

model(s) in the JCB machine range:
In this manual, 'left' A and 'right' B mean your left and right
when you are seated correctly in the machine.
P2-1002
3CX / 4CX from 2000000 onwards
This is so whether you are facing the loader (front) or the

backhoe (rear).
es
Using this Manual

T1-044
rv
If there is anything you are not sure about, ask your JCB
distributor or employer. Do not guess, you or others could
be killed or seriously injured.
ic
This manual is arranged to give you a good understanding

of the machine and its safe operation. It also contains
maintenance information and specification data. Read this
manual from front to back before using the machine for the
first time. Particular attention must be given to all the safety
aspects of operating and maintaining the machine.
Se
General warnings in this chapter are repeated throughout

the book, as well as specific warnings. Read all the safety
statements regularly, so you do not forget them.
Remember that the best operators are the safest
operators.
B
C003690
Fig 1.
The illustrations in this manual are for guidance only.

Where the machines differ, the text and or the illustration
will specify.
Cab/Canopy
This manual contains original instructions, verified by the

manufacturer (or their authorised representative).
This manual frequently makes references to the cab. For

instance, 'do not operate the machine without a manual in
the cab'. It should be noted that these statements also
apply to canopy build machines.
The manufacturer's policy is one of continuous

improvement. The right to change the specification of the
machine without notice is reserved. No responsibility will
be accepted for discrepancies which may occur between
specifications of the machine and the descriptions
contained in this publication.
All optional equipment included in this manual may not be

available in all territories.
T1-003_2
Cross References
T1-004_2
In this publication, page cross references are made by

presenting the subject title printed in bold, italic and
underlined. It is preceeded by the 'go to' symbol. The
number of the page upon which the subject begins, is
indicated within the brackets. For example: K Cross
References ( T 1).
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Machine Description
Machine Description
The Backhoe Loader is a self propelled wheeled machine

with a main frame designed to carry both front mounted
equipment and rear mounted backhoe equipment with
stabilisers.
When used in the backhoe mode, the machine is
stationary and normally digs below ground level. A
backhoe work cycle normally comprises excavating,
elevating, swinging and discharging material
When used in the loader mode (bucket use), the machine
loads through forward motion. A loader work cycle
normally comprises filling, elevating, transporting and
discharge of material.
Intended Use
Component List
1
Loader arm
ROPS/FOPS cab
Hydraulic oil tank
Battery compartment
Boom
Fuel tank
Stabilisers
Kingpost
Dipper
rv
The machine is intended to be used under normal

conditions for the applications described in this manual. If
the machine is used for other purposes or in dangerous
environments, for example in a flammable atmosphere or
in areas with dust containing asbestos, special safety
regulations must be followed and the machine must be

equipped for use in these environments.
es
P2-1001_3
ic
The JCB Backhoe Loader
Toolbox (If Fitted)
11
Wheel Brace and Tommy Bar
Se
10
11
10
T052810-1
Fig 2.
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
Safety Check List

P2-1005_3
Safety - Yours and Others
General Safety
INT-1-3-1_3
But safety is not just a matter of responding to the

warnings. All the time you are working on or with the
machine you must be thinking what hazards there might be
and how to avoid them.
Do not work with the machine until you are sure that you
can control it.
BE CAREFUL
BE ALERT
BE SAFE
!MWARNING
Care and Alertness

All the time you are working with or on the machine,
take care and stay alert. Always be careful. Always be
alert for hazards.
INT-1-3-5
!MWARNING
Clothing
You can be injured if you do not wear the proper
clothing. Loose clothing can get caught in the
machinery. Wear protective clothing to suit the job.
Examples of protective clothing are: a hard hat, safety
shoes, safety glasses, a well fitting overall, earprotectors and industrial gloves. Keep cuffs fastened.
Do not wear a necktie or scarf. Keep long hair
restrained. Remove rings, watches and personal
jewellery.
Se
If you are unsure of anything, about the machine or the job,

ask someone who knows. Do not assume anything.
Remember
INT-1-4-1
rv
Do not start any job until you are sure that you and those
around you will be safe.
To operate the machine safely you must know the

machine and have the skill to use it. You must abide by
all relevant laws, health and safety regulations that
apply to the country you are operating in. The
Operator Manual instructs you on the machine, its
controls and its safe operation; it is not a training
manual. If you are a new operator, get yourself trained
in the skills of using a machine before trying to work
with it. If you don't, you will not do your job well, and
you will be a danger to yourself and others.
es
In this manual and on the machine you will find warning

messages. Read and understand them. They tell you of
potential hazards and how to avoid them. If you do not fully
understand the warning messages, ask your employer or
JCB distributor to explain them.
!MWARNING
T1-043
ic
All machinery can be hazardous. When a machine is

correctly operated and properly maintained, it is a safe
machine to work with. But when it is carelessly operated or
poorly maintained it can become a danger to you (the
operator) and others.
INT-1-3-6_2
!MWARNING
Alcohol and Drugs
It is extremely dangerous to operate machinery when
under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Do not
consume alcoholic drinks or take drugs before or
while operating the machine or attachments. Be aware
of medicines which can cause drowsiness.
INT-1-3-9_2
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MWARNING
!MDANGER
Feeling Unwell
Do not attempt to operate the machine if you are
feeling unwell. By doing so you could be a danger to
yourself and those you work with.
Lightning
Lightning can kill you. Do not use the machine if there
is lightning in your area.
5-1-1-2
8-1-2-4
!MWARNING
Mobile Phones
Switch off your mobile phone before entering an area
with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in
such an area could cause an explosion or fire
resulting in death or serious injury.
Machine Modifications
This machine is manufactured in compliance with
legislative and other requirements. It should not be
altered in any way which could affect or invalidate any
of these requirements. For advice consult your JCB
Distributor.
es
!MWARNING
INT-1-3-10_2
Switch off and do not use your mobile phone when

refuelling the machine.
!MWARNING
INT-1-3-7_2
Se
!MWARNING
rv
Lifting Equipment
You can be injured if you use incorrect or faulty lifting
equipment. You must identify the weight of the item to
be lifted then choose lifting equipment that is strong
enough and suitable for the job. Make sure that lifting
equipment is in good condition and complies with all
local regulations.
ic
INT-3-3-9
Raised Equipment
Never walk or work under raised equipment unless it
is supported by a mechanical device. Equipment
which is supported only by a hydraulic device can
drop and injure you if the hydraulic system fails or if
the control is operated (even with the engine stopped).
Make sure that no-one goes near the machine while

you install or remove the mechanical device.
13-2-3-7_3
!MWARNING
Raised Machine
NEVER position yourself or any part of your body
under a raised machine which is not properly
supported. If the machine moves unexpectedly you
could become trapped and suffer serious injury or be
killed.
INT-3-3-7_1
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MWARNING
Operating Safety
INT-2-1-2_2
!MWARNING
Machine Limits
Operating the machine beyond its design limits can
damage the machine, it can also be dangerous. Do not
operate the machine outside its limits. Do not try to
upgrade the machine performance with unapproved
modifications.
INT-2-1-4
!MWARNING
INT-2-1-5
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
Communications
Bad communications can cause accidents. Keep
people around you informed of what you will be doing.
If you will be working with other people, make sure any
hand signals that may be used are understood by
everybody. Work sites can be noisy, do not rely on
spoken commands.
INT-2-2-3
!MWARNING
Parking
An incorrectly parked machine can move without an
operator. Follow the instructions in the Operator
Manual to park the machine correctly.
Se
Exhaust Gases
Breathing the machine exhaust gases can harm and
possibly kill you. Do not operate the machine in closed
spaces without making sure there is good ventilation.
If possible, fit an exhaust extension. If you begin to
feel drowsy, stop the machine at once and get into
fresh air.
INT-2-1-10_2
INT-2-2-1_2
rv
Engine/Steering Failure
If the engine or steering fails, stop the machine as
quickly as possible. Do not operate the machine until
the fault has been corrected.
es
Machine Condition
A defective machine can injure you or others. Do not
operate a machine which is defective or has missing
parts. Make sure the maintenance procedures in this
manual are completed before using the machine.
Work Sites
Work sites can be hazardous. Inspect the site before
working on it. You could be killed or injured if the
ground gives way under your machine or if piled
material collapses onto it. Check for potholes and
hidden debris, logs, ironwork etc. Any of these could
cause you to lose control of your machine. Check for
utilities such as electric cables (overhead and
underground), gas and water pipes etc. Mark the
positions of the underground cables and pipes. Make
sure that you have enough clearance beneath
overhead cables and structures.
ic
!MWARNING
INT-2-2-4_2
!MWARNING
Banks and Trenches

Banked material and trenches can collapse. Do not
work or drive too close to banks and trenches where
there is danger of collapse.
INT-2-2-5
!MWARNING
Safety Barriers
Unguarded machines in public places can be
dangerous. In public places, or where your visibility is
reduced, place barriers around the work area to keep
people away.
INT-2-2-8
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MDANGER
!MWARNING
Sparks
Explosions and fire can be caused by sparks from the
exhaust or the electrical system. Do not use the
machine in closed areas where there is flammable
material, vapour or dust.
Keep the machine controls clean and dry. Your hands

and feet could slide off slippery controls. If that
happens you could lose control of the machine.
2-2-3-6
!MWARNING
INT-2-2-10
Hazardous Atmospheres
This machine is designed for use in normal out door
atmospheric conditions. It should not be used in an
enclosed area without adequate ventilation. Do not
use the machine in a potentially explosive
atmosphere, i.e. combustible vapours, gas or dust,
without first consulting your JCB Distributor.
Regulations
Obey all laws, work site and local regulations which
affect you and your machine.
There is a minimum clearance required for working

beneath overhead power cables. You must obtain
details from your local electricity supplier.
2-2-5-4
!MWARNING
rv
INT-1-3-3
!MCAUTION
If you have an attachment which is not covered in the

Operator Manual do not install it, use it or remove it
until you have obtained, read and understood the
pertinent information. Install attachments only on the
machines for which they were designed.
Se
Practice
You or others can be killed or seriously injured if you
do unfamiliar operations without first practising them.
Practise away from the work site on a clear area. Keep
other people away. Do not perform new operations
until you are sure you can do them safely.
!MWARNING
Airborne particles of light combustible material such

as straw, grass, wood shavings, etc. must not be
allowed to accumulate within the engine compartment
or in the propshaft guards (when fitted). Inspect these
areas frequently and clean at the beginning of each
work shift or more often if required. Before opening
the engine cover, ensure that the top is clear of debris.
H
6
ic
!MCAUTION
5-3-1-12_3
You are strongly advised to make sure that the safety

arrangements on site comply with the local laws and
regulations concerning work near electric power lines.
Before you start using the machine, check with your
electricity supplier if there are any buried power
cables on the site.
INT-2-1-14
INT-2-1-1
Electrical Power Cables

You could be electrocuted or badly burned if you get
the machine or its attachments too close to electrical
power cables.
es
!MWARNING
5-5-1-1_2
!MWARNING
Use only the JCB approved attachments that are

specified for your machine. Operating with nonspecified attachments can overload the machine,
causing possible damage and machine instability
which could result in injury to yourself or others.
The use of non-approved attachments could invalidate
your warranty.
2-4-5-2_1
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MDANGER
!MWARNING
Working Platform
Using the machine as a working platform is
hazardous; you can fall off and be killed or injured.
Never use the machine as a working platform.
High Loads
A high load can block your view and reduce the
machine's stability. Travel with the load low to the
ground. Travel slowly and with caution over rough,
muddy or loose surfaces.
5-1-5-9
5-1-3-2
Machine Safety
Stop work at once if a fault develops. Abnormal
sounds and smells can be signs of trouble. Inspect
and repair before resuming work.
8-1-2-3
10-1-1-40
Travelling at High Speeds

Travelling at high speeds can cause accidents. Do not
reverse in a high gear with full throttle. Always travel
at a safe speed to suit working conditions.
INT-2-2-7
!MWARNING
Visibility
Accidents can be caused by working in poor visibility.
Use your lights to improve visibility. Keep the road
lights, windows and mirrors clean.
Se
The engine has exposed rotating parts. Switch OFF the

engine before working in the engine compartment. Do
not use the machine with the engine cover open.
5-2-6-5
Hillsides
Operating the machine on hillsides can be dangerous
if proper precautions are not taken. Ground conditions
can be changed by rain, snow, ice etc. Check the site
carefully. Operate in first gear on hillsides, when
applicable, keep all attachments low to the ground.
Never coast down a hill with the engine off or the
transmission in neutral.
rv
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
ic
Touching hot surfaces can burn skin. The engine and

machine components will be hot after the unit has
been running. Allow the engine and components to
cool before servicing the unit.
!MWARNING
Slopes
When transporting a load on a slope, drive slowly and
keep the load uphill of the machine. This will increase
stability.
5-1-4-1
!MWARNING
INT-5-3-3
!MWARNING
es
!MWARNING
Do not operate the machine if you cannot see clearly.
5-1-4-7
!MWARNING
You could be killed or seriously injured if you operate

a machine with a damaged or missing ROPS/FOPS. If
the Roll Over Protection Structure (ROPS)/Falling
Objects Protection Structure (FOPS) has been in an
accident, do not use the machine until the structure
has been renewed. Modifications and repairs that are
not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous
and will invalidate the ROPS/FOPS certification.
Keep Your Hands and Feet Inside the Vehicle

When using the machine, keep your hands and feet
clear of moving parts. Keep your hands and feet within
the operator compartment while the vehicle is in
motion.
!MWARNING
13-1-1-17
INT-2-1-9_6
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MWARNING
Maintenance Safety
Controls
operate the control levers from outside the machine.
Operate the control levers only when you are correctly
seated.
!MWARNING
INT-2-2-2_1
INT-3-1-5
0179_2
!MCAUTION
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
Should the machine start to roll over, you can be

crushed if you try to leave the cab. If the machine
starts to roll over, do not try and jump from the cab.
Stay in the cab, with your seat belt fastened.
!MWARNING
Metal Splinters
You can be injured by flying metal splinters when
driving metal pins in or out. Use a soft faced hammer
or copper pin to remove and fit metal pins. Always
wear safety glasses.
INT-3-1-3_2
!MWARNING
Electrical Circuits
Understand the electrical circuit before connecting or
disconnecting an electrical component. A wrong
connection can cause injury and/or damage.
INT-3-1-4
INT-2-1-12
GEN-1-5_2
Se
!MWARNING
rv
Do not use water to put out a machine fire, you could

spread an oil fire or get a shock from an electrical fire.
Use carbon dioxide, dry chemical or foam
extinguishers. Contact your nearest fire department as
quickly as possible. Firefighters should use selfcontained breathing apparatus.
Repairs
If your machine does not function correctly in any way,
get it repaired straight away. Neglect of necessary
repairs could result in an accident or affect your
health. Do not try to do repairs or any other type of
maintenance work you do not understand. To avoid
injury and/or damage get the work done by a specialist
engineer.
ic
Fires
If your machine is equipped with a fire extinguisher,
make sure it is checked regularly. Keep it in the correct
machine location until you need to use it.
INT-3-2-7_2
es
Passengers
Passengers in or on the machine can cause accidents.
Do not carry passengers.
Communications
Bad communications can cause accidents. If two or
more people are working on the machine, make sure
each is aware of what the others are doing. Before
starting the engine make sure the others are clear of
the danger areas; examples of danger areas are: the
rotating blades and belt on the engine, the
attachments and linkages, and anywhere beneath or
behind the machine. People can be killed or injured if
these precautions are not taken.
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MWARNING
!MCAUTION
Fluid Under Pressure

Fine jets of fluid at high pressure can penetrate the
skin. Keep face and hands well clear of fluid under
pressure and wear protective glasses and gloves.
Hold a piece of cardboard close to suspected leaks
and then inspect the cardboard for signs of fluid. If
fluid penetrates your skin, get medical help
immediately.
It is illegal to pollute drains, sewers or the ground.

Clean up all spilt fluids and/or lubricants.
Used fluids and/or lubricants, filters and contaminated
materials must be disposed of in accordance with
local regulations. Use authorised waste disposal sites.
INT-3-2-14
!MWARNING
INT-3-1-10_3
INT-3-1-11_2
INT-3-2-4
es
Hydraulic Pressure
Hydraulic fluid at system pressure can injure you.
Before connecting or removing any hydraulic hose,
residual hydraulic pressure trapped in the service
hose line must be vented. Make sure the hose service
line has been vented before connecting or removing
hoses. Make sure the engine cannot be started while
the hoses are open.
Soft Ground
A machine can sink into soft ground. Never work
under a machine on soft ground.
!MWARNING
Always wear safety glasses when dismantling

assemblies containing components under pressure
from springs. This will protect against eye injury from
components accidentally flying out.
ic
!MWARNING
GEN-6-2
!MCAUTION
rv
!MWARNING
INT-3-2-2_3
!MWARNING
Oil
Oil is toxic. If you swallow any oil, do not induce
vomiting, seek medical advice. Used engine oil
contains harmful contaminants which can cause skin
cancer. Do not handle used engine oil more than
necessary. Always use barrier cream or wear gloves to
prevent skin contact. Wash skin contaminated with oil
thoroughly in warm soapy water. Do not use petrol,
diesel fuel or paraffin to clean your skin.
INT-3-2-3
Rams
The efficiency of the rams will be affected if they are
not kept free of solidified dirt. Clean dirt from around
the rams regularly. When leaving or parking the
machine, close all rams if possible to reduce the risk
of weather corrosion.
Se
Fuel
Fuel is flammable; keep naked flames away from the
fuel system. Stop the engine immediately if a fuel leak
is suspected. Do not smoke while refuelling or
working on the fuel system. Do not refuel with the
engine running. Completely wipe off any spilt fuel
which could cause a fire. There could be a fire and
injury if you do not follow these precautions.
INT-3-2-10
!MCAUTION
Cleaning
Cleaning metal parts with incorrect solvents can cause
corrosion. Use only recommended cleaning agents
and solvents.
INT-3-2-11
!MWARNING
When using cleaning agents, solvents or other
chemicals, you must adhere to the manufacturer's
instructions and safety precautions.
GEN-1-9
9821/1300-1
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MCAUTION
!MWARNING
'O' rings, Seals and Gaskets

Badly fitted, damaged or rotted 'O' rings, seals and
gaskets can cause leakages and possible accidents.
Renew whenever disturbed unless otherwise
instructed. Do not use Triochloroethane or paint
thinners near 'O' rings and seals.
Certain seals and gaskets (e.g. crankshaft oil seal) on

JCB machines contain fluoroelastomeric materials
such
as
Viton,
Fluorel
and
Technoflon.
Fluoroelastomeric materials subjected to high
temperatures
can
produce
highly
corrosive
hydrofluoric acid. THIS ACID CAN SEVERELY BURN.
INT-3-2-12
New fluoroelastomeric components at ambient

temperature require no special safety precautions.
INT-3-3-2_4
!MCAUTION
Waxoyl contains turpentine substitute which is
flammable. Keep flames away when applying Waxoyl.
Waxoyl can take a few weeks to dry completely. Keep
flames away during the drying period.
5-3-1-9
Working Under the Machine

Make the machine safe before getting beneath it.
Ensure that any fitments on the machine are secure;
engage the park brake, remove the starter key,
disconnect the battery.
INT-3-3-8_2
Se
!MWARNING
Used fluoroelastomeric components subjected to

temperatures greater than 300C (572F) (e.g. engine
fire) must be treated using the following safety
procedure. Make sure that heavy duty gloves and
special safety glasses are worn:
Thoroughly wash contaminated area with 10%
calcium hydroxide or other suitable alkali
solution, if necessary use wire wool to remove
burnt remains.
rv
Do not weld near the affected area during the drying

period. Take the same precautions as for oil to keep
Waxoyl off your skin. Do not breathe the fumes. Apply
in a well-ventilated area.
Used
fluoroelastomeric
components
whose
temperatures have not exceeded 300C (572F) require
no special safety precautions. If evidence of
decomposition (e.g. charring) is found, refer to the
next paragraph for safety instructions DO NOT TOUCH
COMPONENT OR SURROUNDING AREA.
es
Hydraulic Hoses
Damaged hoses can cause fatal accidents. Inspect the
hoses regularly. Do not use the machine if a hose or
hose fitting is damaged.
ic
!MWARNING
Thoroughly wash contaminated

detergent and water.
area
with
Contain all removed material, gloves etc. used in

this operation in sealed plastic bags and dispose
of in accordance with Local Authority
Regulations.
DO NOT BURN FLUOROELASTOMERIC MATERIALS.
INT-3-3-5_3
10
!MWARNING
Protect your eyes when grinding metal. Wear safety
glasses or goggles. Remove or protect any
combustible materials from the area which could be
ignited by sparks.
GEN-1-12
9821/1300-1
10
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
To avoid burning, wear protective gloves when

handling hot components. To protect your eyes, wear
goggles when using a brush to clean components.
Accumulators
The accumulators contain hydraulic fluid and gas at
high pressure. Prior to any work being carried out on
systems incorporating accumulators, the system
pressure must be exhausted by a JCB distributor, as
the sudden release of the hydraulic fluid or gas may
cause injury.
Arc Welding
To prevent the possibility of damage to electronic
components, disconnect the battery and the alternator
before arc-welding on the machine or attached
implements.
If the machine is equipped with sensitive electrical
equipment, i.e. amplifier drivers, electronic control
units (E.C.U.s), monitor displays, etc., then disconnect
them before welding. Failure to disconnect the
sensitive electrical equipment could result in
irreparable damage to these components.
!MWARNING
Petrol
Do not use petrol in this machine. Do not mix petrol
with the diesel fuel; in storage tanks the petrol will rise
to the top and form flammable vapours.
INT-3-1-6
!MCAUTION
Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is

running, otherwise the electrical circuits may be
damaged.
INT-3-1-14
!MWARNING
rv
Parts of the machine are made from cast iron; welds

on cast iron can weaken the structure and break. Do
not weld cast iron. Do not connect the welder cable or
apply any weld to any part of the engine.
INT-3-1-17
es
!MWARNING
ic
HYD-1-3_2
If you try to charge a frozen battery, or jump start and

run the engine, the battery could explode. Do not use
a battery if its electrolyte is frozen. To prevent the
battery electrolyte from freezing, keep the battery at
full charge.
INT-3-1-15_2
0125
Se
Always connect the welder earth (ground) cable to the

same component that is being welded, i.e. boom or
dipper, to avoid damage to pivot pins, bearings and
bushes. Attach the welder earth (ground) cable no
more than 0.6 metres (2 feet) from the part being
welded.
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
Counterweights
Your machine may be fitted with counterweights. They
are extremely heavy. Do not attempt to remove them.
Battery Gases
Batteries give off explosive gases. Keep flames and
sparks away from the battery. Do not smoke close to
the battery. Make sure there is good ventilation in
closed areas where batteries are being used or
charged. Do not check the battery charge by shorting
the terminals with metal; use a hydrometer or
voltmeter.
INT-3-2-5
!MWARNING
INT-3-1-8
Compressed air is dangerous. Wear suitable eye

protection and gloves. Never point a compressed air
jet at yourself or others.
0147_1
11
9821/1300-1
11
Introduction
Safety Check List
!MDANGER
!MWARNING
Electrolyte
Battery electrolyte is toxic and corrosive. Do not
breathe the gases given off by the battery. Keep the
electrolyte away from your clothes, skin, mouth and
eyes. Wear safety glasses.
Wheels and tyres are heavy. Take care when lifting or

moving them.
INT-3-2-1_3
13-3-1-7_1
Store with care to ensure that they cannot fall and

cause injury.
!MWARNING
Battery Terminals
The machine is negatively earthed. Always connect
the negative pole of the battery to earth.
Asbestos
Asbestos dust can damage your lungs. Some engine
gaskets contain asbestos. Do not dismantle the
engine or exhaust system; get these jobs done by a
qualified person who has a copy of the engine service
manual.
When connecting the battery, connect the earth (-) lead

last.
5-1-6-1
When disconnecting the battery, disconnect the earth

(-) lead first.
!MWARNING
2-3-2-7_2
Se
!MWARNING
rv
An exploding tyre can kill. Inflated tyres can explode if

over-heated or over-inflated. Follow the instructions
given when inflating the tyres. Do not cut or weld the
rims. Use a tyre/wheel specialist for all repair work.
ic
INT-3-1-9
es
!MWARNING
Jacking
A machine can roll off jacks and crush you unless the
wheels have been blocked. Always block the wheels at
the opposite end of the machine that is to be jacked.
Do not work underneath a machine supported only by
jacks. Always support a jacked-up machine on axle
stands before working underneath it.
INT-3-2-8
!MWARNING
Under no circumstances must the engine be run with

the transmission in gear and only one driving wheel
jacked clear of the ground, since the wheel on the
ground will move the machine.
INT-3-1-16
12
9821/1300-1
12
Introduction
Safety Labels
Safety Labels
Introduction
!MWARNING
T1-014_2
Safety Labels
Safety labels on the machine warn you of particular
hazards. You can be injured if you do not obey the
safety instructions shown.
INT-1-3-11
Note: The illustration(s) show a typical machine model.

Your machine may look different from the model shown.
Se
rv
Keep all safety labels clean and readable. Replace lost or

damaged safety labels. Make sure replacement parts
include safety labels where necessary. Each safety label
has a part number printed on it, use this number to order a
new safety label from your JCB distributor.
ic
If you need eye-glasses for reading, make sure you wear

them when reading the safety labels. Do not over-stretch
or place yourself in dangerous positions to read the safety
labels. If you do not understand the hazard shown on the
safety label, then refer to Safety Label Identification.
es
Safety labels are strategically placed around the machine

to remind you of possible hazards.
13
9821/1300-1
13
Introduction
Safety Labels
Safety Label Identification

ISO-09F
ISO-02B
ISO-05C
ISO-10A
ISO-01A
+
ISO-06A
ISO-06D
ISO-15C
es
ISO-04D
Se
rv
ic
ISO-11C
ISO-09D
ISO-07B
ISO-07D
ISO-14F
711680-14
Fig 3.
14
9821/1300-1
14
Introduction
Safety Labels
ISO-01A
ISO-06A
Part Number: 817/70014
Part Number: 332-F5855
Description: Warning. Read the

operator manual before you operate
the machine.
Description: Pressure hazard. Read

operators manual
817-70014-3
332-F5855-1
ISO-06D
Description: Crushing of whole body.

Install the maintenance strut before
you start maintenance work below a
raised attachment. Refer to Making
the
Machine
Safe
(Routine
Maintenance Section).
Description: Hot fluid under pressure.

Refer to Cooling System (Routine
ISO-04D
ic
817-70104-4
es
ISO-02B
ISO-07B
rv
Description: Crush hazard. Do not

operate the controls from outside of
the machine.
Se
Description:
Explosion
hazard.
Remove the source of ignition. Refer
to Health and Safety, Battery
(Routine Maintenance Section).
817-70042-2
ISO-05C
817-70005-3
ISO-07D
Description: Runover. Start the engine

from the operator seat only. Do not
short across the terminals.
Description: Crush hazard. Keep a

safe distance from the moving parts.
817-70012-2
817-70112-2
817-70018-2
15
9821/1300-1
15
Introduction
Safety Labels
ISO-09D
ISO-015C
Part Number: 332/P7135-1
Description: Crush hazard (to feet).

Keep
a
safe
distance.
The
attachment/part may move when
released.
Description: Noise warning. Wear

applicable ear protection.
332-P7135-1
817-70021-2
ISO-014F
Part Number: 332/P4679
Part Number:
Description: Severing of hands or

fingers. Keep clear of/do not reach
into the moving parts. Stop the engine
and remove the starter key before you
start maintenance work. Refer to
Making the Machine Safe (Routine
Non-European Specification - 332/D6029
European Specification - Contact your JCB Dealer.
332-P4679-1
MACHINE
4CX
3CX
2CX
3C
SWL
(kgs)
718
718
440
158
SWL
(lbs)
1583
1583
969
348
SWL
332/D6029
332-D6029-1
Se
rv
ic
Description: Stability hazard. Make sure that the load is

within the capability of the machine. Refer to Object
Handling (Operation Section).
ISO-010A
Description: Crush hazard. Wear the
seat belt when you operate the
machine.
es
ISO-09F
817-70029-3
ISO-011C
817-70108-4
Description:
Fall
from
raised
attachment. Do not stand/ride on the
bucket or forks.
16
9821/1300-1
16
Introduction
Identifying Your Machine

Machine Identification Plate
Typical Product Identification Number (PIN)

P2-1006
Your machine has an identification plate mounted as

shown. The serial numbers of the machine and its major
units are stamped on the plate.
World Manufacturer Identification (3 Digits)
Machine Model (5 Digits)
Check Letter (1 Digit)
The Check Letter is used to verify the authenticity of

a machine's PIN.
4
Machine Serial Number (8 Digits)
Each machine has a unique serial number.
Se
rv
The machine and engine serial numbers can help identify

exactly the type of equipment you have.
es
The serial number of each major unit is also stamped on

the unit itself. If a major unit is replaced by a new one, the
serial number on the identification plate will be wrong.
Either stamp the new number of the unit on the
identification plate, or simply stamp out the old number.
This will prevent the wrong unit number being quoted when
replacement parts are ordered.
T016220-8
Fig 5.
ic
Note: The machine model and build specification is

indicated by the PIN. Refer to Typical Product
Identification Number (PIN).
T025210-3
Fig 4.
17
9821/1300-1
17
Introduction
Component Identification Plates
E
Typical Engine Identification Number
T1-005_3
Engine data labels A are located on the cylinder block at

position C and rocker cover D (if fitted). K Fig 6. ( T 18).
The data label contains important engine information and
includes the engine identification number E.
A typical engine identification number is explained as

follows:
320/40001
00001
04
es
SA
Engine Type
S = 4.4 litre series.
ic
JCB Dieselmax (Tier 2)

B = Turbocharged
rv
C = Turbocharged and intercooled
D = Turbocharged
C007820-C2
Fig 6. Engine
A = Naturally aspirated
JCB Dieselmax (Tier 3)
E = Electronic common rail fuel injection
Se
F = Turbocharged and after-cooled

2
Engine part number
Country of manufacture
U = United Kingdom
Engine Serial Number
Year of Manufacture
The last three parts of the engine identification number are

stamped on the cylinder block at position B.
00001
04
18
9821/1300-1
18
Introduction
Transmission Identification Numbers

Axles
The axles have a serial number stamped on a data plate
as shown.
Se
rv
Fig 7. Front Axle (2WS machine)
ic
es
Fig 10. Rear Axle (4WS machine)
Fig 8. Front Axle (4WS machine)
Fig 9. Rear Axle (2WS machine)
19
9821/1300-1
19
Introduction
Gearbox
Se
rv
Fig 11. Synchro Shuttle Transmission
ic
es
The gearbox has a serial number stamped on a data plate

as shown.
Fig 12. Powershift Transmission
20
9821/1300-1
20
Introduction
ROPS/FOPS Certification plate
Level I Impact Protection - impact strength for

protection from small falling objects (e.g. bricks, small
concrete blocks, hand tools) encountered in
operations such as highway maintenance,
landscaping and other construction site services.
es
Level II Impact Protection - impact strength for

protection from heavy falling objects (e.g. trees,
rocks) for machines involved in site clearing,
overhead demolition or forestry.
Machines built to ROPS/FOPS standards have an

identification label fitted to the inside of the cab.
K Fig 13. ( T 21).
Definition of terms:
ROPS Roll Over Protection Structure
Falling Objects Protection Structure
Se
FOPS
rv
The FOPS structure provides Level II Impact Protection

against falling objects (as defined in ISO 3449:2005).
ic
Fig 13. Cab
FOPS Data Plate
!MWARNING
Do not use the machine if the falling objects protection

level provided by the structure is not sufficient for the
application. Falling objects can cause serious injury.
8-2-8-17
If the machine is used in any application where there is a

risk of falling objects then a falling-objects protective
structure (FOPS) must be installed. For further information
contact your JCB Dealer
The falling objects protection structure (FOPS) is fitted with
a dataplate. The dataplate indicates what level protection
the structure provides.
There are two levels of FOPS:
21
9821/1300-1
21
Introduction
Machine Security
Machine Security
Vandalism and theft of unattended machines is an ever

increasing problem and JCB is doing everything possible
to help combat this.
Your JCB Distributor or Dealer will be pleased to provide
information on any of these sensible precautions. ACT
NOW!
JCB Plantguard
JCB PLANTGUARD is a comprehensive package
available to help you safeguard your machine. It includes
such devices as vandal proof covers, window etching,
immobiliser, concealed serial number, battery isolator,
Tracker security system and much more.
The Construction Equipment Association is managing the

scheme, and Datatag are providing the security material
and support. JCB is fully supportive of the CESAR initiative
and will offer it as a factory fit option across the range.
The CESAR kit includes 2 Tamper proof triangular ID
plates fitted on either side of the machine, a unique
transponder, mini radio frequency identification tags
(RFIDs) concealed throughout the machine, Datatag micro
dots, and a unique DNA coded chemical painted on the
machines major components. Plus a registration certificate
logged onto the CESAR or DVLA databases, and a change
of keeper form.
rv
Remember that the fitting of any one of these security

devices will help to minimise not only the damage or loss
of your machine but also subsequent lost productivity. It
could also result in reduced insurance premiums.
The key to the scheme is its simplicity and will mean that
every police officer in the country will know how to identify
construction machinery and verify ownership. This will
provide a major leap forward in both protecting machinery,
and recovering it.
es
T1-019
ic
Introduction
LiveLink
T1-052
Se
Your JCB machine may be installed with LiveLink, JCBs

advanced machine monitoring system. LiveLink monitors a
range of information about your machine and sends it via
cellular and satellite communication back to JCB's secure
monitoring centre. Machine owners and JCB dealers can
then view that information via the LiveLink website, by email and even via text message. If you want to know how
livelink can help manage your JCB machines, contact your
local dealer for more information.
Construction Equipment Security And

Registration Scheme (CESAR)
T1-020
JCB are pleased to announce, the availability of CESAR a

simple, effective method of machine identification and
registration that operates throughout the United Kingdom
and Ireland and across the whole spectrum of JCB
products.
CESAR is a scheme to help reduce plant theft, and was
developed by the Metropolitan Police and the Home Office
Plant Theft Action Group.
22
9821/1300-1
22
Operation
Introduction
T2-006_2
The aim of this part of the manual is to guide the operator

step-by-step through the task of learning how to operate
the machine efficiently and safely. Read the Operation
section through from beginning to end.
es
Before you start the machine, you must know how the
machine operates. Use your manual to identify each
control lever, switch, gauge, button and pedal. Do not
guess. If there is anything you do not understand, ask your
JCB distributor.
rv
When you understand the operating controls, gauges and

switches, practice using them. Drive the machine in an
open space, clear of people. Get to know the 'feel' of the
machine and its driving controls.
ic
The operator must always be aware of events happening

in or around the machine. Safety must always be the most
important factor when you operate the machine.
Finally, do not rush the job of learning, make sure you fully
understand everything in the Operation section. Take your
time and work efficiently and safely.
Se
Remember
BE CAREFUL
BE ALERT
BE SAFE
23
9821/1300-1
23
Operation
Before Entering the Cab
Before Entering the Cab

T2-025_3
The following checks should be made each time you return

to the machine after leaving it for any period of time. We
advise you also to stop the machine occasionally during
long work sessions and do the checks again.
d Inspect the windows for cracks and damage.

Glass splinters can blind.
e
Check for oil, fuel and coolant leakages

underneath the machine.
!MWARNING
!MWARNING
You could be killed or injured if a machine tyre bursts.

Do not use the machine with damaged, incorrectly
inflated or excessively worn tyres.
Walking or working under raised attachments can be

hazardous. You could be crushed by the attachments
or get caught in the linkages.
2-2-1-2
Check for cleanliness.

a
ic
Make sure that all of the filler caps are installed

correctly.
Make sure that all of the access panels are closed

and secure.
Note: If the filler caps and access panels are fitted with
locks, we recommend that you lock them to prevent theft
or tampering.
Clean the windows, light lenses and rear view

mirrors.
Se
rv
2-2-1-1
Make sure the tyres are correctly inflated.
Check for cut rubber and penetration by sharp

objects. Do not use a machine with damaged tyres.
Lower the attachments to the ground before doing

these checks. If you are new to this machine, get an
experienced operator to lower them for you.
If there is nobody to help you, study this manual until
you have learned how to lower the attachments. Also
make sure that the park brake is engaged before doing
these checks.
es
All these checks concern the serviceability of the machine.

Some concern your safety. Get your service engineer to
check and correct any defects.
b Remove dirt and debris, especially from around

the linkages, rams, pivot points and radiator.
c
Make sure the cab step and handholds are clean

and dry.
d Clean all safety and instructional labels. Replace

any that are missing or cannot be read.
Check for damage.
Inspect the machine generally for damaged and

missing parts.
b Make sure that the attachment is secure and in

good condition.
c
24
Make sure that all pivot pins are secured correctly

in place.
9821/1300-1
24
Operation
Entering and Leaving the Cab
Entering and Leaving the Cab
!MWARNING
Entering/Leaving
Entering or leaving the cab or canopy must only be
made where steps and handrails are provided. Always
face the machine when entering and leaving. Make
sure the step(s), handrails and your boot soles are
clean and dry. Do not jump from the machine. Do not
use the machine controls as handholds, use the
handrails.
es
INT-2-1-7_1
Se
rv
When you get on and off the machine always maintain a

three point contact with the handrails and step. Do not use
the machine controls or steering wheel as handholds.
ic
Make sure the machine is stopped and correctly parked

before entering or leaving the cab. If necessary, refer to
Stopping and Parking the Machine.
25
805130-2
Fig 14.
9821/1300-1
25
Operation
Doors and Windows
Doors and Windows

Opening and Closing the Door
Opening and Closing the Side Windows

T2-060
Close the door from the inside by pulling it firmly; it will

latch itself.
To open the door from the inside, operate lever B.
Note: Do not drive the machine with the door unlatched.
To open a side window, unlock latch E. Pull lever C towards

the front of the machine then lift the lever, while pushing
window outwards, until it latches down. To close the
window, first pull the lever towards the front of the machine
then pull the window inwards, lower the lever C and E to
latch it.
The window can be opened fully and secured to the door.
Open the window then pull lever C forward a little way to
unhook it from its pin on the frame.
es
To open a door from the outside, unlock it with the key and
pull the handle A. The door is fitted with an assister which
will spring it open and hold it open.
Swing the window right round to meet the outside of the

door. The window will latch to the door.
ic
To close the window, move handle D, swing the window

closed and set lever C back on its pin. Close the window
as described above.
Se
rv
Note: Do not drive the machine with the side windows

open.
770810-3
Fig 15.
26
9821/1300-1
26
Operation
Doors and Windows
Opening and Closing the Rear Window
!MCAUTION
The rear window is heavy. Take care when raising and
lowering it. If necessary, slide the seat towards the
loader end to give you more room when moving the
window.
2-2-1-5
!MCAUTION
C
es
On sideshift machines the rear window, when being

closed or opened, can contact the bucket teeth.
With the backhoe stowed across the back of the
machine and the bucket closed its possible that the
window can hit the bucket teeth when being closed or
opened.
ic
2-2-1-11
Se
Fig 16.
rv
When the backhoe is stowed across the back of the

machine and the bucket closed, the rear window can hit
the bucket teeth. If the backhoe is in the position shown,
move the bucket clear before closing or opening the rear
window. K Fig 17. ( T 27).
27
271380-1
Fig 17.
9821/1300-1
27
Operation
Doors and Windows
To open the rear window, press locking levers A. Take a
firm grip on the handrails, move the window towards the
front of the machine and up as far as it will go.
Secure the window in its open position by releasing locking
levers A, make sure the window is locked in position.
It is recommended that the rear window is closed before
travelling.
Se
rv
ic
es
Note: When closing the window, make sure that the

window wiper lead does not get trapped.
Fig 18.
28
9821/1300-1
28
Operation
Seat Controls
Seat Controls
Introduction
Seat
Position the seat so that you can comfortably reach
the machine controls. Do not adjust the seat while the
machine is moving. You could have an accident if you
operate the machine with the seat in the wrong
position.
795010a
The headrest can be adjusted to suit, take hold of

the rest and lift or lower as required.
13-1-1-9_1
Standard Seat
P2-2004_2
Armrest
Se
Swivel
795010b
The angle of the armrest can be adjusted, rotate the

control knob clockwise to raise the armrest and
counter clockwise to lower the armrest.
rv
ic
The operator's seat can be adjusted for your comfort. A

correctly adjusted seat will reduce operator fatigue.
Position the seat so that you can comfortably reach the
machine controls. For driving the machine, adjust the seat
so that you can depress the pedals fully with your back
against the seat back.
es
!MWARNING
Headrest (optional)
T2-007_3
795450a
To swivel lift the lever, swivel the seat all the way
around to face the opposite direction then release
lever. Make sure the seat fully latches into the
locked position.
Fore and Aft
795440
Fig 19.
Note: The Operator Manual is located in the pouch A at

the rear of the seat.
29
9821/1300-1
795450b-1
29
Operation
Seat Controls
To move the seat fore and aft, lift the bar and slide
the seat to the position you want, release the bar to
lock the seat. Make sure the seat is locked in
position.
To raise or lower the rear of the seat lift the control

lever. Allow the seat to move into position and then
release the lever. Make sure the seat has locked in
position.
!MWARNING
When seated, adjust the dial on the left of the seat until
your weight in kgs appears in the red shaded area.
Failure to set the weight adjustment dial will reduce
the beneficial isolation effect of the seat suspension
and may result in personal discomfort or injury.
Weight
795450c
Height and Slope (Front)
Se
rv
Whilst seated, turn the weight adjustment dial until

your weight is shown in the red shaded area of the
dial. This will set the seat to the most suitable
support for your weight. The dial is calibrated in
kilograms (kg).
ic
es
2-2-1-12
795450d
To raise or lower the front of the seat lift the control

lever. Allow the seat to move into position and then
release the lever. Make sure the seat has locked in
position.
Height and Slope (Rear)
30
795450e-1
9821/1300-1
30
Operation
Seat Controls
8
Electrical Options
Backrest Angle
Heater switch identification label
10
Heater switch
Press heater switch to select ON. The red light on
the switch will illuminate. The heaters in the seat are
automatically regulated and will switch ON and OFF.
Functions only with the ignition ON.
795450f
Press your back firmly against the backrest. Lift the

control lever and position the backrest as required.
When the backrest is in position release the control
lever. Make sure the backrest has locked in position.
P2-2005
11
Compressor rocker switch
es
Press and hold the + symbol, this will switch the

compressor motor ON, which will increase the
hardness of the ride. Press and hold the - symbol,
this will decrease the hardness of the ride.
ic
When the comfort level has been set, the

mechanical height and slope levers 7 and 8 should
be used to adjust the seat to the required height.
12
Lower lumbar support rocker switch
rv
Press and hold the + symbol to inflate or the symbol to deflate the lumbar support.
13
Upper lumbar support rocker switch
10
11
12
13
Se
Press and hold the + symbol to inflate or the symbol to deflate the lumbar support.
31
801450-1
Fig 20.
9821/1300-1
31
Operation
Seat Belt
Seat Belt
!MWARNING
T2-001_2
If you do not wear your seat belt you could be thrown

about inside the machine, or thrown out of the
machine and crushed. You must wear a seat belt when
using the machine. Fasten the seat belt before starting
the engine.
8-2-9-2_1
the belt too sharply or if the machine is parked on an

incline. In such cases, ease the belt gently from its reel
holder.
Check the Seat Belt is Operating Correctly

1
Sit correctly in the seat and fasten the seat belt as

described.
Hold the middle of the seat belt as shown at D and

tug. The seat belt should 'lock'.
es
Inertia Reel Seat Belt
!MWARNING
2-3-1-7_1
!MWARNING
If the seat belt does not 'lock' when you check if the
seat belt is operating correctly, do not drive the
machine. Get the seat belt repaired or replaced
immediately.
ic
When a seat belt is fitted to your machine replace it

with a new one if it is damaged, if the fabric is worn, or
if the machine has been in an accident. Fit a new seat
belt every three years.
2-2-2-1
Fasten the Seat Belt

Sit correctly in the seat. Pull the belt from its reel
holder in one continuous movement.
Push the male fitting A into the buckle B until it

latches into position. Make sure the seat belt is not
twisted and that it is over your hips not your stomach.
Se
rv
C006850-1
Fig 22.
Release the Seat Belt
!MWARNING
Release the seat belt only after switching off the
engine.
2-2-1-10
C006840-1
Fig 21.
Press button C and pull the male fitting A from the

buckle.
Note: If the belt 'locks' before the male fitting A has been
engaged, allow the belt to fully retract in its reel holder and
then try again. The inertia mechanism may lock if you pull
Let the seat belt retract into its reel holder.
32
9821/1300-1
32
Operation
Visibility Aids
Visibility Aids
Mirrors
Introduction
When operating the machine the operator must continually
survey their field of vision. It is important that the mirrors
are securely fitted and give maximum vision around the
machine.
es
When a mirror is provided to supplement the operators

direct field of vision, it must be adjusted to serve as an aid
to the operator in seeing people or obstacles around the
machine. The mirror provides indirect vision to hidden
areas and improves the effectiveness of the machines
usage.
Adjusting the Mirror
Adjust the mirror(s) to suit your specific working

requirements before you drive or operate the
machine.
Check that the field of vision A can be seen. Refer to

Checking the Field of Vision.
Side Mirrors
Check that the field of vision A is such that you can see,
using the mirrors at least a flat portion bounded on the left
and right of the machine, starting at the rear end of the
machine at a height of 1 metre above ground level and a
width of 0.75 metres (Z), continuing to a width of 3.5
metres (X) at ground level, 30 metres (Y) behind the rear
end of the machine.
A
Outer borderline
T032700-3
Fig 23. Side Mirrors
Centre point position
Field of vision
Se
Checking the Field of Vision
rv
Adjust the seat to suit the operator.
ic
T2-054
Inner borderline
Measurement at ground level
Measurement at 1 metre above ground level
33
9821/1300-1
33
Operation
Cab Layout (Manual Controls)

1
20
23
10
12
4
11
es
ic
13
18
34
25
26
14
Se
21
rv
16
15
8
24
17
22
19
T039550-7
Fig 24.
9821/1300-1
34
Operation
Component Key
K Steering Wheel ( T 40).
K Gear Selection ( T 42).
K Transmission Kickdown Switch (6-Speed Powershift Transmission) ( T 44).
K Gear Lever (Syncro Shuttle Transmission) ( T 44).
K Accelerator Pedal ( T 41).
K Foot Brake Pedals ( T 41).
K Transmission Lever (4- and 6-Speed Powershift Transmission) ( T 42).
K Transmission Lever (4-Speed Syncro Shuttle Transmission) ( T 43).

K Hand Throttle Lever ( T 41).
K Park Brake Lever ( T 41).
10
K Instruments ( T 56).
11
K Front Console Switches ( T 47).
12
K Multi-Purpose Steering Column Switch ( T 51).
13
K Loader Controls ( T 71).
14
K Starter Switch ( T 53).
15
K Side Console Switches ( T 48).
16
K Cab Heater Controls ( T 69).
17
K Boom and Slew Locks ( T 112).
18
K Stabiliser Controls ( T 104).
19
K Backhoe Controls ( T 83).
rv
ic
8
9
es
K Speedometer Option ( T 57).
K Auxiliary Options Control ( T 110).
22
K Hammer (If Fitted) ( T 285).
23
K Visibility Aids ( T 33).
Se
20
21
K Overload Override Warning Switch ( T 159).

K Auxiliary Controls ( T 106).
26
K Auxiliary Power Socket ( T 54).
24
25
35
9821/1300-1
35
Operation
Cab Layout (Easy Controls)

1
20
22
10
12
4
11
es
19
rv
ic
19
24
25
14
Se
16
15
8
23
17
18
E
H
36
13
21
T039550-8
Fig 25.
9821/1300-1
36
Operation
Component Key
K Gear Lever (Syncro Shuttle Transmission) ( T 44).

10
11
12
13
K Loader Controls ( T 71).
14
15
16
17
18
19
rv
ic
8
9
es

K Hammer (If Fitted) ( T 285).
22
23
24
25
Se
20
21
37
9821/1300-1
37
Operation
Cab Layout (Advanced Easy Controls)
1
20
11
10
es
17, 22
Se
rv
ic
18
38
19
23
12
13
14
7
21
15
16
T039550-26
Fig 26.
9821/1300-1
38
Operation
Component Key
1

10
11
12

14
15
16
ic
13
es
6
6
K Loader Controls ( T 71) or K Backhoe Controls ( T 83).

19
20
rv
17
18

23
Se
21
22
39
9821/1300-1
39
Operation
Drive Controls, Switches and Instruments

Drive Controls
Steering Wheel
T2-010
Turn the steering wheel in the direction you want to go.

Important: This machine is a 4-wheel steer machine.
Before you drive the machine, understand how the three
steer modes change the operation of your machine (for
example, the machines turning circle). Refer to Steer
Mode Selector.
es
Steering Column Adjustment
Make sure the steering column is locked in position.

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
INT-2-1-16
Tilt Adjustment
Height Adjustment Option
rv
Pull the lever A up to unlock the steering column, move the

steering column to the position required, release the lever
to lock in position.
ic
!MWARNING
P2-2006
Se
To unlock the steering column, twist the knob counterclockwise B. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
required height, twist the knob clockwise C to lock in
position.
807820
Fig 27.
40
9821/1300-1
40
Operation
Accelerator Pedal
!MWARNING
T2-031
Separate the pedals only when driving in 1st or 2nd gear

(1 or 2) off the road.
Machines with a Single Brake Pedal
When driving the machine, use only the accelerator

pedal to control the engine speed. Do not use the hand
throttle lever to set the engine speed while driving.
2-2-2-2
The left and right brakes are operated simultaneously by

the brake pedal.
Park Brake Lever
!MWARNING
T2-032

2-2-2-2
Foot Brake Pedals
Note: 4WD is automatically connected when the park

brake is applied.
To engage the park brake, pull the lever up (vertical).
Note: If the park brake is engaged when forward/reverse

is selected, the Park Brake Engaged Indicator will come
on.
To release the park brake, squeeze the release lever and
lower the lever as far as it will go (horizontal).
rv
Move this lever to increase or decrease the engine speed

as required when working with the backhoe. Pushing the
accelerator pedal fully down will return the hand throttle to
its idle position.
Note: The
transmission
drive
is
automatically
disconnected when the park brake is engaged.
es
Hand Throttle Lever
Use this lever to engage the park brake before leaving the
machine.
ic
Push this pedal down to increase engine speed. Let the

pedal up to reduce engine speed. With your foot off the
pedal the engine will idle.
T2-033_2
Se
Push down on the brake pedals to slow or stop the

machine. Use the brakes to prevent overspeeding down a
slope. The stop lights should come on when the brakes are
applied. Do not drive the machine unless both stop lights
work correctly.
Machines with Two Brake Pedals
The left rear brake is operated by the left pedal. The right
rear brake is operated by the right pedal. The pedals can
be locked together by a steel locking bar.
!MWARNING
You and others can be killed or injured if the brake

pedal locking bar is not engaged as recommended. If
only one brake is applied for a quick stop, the machine
could swerve out of control.
2-2-2-3
Lock the pedals together when driving on the road in any

gear.
41
9821/1300-1
41
Operation
Transmission Lever (4- and 6-Speed Powershift
Transmission)
4-Speed.
1st, 2nd and 3rd gears are selected by rotating the
column switch to the required position.
T2-068_2
Functions
2
6-Speed.
1st, 2nd and 3rd gears are selected by rotating the
column switch to the required position. When the
column switch is rotated to position A, the machine
will gear change automatically according to road
speed (4th, 5th and 6th gears only).
es
Switch position A is recommended for road use only.

In reverse only 1st to 4th are available.
S240120-9
Fig 28.
+/-
A warning buzzer will sound if a selection is made

which is not allowed by the electronic control unit
(E.C.U.). The 'double-beep' will continue to sound
until the selection conditions are met (e.g. travel
speed reduced), or the request is deselected.
F/N/R K Drive Selection ( T 42).

K Horn ( T 43).
Gear Selection
Drive Selection
!MWARNING
You and others can be killed or injured if you operate

the forward/reverse lever while you travel. The
machine will immediately reverse direction without
warning to others. Follow the recommended
procedure for proper use of this selector.
2-2-2-4_2
Se
Powershift Transmission
Do not change from a high gear to a low gear (for
instance, 4th to 1st) in one sudden movement when
the machine is moving. Otherwise the machine will
rapidly decelerate, you or others could be killed or
seriously injured. When selecting lower gears, allow
the engine speed to drop before each gear change.
When selecting lower gears, allow the engine speed to

drop before each gear change. Take notice of the warning
above, do not change from a high gear to a low gear in one
sudden movement whilst the machine is moving,
otherwise the machine will rapidly decelerate.
When moving or stationary, to select a gear, rotate the

barrel so that the arrow marked on the barrel aligns with
the required gear.
All gears are selected by rotating the column switch to the
required position.
42
!MWARNING
rv
There are two types of transmission, 4-speed and

6-speed.
2-1-1-9_1
ic
Stop the machine before moving this lever. To select

forward, reverse or neutral, 'lift' and move the lever to the
required position. The engine will only start if the lever is at
neutral.
All gears are available in forward and reverse except the
6-speed Powershift when only 4 gears are available in
reverse.
To reverse direction:
1
Stop the machine: keep the foot brakes applied.
Let the engine speed drop to idle.
Select the new direction.
Release the foot brakes and accelerate away.
9821/1300-1
42
Operation
Horn
Let the engine speed drop to idle.
The horn button X is at the end of the forward/reverse

lever. Push the button to operate the horn. It functions only
with the starter switch set to on.
Select the new direction.
Release the foot brakes and accelerate away.
Transmission Lever (4-Speed Syncro Shuttle

Transmission)
Note: If the park brake is engaged when forward/reverse

is selected, the Park Brake Engaged Indicator will come
on.
T2-023_2
Functions
Horn
S240120-8
Fig 29.
K Horn ( T 43)
Drive Selection
Se
!MWARNING
rv
F/N/R K Drive Selection ( T 43)
ic
es
The horn button X is at the end of the forward/reverse

lever. Push the button to operate the horn. It functions only
with the starter switch set to on.

2-2-2-4_2
Stop the machine before moving the lever. To select

forward (F), reverse (R) or neutral (N), 'lift' and move the
lever to the required position. All four gears are available in
forward and reverse. When reverse is selected an alarm
will sound. The engine will only start if the lever is at
neutral.
The lever has 'detent' positions in forward, reverse and

neutral. To move the lever from the detent position pull the
lever towards you.
Procedure for reversing direction:
1
43
Stop the machine: keep the foot brakes applied.
9821/1300-1
43
Operation
Gear Lever (Syncro Shuttle Transmission)
To select a gear, move the lever A as shown on the shift
pattern. When the machine is stationary, make sure that
forward/reverse lever is at neutral (N) and the engine at
idle, before selecting a gear.
The machine will remain in the kickdown gear, even if the

speed increases, until either the kickdown is pressed or
next higher gear is selected.
The machine can be moved off in any gear, depending on

the ground conditions. To change gear on the move:
A warning buzzer (double-bleep) will sound once if a

selection is made which is not allowed by the electronic
control unit (E.C.U.). For example, travel speed may be too
fast. In this instance, reduce speed and select kickdown
again.
Press the transmission dump switch B.
Transmission Dump Switches
Select the new gear.
Release the transmission dump switch B.
On Syncro Shuttle machines depress and hold the switch

on the gear lever to disconnect the drive while changing
gear on the move.
Use the accelerator to produce a smooth gear

change.
On Powershift machines you do not need to depress a

switch when changing gear.
ic
Se
On both Powershift and Syncro Shuttle machines, the

dump switch on the boom and carriage control lever can be
used to momentarily dump the transmission pressure to
improve the hydraulic performance and reduce engine
load.
rv
es
T2-024_2
765300-2
Fig 30.
Transmission Kickdown Switch (6-Speed

Powershift Transmission)
T2-067
Press the foot operated switch to operate transmission

kickdown.
When the kickdown switch is pressed, the next lowest gear

is selected. Pressing the kickdown switch again will select
the previous higher gear. The previous higher gear will
also be selected if the forward/reverse lever is moved
through neutral position.
44
9821/1300-1
44
Operation
Steer Mode Selector
Steer Mode Selector Switch
T2-016
!MWARNING
In 4-wheel steer, the back end of the machine will

swing out when you make a turn. Check for clearance
before making a turn.
5-2-3-3
This machine is a 4-wheel steer machine. Before you drive

the machine, understand how the three steer modes
change the operation of your machine (for example, the
machines turning circle). Select the steer mode which is
most suitable for the terrain and type of work you are
doing.
This is a three-position rotary switch, equipped with a

flexible lockplate. The lockplate locks the selector switch in
the 2-wheel steer mode, when the machine is driven on
public roads. To unlock the switch, depress the lockplate B
and turn the switch to the required position.
Never change steer mode on the move, the machine
should be stationary. Only change the steer mode when
the engine is at low engine rpm/idling. Never change from
4 wheel steer to crab steer (or vice versa) without first
selecting 2 wheel steer for approximately 5 seconds (as
shown by the decal A).
1
4-Wheel Steer.
The front wheels steer one way and the rear wheels
steer in the opposite direction. This position provides
the tightest turning circle.
rv
5-2-6-7
Failure to phase 4-wheel steer at least once per day

may mean a reduction in steering effectiveness.
Se
The steering must be re-phased:
ic
Failure to align the steering before selecting the

required steer mode will cause the machine to steer
incorrectly.
5-2-1-6
2-Wheel Steer.
The front wheels only are controlled by the steering

wheel. This position must be used for driving on
public roads. Make sure the lockplate is engaged.
!MDANGER
!MWARNING
es
Introduction
At least once per day.
If having difficulty in steering.
After travelling for 15 miles (24 km) or more on the

road (in 2-wheel steer).
Crab Steer.
The front and rear wheels steer in the same direction.

This position improves manoeuvrability in confined
spaces. Crab steer may not be available on all
models.
For further information, refer to Wheel Alignment.
H
45
Fig 31.
9821/1300-1
45
Operation
Steer Mode Indicator Lights
Electronic Control Unit
Sensors on the axles prevent the steer mode from

changing until all wheels straighten up or pass through the
straight ahead position. Because of this, there will be a
short period when the indicator lights do not agree with the
switch position.
The steer mode system is controlled by an electronic

control unit (ECU). The steer mode indicator lights are
used to indicate faults in the steer system.
The indicator light for the current steer mode will remain
illuminated until the change is complete, the light will then
extinguish.
1
The 2-wheel indicator light Z on the front console will

flash, (two flashes per second) until the steer mode
change is complete. The indicator light will remain
illuminated when in 2-wheel steer. K Fig 33. ( T 46).
If the 2-wheel steer indicator light on the front console

flashes repeatedly, (four flashes per second), when
the machine is in any of the steer modes, the steering
is out of phase.
If the 2-wheel steer indicator light on the front console

flashes repeatedly (irregular flash pattern) when the
machine is in any of the steer modes, contact your
JCB dealer.
ic
4-Wheel steer engaged.

Lights up when 4-wheel steer mode is engaged.
Important: Until the fault has been rectified, restrict the

machine to 2-wheel steer mode.
Crab steer engaged.
rv
2-Wheel steer engaged.

Located in the front console and the side console.
Lights up when 2-wheel steer mode is engaged.
As a bulb and system check, each of the indicator

lights will illuminate briefly when the starter switch C
is set to position I. K Fig 32. ( T 46).
es
Indicator lights on the instrument panel tell you what steer

mode the machine is in. If you have any doubt about the
steer mode the machine is in, always remember that it is
the indicator light which is correct.
Lights up when crab steer mode is engaged.
Se
Note: The light may sometimes temporarily disagree with

the position of the steer mode selector. K Steer Mode
Selector Switch ( T 45).
Z
T052360
Fig 33. Front console
T039550-50
Fig 32. Side console.
46
9821/1300-1
46
Operation
Switches
Front Console Switches
Console Switches
Side Lights and Headlights

Three position rocker switch with
backlight. The switch functions operate
when the starter switch is in the ON and
OFF positions.
Introduction
The installed switches and their positions can change
according to the specification of the machine.
Position 1: OFF (Backlight OFF)

Each switch has a graphic symbol A to show the function
of the switch. Before you operate a switch, make sure that
you understand its function.
340151-1
Position 2 (starter switch in the ON

position): Headlights ON (Backlight ON)
Position 2 (starter switch in the OFF
position): Side Lights ON (Backlight ON)
es
The rocker switches have two or three positions (as

shown).
If the switch is active, then the light B will come on to show
that the switch function is active.
Position 3: Side Lights ON (Backlight ON)
Machines without headlights or side lights are designed

for site use. You may be breaking local laws if you travel
on the road without headlights or side lights.
ic
Hazard Warning Lights
Two position rocker switch with backlight.

The switch functions operate when the
starter switch is in the ON and OFF
positions.
rv
Position 1: OFF (Backlight OFF).
339861-1
Se
Position 2: ON (Backlight ON). A light on

the instrument panel flashes with the
outside lights.
2 Wheel Drive Selector

starter switch is in the ON position.
T042100-2
Fig 34.
Position 1: OFF (Backlight OFF).

339650-2
Position 2: 2-Wheel
(Backlight ON).
drive
engaged
Before you operate the switch, refer to Getting the

Machine Moving.
47
9821/1300-1
47
Operation
Side Console Switches
Smooth Ride System (if fitted)

Beacon
Two position rocker switch. The switch
functions operate when the starter switch
is in the ON and OFF positions.

Position 2: ON (Backlight ON)
Position 1: OFF
340161-1
Position 2: ON
Before you operate the switch, refer to Preparing the

Machine for Travel.
339711-1
Before you operate the switch, refer to Beacon.

Rear Window Wiper (if fitted)
Three position rocker switch. The switch
is in the ON position.
es
!MWARNING
Do not drive on the road with the work lights switched
on. You can interfere with other drivers visibility and
cause an accident.
Position 1: OFF
2-2-2-5_1
Position 3: Wiper ON (if fitted)
340070-1
Three position rocker switch. The switch

Note: The wiper will self-park when switched off.

Rear Work Lights

rv
Position 1: OFF
Position 3: Outer Work Lights ON
340100-1
Position 2: Wash/Wipe ON - Push and

Hold (if fitted)
ic
Front Work Lights
Position 2: Inner and Outer Work Lights

ON
Position 1: OFF
Note: The work lights work independently of the main

lights circuit.
Se
Position 2: ON
Note: On Italian and German machines, it is not possible

to have the headlights and the front worklights switched
on at the same time.
340090-1
Note: The work lights work independently of the main

lights circuit.
Air-Conditioning (if fitted)
Rear Fog Light (if fitted)
Two position push switch. The switch


Position 1: OFF
Position 1: OFF
Position 2: ON
339681-1
Position 2: ON
Before you operate the switch, refer to AirConditioning and Cab Heater Controls.
340051-1
48
9821/1300-1
48
Operation
Kingpost Clamps
Overload Warning Switch (if fitted)


Position 1: ON - Lifting Position (Lights

ON Overload and buzzer sounds)

339970-3
T032730-8
Before you operate the switch, refer to Working with the

Backhoe.
Position 2: OFF - Digging Position

(Backlight OFF)
Before you operate the switch, refer to Overload

Warning System (if Fitted).
Hammer Switch (if fitted)

Loader Quickhitch
es
Two or three position rocker switch with

backlight. The switch functions operate
when the starter switch is in the ON
position.

Position 1: OFF
Position 2: ON Hydraulic pump high flow

(Backlight ON)
Position 3: (if fitted) ON Hydraulic pump
low flow (Backlight ON)
Hydraulic Tool Circuit Switch (if fitted)
-701-E8866
Hydraulic Flow Control - EcoDIG (if fitted)

Se
HTC
Before you operate the switch, refer to Loader

Quickhitch (Powered) (Attachments Section).
rv
Before you operate the switch, refer to Hammer (if

fitted), Hydraulic Tool Circuit (HTC) or Hydraulic Flow
Control (ECO / LO mode).
A339941-1
Position 2: ON - Push and Hold (Buzzer

sounds)
ic
-332-F8808-2
Position 2: ON Hydraulic pump flow

(Backlight ON)
ECO

LO
Position 1: High
Backlight ON)
332-G0109-2
flow
rate
(Green
Position 2: Low flow rate (Red Backlight

ON)
Before you operate the switch, refer to EcoDIG

(Operation Section).
Before you operate the switch, refer to Hydraulic Tool

Circuit (HTC).
Return To Dig Enable Switch - EcoLOAD (if fitted)

340110-2
Before you operate the switch, refer to Loader Controls.
49
9821/1300-1
49
Operation
Bi-Directional and Hammer Mode Selector (if fitted)
Seat Mounted Switches

Excavator/Loader Control Selector (if fitted)
332-F8808-1
Position 1: Hammer mode - for use with single acting

attachments (Hammer Backlight ON)
Position 2: Bi-Directional mode - for use with double
acting attachments (Bi-directional Backlight ON)
Three position rocker switch with backlights. The switch

functions operate when the starter switch is in the ON
position.
Position 1: Excavator controls enabled (Excavator
Backlight ON)
Position 3: Neutral (Backlight OFF)
Position 2: Loader controls enabled (Loader Backlight

ON)
Before you operate the switch, refer to Operating
Levers.
ic
Before you operate the switch, refer to Bi-Directional

and Hammer Circuits (Optional Attachments
Section) or Hydraulic Flow Control (ECO / LO mode).
T027680-5
es
Three position rocker switch with backlights. The switch

functions operate when the starter switch is in the ON
position.
Excavator/Loader Control Selector (if fitted)
rv

Position 1: Excavator controls enabled
(Backlight OFF)
Se
A340000-1
Position 2: Loader controls enabled

(Backlight ON)
refer to Operating
Before you operate the switch,

Levers.
50
9821/1300-1
50
Operation
Multi-Purpose Steering Column Switch
1
Turn Signals (Right)
T2-058
Pull the lever towards you to indicate a right turn.

Switch the turn signals off when you have
completed the turn. Functions only with the starter
switch at position I.
2
Turn Signals (Left)
es
Push the lever away from you to indicate a left turn.

Switch the turn signals off when you have
completed the turn. Functions only with the starter
switch at position I.
Windscreen Wiper
Rotate the lever barrel to switch the windscreen
wipers on and off. The following functions are
available (only with the starter switch turned on).
ic
J Intermittent Wipe
0 Off
I Slow
Windscreen Washer
rv
II Fast
4
146040-1
Fig 35.
Se
Push the button towards the steering wheel to

operate the windscreen washer. Functions only with
the starter key at position I.
Headlights Flash
Lift the lever to flash the headlights. Functions only

with the starter switch at position I.
6
Headlight/Main Beam
Push the lever down for main beam. Centre position

is low beam. Functions only with the parking/head
lights on. Switch the high beams off for on-coming
vehicles.
51
9821/1300-1
51
Operation
2 Wheel Drive Select Switch
2 Wheel Steer Machines Only
Note: The transmission will default to 2-wheel drive when

4th gear is selected (Powershift Machines Only).
This is a three position rotary switch C that allows the

operator to select the status of the drive/brake system. The
two modes are:
4 Wheel Steer Machines Only

Position 2 - Two Wheel Drive-All Wheel Braking
Note: With 2-wheel drive selected, when the brake pedal
or handbrake is activated, the machine will automatically
go into 4-wheel drive and the indicator light on the switch
will go off.
Use this position when travelling on public highways.

Make sure that the lockplate is engaged.
Position 3 - Two Wheel Drive-Two Wheel Braking
Position 4 - Four Wheel Drive-All Wheel Braking
es
Press down the rocker switch A for 2-wheel drive, the

switch will illuminate.
Use this position when operating in heavy duty site

conditions, for instance, deep mud, undulating
surfaces, slurry etc.
ic
The switch has a flexible lockplate. The lockplate locks the

selector switch in Position 2 (2WD - All Wheel Braking)
when the machine is driven on public highways. To unlock
the switch, depress the lockplate B and turn the switch to
the required position.
Se
rv
Note: Front wheel braking is via the drive to the front axle
(there are no 'brakes' in the front axle). When Position 2 is
selected, the machine is in 2-wheel drive. However, when
the brakes are applied, a microswitch operated by the
movement of the brake pedals automatically engages 4wheel drive. This has the effect of 'all wheel braking'.
402520-2
Fig 36. 4WS Machines Only
52
9821/1300-1
52
Operation
Starter Switch
T2-019_2
This is operated by the starter key. It has four positions.

The key can be removed only with the switch set to 0.
Turn the key to this position to stop the engine.
Make sure the transmission is in neutral, the
attachments have been lowered and the park brake
is engaged before stopping the engine.
Putting the switch to this position connects the

battery to all the electrical circuits except the lights
and the hazard warning circuit. (The lights and
hazard warning circuits are permanently live.) The
starter key will spring back to this position when it is
released from II or III. At -6C (21F), the Cold Start
warning light will illuminate to indicate the cold start
inlet manifold heater has come on. Refer to
Warning Lights.
II
This position is not used in this application
III
Operates the starter motor to turn the engine.
2WD
2WD 4W(O) 4WD
2W(O)
4W(O)
C
3
402531-2
Note: Do not operate the starter motor for more than 10

seconds without the engine firing. If the engine fires but
does not fully start, do not operate the starter motor for
more than 40 seconds. Let the starter motor cool for at
least two minutes between starts.
Se
rv
Fig 37.
ic
es
H04432-4
Fig 38.
53
9821/1300-1
53
Operation
Removing and Installing the Radio (If fitted)
Auxiliary Power Socket
If your machine has a radio fitted we suggest that you

remove the radio from its carrier at the end of each working
day.
The socket X supplies a 12 Volt DC power supply to

electrical accessories (from the battery). Only connect
items which are compatible with the power rating of the
socket (Refer to Electrical System, Fuses) and have the
correct plug.
To remove the radio, gently pull radio carrier handle. To

install, make sure you have the radio positioned the correct
way up. Otherwise you may damage the connecting pins.
Gently push the radio into position.
Always operate the engine during prolonged use of

electrical accessories, otherwise the battery can
discharge.
es
Make sure that the socket cap is closed when the socket is
not in use.
rv
T039550-10
ic
Fig 39. Typical Radio Installation Shown
Cab Interior Light
T2-020
Hot Drinks Machine (If fitted)
Se
Press either end of the light unit A to switch on the cab

interior light. Pressing the other end will switch the light off.
Make sure the light is turned off when you intend to leave
the machine for a long period of time.
This option is designed to be located in the cupholder /

beacon storage position.
Make sure the machine is in neutral, with the park brake
on, the rear work lights off and the switch C (if fitted) in the
central position before you operate the hot drinks machine.
K Fig 41. ( T 55).
Follow the manufacturers instructions for operation and

cleaning instructions.
54
C007130-1
Fig 40.
9821/1300-1
54
Operation
es
T053820
Se
rv
ic
Fig 41.
55
9821/1300-1
55
Operation
Instruments
The driving indicators are located on the front console.

There are additional instruments and gauges located at
the side of the driver's seat.
Not used in this Application.
11
10
All instruments power down when the starter switch is set

to O, apart from the hazard warning lights indicator.
Front Console
On the front console, the master warning light (and buzzer)
B will illuminate when any of the following warning lights on
the side console are illuminated: K Fig 42. ( T 56).
Warning Lights
2-Wheel
steer.
Lights ( T 46).
Rear fog light.
Indicator
Stabiliser legs. K Stabiliser Controls ( T 104).
Lights up when the stabiliser legs are down (and drive

is selected in certain countries).
Main beam on.
10
Se
Service Brake Malfunction.
If the master buzzer sounds or brake warning lights

up to indicate a brake pressure failure, bring the
machine safely to a halt as soon as possible. Do not
use the machine again until the brake system is
serviceable.
3
Mode
Lights up when the rear fog light is switched on.
Lights up when the headlight main beams are

switched on. Switch the main beams off for oncoming vehicles.
2
K Steer
rv
es
There are also additional warning lights mounted in the

front console. The master warning light B is also linked
with the front console lights 2 - Service Brake Malfunction,
9 - Stabiliser leg down and 10 - Water in Fuel indicator.
ic
Air Filter Blocked; Water Temperature; Transmission Oil

Temperature; Engine Oil Pressure; Park Brake Engaged;
Transmission Oil Pressure.
T052360
Fig 42. Front console
11
Water in fuel separator indicator.

Lights up when there is water in the separator, drain
off the water as soon as it is safe to do so. K Draining
the Water Separator and Engine Fuel
Filter ( T 234).
Torque converter lock up.
Lights up when the torque converter is locked up, for
description
and
operation.
K TorqueLock
(ECOLoad) ( T 64).
Front work lights.
Lights up when the front work lights are switched on.
Rear work lights.
Lights up when the rear work lights are switched on.
Direction indicators.
Flashes with the direction indicators. Use the
indicators to signal before turning the machine.
56
9821/1300-1
56
Operation
Speedometer Option
and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will illuminate and

a text message will be displayed in the digital display.
Indicates the road speed in miles per hour (MPH) and/or

kilometres per hour (km/h). K Fig 43. ( T 57).
Note: These warnings will remain active until the

temperature drops below the red zone. Stop the machine
as soon as safety permits and switch OFF the engine. This
will allow the temperature to reduce.
4
Fuel gauge.
Indicates the level of diesel fuel in the tank. Do not let
the tank run dry, or air will enter the fuel system.
K Refuelling the Machine ( T 161).
20
30
10
40
30
20
50
10
km/h 60
40
es
MPH
Cab clock.
Press the increase (E+) or the decrease (E-) button to

adjust the time. For rapid adjustment, press and hold
either button for 5 seconds.
Warning Lights. K Warning Lights ( T 58).
ic
rv
Side Console
Se
Fig 43.
E+
E-
The side console is located at the side of the drivers seat,

for indicator and gauge positions. K Fig 44. ( T 57).
1
Tachometer.
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM). The RPM is shown on the outer ring. Each
division is 100 RPM. A green band on the scale
indicates the RPM which gives best fuel economy.
Operate within that band whenever possible.
1
T039550-54
Fig 44.
Digital Display. K Digital Display ( T 59).
Coolant temperature gauge.

Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. The
gauge pointer will gradually swing upwards as the
coolant temperature increases. When the coolant
temperature enters the red zone, an alarm will sound
57
9821/1300-1
57
Operation
Warning Lights
2-Wheel steer engaged. K Steer Mode Indicator

Lights ( T 46).
4-Wheel steer engaged. K Steer Mode Indicator

Lights ( T 46).
Crab steer engaged. K Steer Mode Indicator

Lights ( T 46).
Lights if the transmission oil pressure drops too far /

oil temperature rises too far. The light should go out
when the engine is started. A text message will be
displayed in the digital display if a fault occurs.
9
Water temperature Gauge.
10
Air filter blocked.
Fuel Gauge.
When illuminated it could indicate that the engine air

filter is blocked. If the air filter warning light comes
ON, stop the machine and switch OFF the engine.
After a short pause start the engine. If the warning
light has extinguished carry on operating the machine
in the normal manner.
Warning Lights with Audible Alarm
ic
If the warning light is still illuminated after the engine

has been started check that the engine air filter
elements are not blocked. A text message will be
displayed in the digital display if a fault occurs.
K Changing the Air Filter Elements ( T 232).
11
With the starter switch in position I, if the outside air

temperature is -6C (21F) or below the light will
illuminate indicating that the manifold heater is ON.
When the light extinguishes the engine is ready to
start (Where this option is fitted). K Starter
Switch ( T 53).
rv
Replenish at the earliest opportunity, if the tank

empties the engine may require bleeding to start.
K Refuelling the Machine ( T 161).
es
The digital display will show a text message when the

fuel level is less than 20 litres (4.3 gallons) for 2.5
seconds. LOW FUEL will be displayed when the fuel
gauge enters the red area and the buzzer will sound
for 3 seconds.
When the fuel goes to less than 10 litres (2.15
gallons) for 2.5 seconds, the buzzer will sound until
the fuel level goes up to more than 10 litres (2.15
gallons) for 10 seconds.
Transmission oil (Pressure low / Temperature high).
No charge.
Se
Note: If lights 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 come on while the engine is

running, stop the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. Do
not use the machine until the fault is put right.
Lights if the battery charging circuit fails while the

engine is running. The light should go out a few
seconds after the engine is started.
6
10
7
6
4
Engine oil pressure low / Coolant temperature high.

Operates if the engine oil pressure drops too far /
Operates if the engine coolant overheats. The light
should go out when the engine is started. A text
message will be displayed in the digital display if a
fault occurs.
58
Park brake engaged.
Lights when the park brake is engaged with the

machine in forward or reverse. The alarm will sound
if forward or reverse drive is selected.
11
9821/1300-1
5
T039550-51
Fig 45.
58
Operation
Digital Display
Starter Switch ON
The digital display A is located on the side console.

K Fig 46. ( T 59). The digital display contains the
following information screens:
As a system check, all of the LCD segments illuminate

briefly when the starter switch is set to position I. K Starter
Switch ( T 53).
Press the Information switch B to move to the next
information screen.
Engine Hours
Time Until Service

Example of operation:
1
Engine Hours
B
A
es
The total running time of the engine is shown in

increments of 0.1 hours. In the example, the current
running time is 1185.4 hours.
Note: When the display is set to the Engine Hour screen,
the Hour Glass symbol 1A comes on.
Time Until Service
ic
1A
rv
The Time Until Service is the difference between the

next service interval and the current engine hours. In
the example, the Time Until Service is 314.6 hours
(1500 hours - 1185.4 hours).
Note: When the display is set to the Time Until Service

screen, the Service symbol 2A comes on.
2A
Note: When you complete a machine service, make sure

that you reset the value shown on the Time Until Service
screen. K Resetting The Time Until Service
Screen ( T 60).
Se
432711-11
Fig 46.
Starter Switch OFF
To view the current engine hours, switch ON the side lights.

In this mode, the digital display will show the Engine Hour
screen (1).
59
9821/1300-1
59
Operation
Resetting The Time Until Service Screen
When you complete a machine service, make sure that

you reset the value shown on the Time Until Service
screen.
Push then hold the Information button for three

seconds to reset the service hours (The word RESET
flashes once). Release the information button.
Push then hold the Information button for one second

to exit the RESET screen. Release the information
button.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to move to EXIT.
10
Quickly push then release the Information button to

go to the normal operation mode.
Make the machine safe with the loader arm lowered.

Refer to Prepare the Machine for Maintenance.
Make sure that the park brake is engaged, then

Switch ON the ignition.
Quickly push then release the Information i button.

Repeat as necessary until the Time Until Service
screen (with the open book symbol 1) is shown.
Other Machine Options
es
Other machine options that can be changed include:
GRD HTR (Grid Heater) - To change the Grid Heater

options, enter into this option and select GRD NFIT or
GRD FIT (Grid Heater fitted or not fitted).
LANGUAGE - To change language enter into this

option and select the language required.
H/W VERSION (Hardware Version) - Shows the

Hardware version of the Instrument panel.
ic
rv
S/W VERSION (Software Version) - Shows the

Software version of the Instrument panel.
BST PUMP - Boost Pump fitted or not fitted - BST FIT

or BST NFIT.
Se
BUZ - MUTE - Turns the buzzer on or off. Only works

on 1 cycle of ignition switch.
Viewing the Total Machine Hours
T039550-25
Fig 47.
Push then hold the Information button for 20 seconds.

Scroll using arrow buttons C. Release the information
button.
To view the total machine hours with the ignition OFF,

switch ON the parking lights.The digital display will show
the total machine hours.
If necessary, use the up or down arrow button C to

change the screen from TIME-SRV to SRV RST
(other options can be changed here, refer to Other
Machine Options).
60
Push then hold the Information button for one second

to go into the RESET screen. Release the information
button.
9821/1300-1
60
Operation
ECO mode
Note: This option is not required or fitted on Advanced

Easy Control machines.
In order to maximise fuel efficiency, select the ECO mode

and operate the machine with the engine speed in the
green band on the Tachometer (1200 rpm to 1700 rpm).
Operating between 1700 rpm and 1900 rpm for a
prolonged period of time will, or immediately on operating
above 1900rpm, will drop the third pump from the hydraulic
system and the machine reverts back to a standard two
pump configuration. The LCD display on the side console
indicates whether the machine is operating in ECO mode
by displaying the message HYD-ECO or standard mode
by displaying the message HYD-STD. K Fig 48. ( T 62).
Note: The recommended engine speed while excavating

is 1500rpm.
The hydraulic flow control (EcoDIG) switch X is provided to
allow the operator to select the required hydraulic system
flow to match the job in hand.K EcoDIG ( T 63).
Excavating
RPM range
(1)
Loading and Roading
(3)
Table 1.
Pump 1
Pump 2
Pump 3
LCD Display
YES
NO
HYD-STD
YES
Transitional period(2)
YES
YES
YES
Transitional period(2)
< 650
YES
650-800
YES
800-1700
YES
1700-1900
YES
>1900
YES
YES
NO
HYD-STD
ALL
YES
YES
NO
HOURS
HYD-ECO
ic
Operation
es
Hydraulic Flow Control (EcoDIG)
rv
(1) Neutral selected.

(2) Transitional range is where Pump 3 moves from being ON to OFF based on certain time delays. LCD message may
change accordingly.
(3) Forward or Reverse selected.
and can also be used to disconnect the 1st hydraulic pump
(Pump 1) for more tractive effort and fine control when
loading. The pump configuration is displayed on the LCD
display. K Fig 48. ( T 62).
Se
LO mode
The LO mode gives additional control when grading or

lifting. This mode is activated by moving the switch to LO
Operation
Loading and Roading
(3)
Table 2.
Pump 1
Pump 2
Pump 3
NO
< 650
NO
YES
650-800
NO
YES
Transitional period
LCD
Display
HYD-LO
(2)
HYD-LO
800-1700
NO
YES
YES
HYD-LO
1700-1900
NO
YES
Transitional period (2)
HYD-LO
>1900
NO
YES
NO
HYD-LO
ALL
NO
YES
NO
HOURS
Excavating (1)
RPM range

(2) Transitional range is where Pump 3 moves from being ON to OFF based on certain time delays.
(3) Forward or Reverse selected.
61
9821/1300-1
61
Operation
HYD ECO
HYD STD
HYD LO
For machines fitted with a hammer or combined hammer

and bi-directional circuit, the EcoDIG switch enables you to
select between high or low flow to suit a wide range of
attachments. The LCD display indicates whether the
machine is operating in high or low flow by displaying the
message AUX-HI or AUX-LO.
AUX-HI
AUX-LO
es
ECO
T039550-49
Fig 48.
ic
LO
Table 3.
Pump 1
RPM range
High Flow (ECO) Hammer (1)
ALL
YES
Low Flow (LO) Hammer
< 650
Pump 3
LCD
Display
YES
NO
AUX-HI
NO
YES
NO
650-800
NO
YES
800-1700
NO
YES
YES
AUX-LO
1700-1900
NO
YES
Transitional period
AUX-LO
>1900
NO
YES
NO
AUX-LO
ALL
YES
YES
NO
AUX-HI
ALL
NO
YES
NO
AUX-LO
Se
High Flow (ECO) Bi-Directional

Low Flow (LO) Bi-Directional
Pump 2
rv
Operation
(1)
(1)
Transitional period
AUX-LO
(2)
AUX-LO

(2) Transitional range is where Pump 3 moves from being ON to OFF (and vice versa) based on certain time delays.
Refer to Bi-Directional and Hammer Circuits, Optional

Attachments section. K Fig 48. ( T 62).
62
9821/1300-1
62
Operation
ECO Features
Transmission disconnect diverts hydraulic power to

the loader for faster lifting boosting productivity.
K Transmission Dump Switches ( T 44).
EcoDIG
Return To Dig option automatically resets the shovel

to digging position, saving time and effort. K Loader
Controls ( T 71).
Hydraulic Speed Control (HSC) disconnects the 2nd
hydraulic pump giving more tractive effort when
loading and improving fuel consumption during
roading.
Lower engine revs result in a drop in fuel consumption

and exhaust gas emissions of up to 15%.
Lower engine revs result in a reduction in overall
machine noise level both inside the cab and
externally.
Optional LSD axles automatically provide extra

traction in challenging conditions. K Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) ( T 127).
EcoROAD
The EcoRoad locking torque converter, power brakes and

improved driveline efficiency result in fuel savings of up to
25% and a significant exhaust emission reduction. This
leads to a boost in productivity and a lower environmental
impact.
rv
Two mode hydraulic control system offers the

operator a choice between an eco mode for
maximum efficiency or an ultimate machine control
mode (low), for fine control, lifting and grading.
K Hydraulic Flow Control (EcoDIG) ( T 61).
es
Triple gear pump design supplies greater flow at 400

less rpm whilst maintaining productivity.
JCB Dieselmax engine provides high engine torque

at low revs providing excellent pushing power and hill
climbing performance.
ic
The three-pump hydraulic system is controlled by the

EcoDIG switch in the cab. It provides the operator with
improved cycle times, reduced fuel consumption and
greater control of the backhoe.
Eco mode operates within the green band indicated

on the tachometer and the LCD displays the
machines digging mode.
Power brakes minimise drag due to full brake pad

release to better maintain roading speeds and
contributes 1% saving in fuel.
Se
EcoLOAD
Smooth Ride System (SRS) for load retention and

faster travel speeds over the roughest of ground,
increases productivity. K Preparing The Machine
For Travel ( T 122).
Torque-Lock, locks up the torque converter creating a

direct drive which eliminates torque converter losses
and offers up to 25% fuel saving and maintains road
speeds
for
longer.
K TorqueLock
(ECOLoad) ( T 64).
HSC automatically disconnects the 2nd hydraulic

pump in 4th gear which improves fuel consumption
Through the use of the hydraulic speed control (HSC)

system, the operator can select the number of hydraulic
pumps in use, increasing tractive effort when loading, and
improving fine control when grading and backfilling.
63
9821/1300-1
63
Operation
Description
T2-035
This feature is designed to eliminate torque converter slip

when roading, providing improved fuel consumption and
machine road performance. Because the torque converter
ratio remains 1-1 in top gear this does not alter the overall
top speed.
The Torque Lock feature is automatically engaged by the
transmission Electronic Control Unit (ECU) hydraulically
engaging a clutch plate in the converter at a pre
determined machine road speed and engine RPM
preventing torque converter slip.
Because the ECU is programmed only to lock up when it

senses minimal torque converter slip (the difference
between the engine RPM and road speed), with practice
the lock up engagement can be brought in earlier by
momentarily releasing the foot throttle to reduce the
engine rpm then re-applying once the lock up is felt to
occur.
It is good practice to endeavour to drive the machine on the
road with the torque converter locked up as further fuel
saving can be achieved over the normal torque converter
operation.
es
TorqueLock (ECOLoad)
Operation
P2-2007
6-Speed transmission.
a
rv
ic
This feature would normally only engage when the

machine is driven at road speeds, and will disengage
automatically when the machine or engine speed fall
below these settings. Selecting reverse or engaging the
park brake will also disconnect the lockup.
When A is engaged on the column switch the

machine will engage 4th gear. Higher gears and
the lock up will engage automatically at the
predetermined settings.
Se
b Lock up operates in 5th and 6th gear only.
When the foot throttle pedal is in the up position

e.g. descending hills in a low gear, the machine
will hold 4th or 5th gear and not change up.
d Kick down remains unchanged from the standard

machine but does not operate in auto or lock up
mode.
4-Speed transmission.
When 4th gear is engaged on the column switch

the lock up will engage automatically at the
predetermined settings and disengage in a similar
way or when other gears are selected.
b Lock up operates in 4th only.

c
64
There is no kick down fitted with the 4-speed

option.
9821/1300-1
64
Operation
Extreme Cold Climate Heater Switch

(Optional)
Type 2 Switch
P2-2003
Switch Functions
Introduction
The cold climate heater option fitted to your machine is

designed to warm the engine and the cab interior prior to
starting the engine.
es
7
Fig 50.
O
K
Menu bar displays the various functions.
Display screen, shows the time.
Program bar, displays the active program memory

and day.
Control key - back, selects a function in the menu bar

and adjusts values.
Control key - forward, selects a function in the menu

bar and adjusts values.
Activation key, switches the timer ON and OFF.

Selects current time and operating time.
OK key, selects the flashing symbol or confirms

inputs.
Status display, symbol is displayed when heater is

ON.
Se
O
K
O
K
rv
123
ic
Mo Mo AM PM
Tu Di
We Mi
Th Do
Fr Fr
Sa Sa
Su So
Mo Mo AM PM
Tu Di
We Mi
Th Do
Fr Fr
Sa Sa
Su So
It can also be activated manually by a switch located in the

cab.
Mo Mo AM PM
Tu Di
We Mi
Th Do
Fr Fr
Sa Sa
Su So
123
The heater can be programmed to come on automatically

so that the engine is ready to start and the cab warmed at
the start of the working day.
123
Fig 49.
65
9821/1300-1
65
Operation
Setting the Clock
After connection to the power supply for the first time all
symbols on the display will start to flash. The heater can
not be used in this condition, the current time has to be set
first.
1
Mo
Tu
We
Th
Fr
Sa
Su
Current time.
a
Fig 54.
To activate timer press key 6.
es
b Select symbol 51-A with key 4 or 5. Confirm

setting, press key 7.
Permanently set the operating duration 55-E for

immediate operation with key 4 or 5. Confirm
Select the weekday 52-B with key 4 or 5. Confirm

ic
Fig 55.
Fig 51.
Heater Switch
123
d Set the hours 53-C with key 4 or 5. Confirm

Mo
Tu
We
Th
Fr
Sa
Su
O
K
8
Fig 56.
To switch the heater ON carry out the following.
Fig 53.
66
Mo Mo AM PM
Tu Di
We Mi
Th Do
Fr Fr
Sa Sa
Su So
Fig 52.
Se
Mo
Tu
We
Th
Fr
Sa
Su
rv
Set minutes 54-D with key 4 or 5. Confirm setting,

press key 7.
Select symbol 57-F with key 4 or 5.
9821/1300-1
66
Operation
3
Confirm setting, press key 7. The heater is now

switched ON and the heater symbol is displayed in
the status bar 58-G.
Preset Time
P
F
123
Mo Mo AM PM
Tu Di
We Mi
Th Do
Fr Fr
Sa Sa
Su So
The operating duration is displayed 58-H, to confirm

press key 7.
To change the operating duration press key 4 or 5

until the required time is displayed. Confirm setting,
press key 7.
O
K
es
Fig 57.
ic
Fig 59.
The timer can be used to program 3 preset times.

The preset times can either all take place on one day or
distributed between different days. You cannot assign
more than 3 preset times.
Fig 58.
rv
Select preset symbol 60-J with key 4 or 5. Confirm

To switch the heater OFF carry out the following.

Select symbol 57-F with key 4 or 5.
Confirm setting, press key 7. The heater is now

switched OFF and the symbol 58-G will no longer be
displayed.
Se
P
J
Select preset memory symbol (1 2 3) 61-K with key 4

or 5. Confirm setting, press key 7.
Fig 60.
67
9821/1300-1
67
Operation
123
1
Mo
K
P
Fig 61.
Select the required day, (Mo to Su) 62-L as with key
4 or 5. Confirm setting, press key 7.
1
Mo
Tu
We
Th
Fr
Sa
Su
The preset time and duration is complete, the next

preset memory to be activated is underlined and the
day is also displayed.
rv
Mo
ic
Fig 66.
Set the hour 63-M with key 4 or 5. Confirm setting,

press key 7.
Mo
Fig 62.
5
The run time can be confirmed by pressing key 7 or

set with the key 4 or 5 and then confirmed with key 7.
es
Fig 65.
Mo
Se
Fig 63.
Set the minutes 64-N with key 4 or 5. Confirm setting,

press key 7.
To delete the preset time carry out the following.

1
The steps for deleting preset times are the same as

setting the preset time until the current preset time
flashes in the status bar.
Press key 4 or 5 until oFF appears in the display.

Confirm oFF setting, press key 7.
Mo
Fig 67.
Fig 64.
The preset time is now set, to check or adjust the

duration select heater function 65-P with key 4 or 5.
Confirm setting, press key 7.
68
Mo
Fig 68.
9821/1300-1
68
Operation
Air Conditioning and Cab Heater

Controls
Cab Heater Fan (Three Speeds)
T2-037_2
Rotate control B to switch on the cab three speed heater

fan. Functions only with the starter switch at IGN.
Air Conditioning Option

To provide cool air in warm climates and during hot
seasons the air conditioning system delivers cool
dehumidified air into the cab.
The air conditioning and heater system is controlled by the

following switches:
Three speed fan switch
Temperature control switch
Air conditioning switch (if fitted)
Cab Heater Controls
To operate the air conditioning, press switch D to the ON

position (the switch will be illuminated).
ic
Re-circulation switch
The air conditioning controls operate in the same manner

as described for 'Heater Controls'.
Rotate the control C anti-clockwise to decrease the
temperature from ambient to cold. To obtain best results
from the air conditioning system ensure that all doors and
windows are closed.
Air conditioning performance is improved when the recirculation switch A is in position 2.
Se
Hot air can be directed to the front windscreen (for

demisting) and/or the cab floor by adjusting the air vents.
The temperature can be adjusted by operating control C. A
heater control switch B controls a three speed heater fan.
If air conditioning is fitted, the air conditioning on/off switch
D must be in the OFF position.
Air Control
Important: Operate the air conditioning for at least 10

minutes per month.
rv
es
399460-4
Fig 69.
Air conditioning reduces moisture from the air and can be

used to demist windows quickly in damp weather. Used in
conjunction with the heater, it also makes the interior of the
cab warm and dry.
Face Level Fan

T2-036_2
Press switch E to switch on the face level fan. Functions

only with 'ignition' on.
Rotate control A to position 1 to allow fresh air to enter the

cab. Position 2 gives re-circulated air and should be used
when operating in a dusty working environment. Position 2
can also be used to increase the heater performance
during cab warm up, and whilst operating the machine on
light duties.
Cab Heat control
Rotate control C clockwise to increase the temperature.

Rotate anti-clockwise to decrease the temperature.
69
218140-3
Fig 70.
9821/1300-1
69
Operation
Operating Levers
Operating Levers
Introduction
Control Layouts
!MWARNING
Controls
seated.
Control lever/switch action may vary on machines,

instructional labels near the levers/switches show by
symbols, which levers/switches cause what actions.
Before operating control levers/switches check the
instructional label to make sure you select the desired
action.
0179_2
5-2-2-9_2
Electrical Power Cables

You could be electrocuted or badly burned if you get
the machine or its attachments too close to electrical
power cables.
regulations concerning work near electric power lines.
Control levers and switches may vary on machines. The

machine may be fitted with any of the following control
layouts.
Loader Controls K Loader Controls ( T 71).
ic
!MWARNING
es
!MWARNING
Note: Make sure the seat is locked in the front facing

position when operating the loader controls.
Manual Controls
Easy Controls
rv

electricity supplier if there are any buried power
cables on the site.
2-2-5-4
Advanced Easy Controls Plus
Backhoe Controls K Backhoe Controls ( T 83).
Se
There is a minimum clearance required for working

beneath overhead power cables. You must obtain
details from your local electricity supplier.
Advanced Easy Controls
!MWARNING
Manual Controls - JCB Plus (+) Pattern
Make sure it is clear overhead before raising the

boom. Keep an adequate safe distance from all
electrical power lines. Contact your local power
company for safety procedures.
5-2-1-5_1
Note: Make sure the seat is locked in the rear facing

position when operating the backhoe controls.
Manual Controls - ISO Plus (+) Pattern

Manual Controls - JCB Diagonal (X) Pattern
Easy Controls - SAE Plus (+) Pattern
Easy Controls - ISO Plus (+) Pattern
Advanced Easy Controls - ISO Plus (+) Pattern
Advanced Easy Controls Plus - SAE Plus (+) Pattern
Advanced Easy Controls Plus - ISO Plus (+) Pattern
Advanced Easy Controls - SAE Plus (+) Pattern
70
9821/1300-1
70
Operation
Operating Levers
Loader Controls
Manual Controls
Introduction
On Manual Control machines the loader shovel is operated
from a single control lever A. Pressing the transmission
dump push button B on the lever knob quickly disconnects
the transmission from the engine. This gives more power
to the loader.
es
For individual loader movements (raise, lower, roll forward,

roll back) the lever is moved in a '+' pattern.
So if you pull the lever diagonally back-and-left the shovel

will both rise and roll back.
rv
The speed of loader actions depends on how far you move

the lever. The further you move it the faster the action. The
lever is spring-loaded to its central (hold) position. The
loader will stay in any position until you move it with the
control lever except for Float and Return To Dig
operations.
ic
Combined movements can be selected by moving the

lever in directions between the four main ones. For
example, the shovel is raised by pulling the lever straight
back; while to roll the shovel back the lever must be moved
to the left.
Se
A decal, located beside the control lever, shows by

symbols what lever movements cause which loader
actions. The symbols, lever movements and loader actions
are described on the following pages.
T039550-35
Fig 71.
The Auxiliary controls are operated by control lever C.

71
9821/1300-1
71
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise
Roll Forward
To raise the shovel A, pull the lever straight back. As the

shovel rises, it will stay at the same angle to the ground.
This is due to the parallel linkages on the loader arms.
To roll the bucket forward C, push the lever to the right.
Lower
To roll the bucket back D, pull the lever to the left.
Roll Back
To lower the shovel B, push the lever forward. The shovel

will stay at the same angle to the ground as described in
Raise.
A
C
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 73.
Fig 72.
72
9821/1300-1
72
Operation
Operating Levers
Float
Return To Dig
!MWARNING
This enables you to roll the shovel from the rolled forward
position into the digging position quickly and easily.
If Float is selected with the loader raised, the loader

will descend to ground level and 'float' across it as you
travel. You will not have control over the rate of fall.
Always lower the loader before selecting Float.
To select Return To Dig
To make the shovel 'float' across the ground, push the

lever forwards as far as it will go and leave it there. You will
feel a slight pressure on the lever as it passes through the
Lower position.
Press the `return to dig enable' switch A to the ON position,

the switch will illuminate.
es
2-2-2-7
When you select Return To Dig a switch on one of the

loader arms cuts off the hydraulic pressure when the
shovel reaches the correct angle for digging.
Pull the lever to the left as far as it will go. You will feel a
slight pressure on the lever as it passes through the Roll
Back position. Release the lever, it will stay in the detent
position until the shovel reaches the return to dig position
when the lever will automatically return to the central hold
position.
Se
rv
ic
When return to dig is no longer required press the enable

switch to the OFF position.
73
Fig 74.
399060-3
Fig 75.
9821/1300-1
73
Operation
Operating Levers
Easy Controls
Introduction
On Easy control machines the loader shovel is operated
from a single control lever A. Pressing the transmission
dump push button B on the lever knob quickly disconnects
the transmission from the engine. This gives more power
to the loader.

es

to the left.
rv

operations.
ic

T039550-36
Fig 76.
Se

74
9821/1300-1
74
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise
Roll Forward

Lower
Roll Back

Raise.
A
C
es
Fig 79.
ic
B
Fig 77.
rv
Se
Fig 80.
Fig 78.
75
9821/1300-1
75
Operation
Operating Levers
Float
Return To Dig
!MWARNING


Lower position.

es
2-2-2-7

position.
Se
rv
Fig 81.
ic

76
Fig 83.
Fig 82.
773810-1
Fig 84.
9821/1300-1
76
Operation
Operating Levers
Introduction
On Advanced Easy Control machines the loader shovel is

operated from the right hand control lever A when the
loader services are selected with rocker switch E.
When the seat is facing the front of the machine, to activate

the loader control lever A press and release switch C on
the right hand control lever. Light D on the right hand
control lever will illuminate when activated.
rv
With the seat facing the front and the right hand control
lever activated, subsequent pressing switch C will quickly
disconnect the transmission from the engine. This gives
more power to the loader.
ic
When the seat is facing the rear of the machine, press

rocker switch to the loader services position with rocker
switch E. Press and hold switch C on the right hand control
lever so that the loader can be operated. Release switch C
to disable the control lever. The alarm will sound while the
switch C is held in.
es
To isolate the control lever select rocker switch to centre

position.
807700-3
Fig 85.

Se

to the left.

operations.
77
9821/1300-1
77
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise
Roll Forward

Lower
Roll Back

Raise.
A
C
es
Fig 88.
ic
B
Fig 86.
Se
rv
807860
Fig 89.
78
Fig 87.
9821/1300-1
78
Operation
Operating Levers
Float
Return To Dig
!MWARNING


Lower position.

es
2-2-2-7

While the loader arms are lowered B, the shovel will

automatically return to the digging position.
Se
rv
Fig 90.
ic

79
Fig 92.
B
A
807880-1
Fig 93.
Fig 91.
9821/1300-1
79
Operation
Operating Levers
Introduction
On Advanced Easy controls Plus machines the loader
shovel is operated from a single control lever A. Pressing
the transmission dump push button B on the lever knob
quickly disconnects the transmission from the engine. This
gives more power to the loader.

es

to the left.
rv

operations.
ic

T039550-36
Fig 94.
Se

80
9821/1300-1
80
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise
Roll Forward

Lower
Roll Back

Raise.
A
C
es
Fig 97.
ic
B
Fig 95.
rv
Se
Fig 98.
Fig 96.
81
9821/1300-1
81
Operation
Operating Levers
Float
Return To Dig
!MWARNING


Lower position.

es
2-2-2-7

position.
Se
rv
Fig 99.
ic

82
Fig 101.
Fig 100.
773810-1
Fig 102.
9821/1300-1
82
Operation
Operating Levers
Backhoe Controls
Raise Boom
Manual Controls - JCB Plus ('+') Pattern
To raise the boom A, pull the lever towards the front of the
machine. Before raising the boom check that it is clear
overhead.
!MWARNING
Do not operate the excavator controls from outside the
machine, or you could be crushed by the excavator.
2-2-3-1
Lower Boom
To lower the boom B, push the lever towards the rear of the
machine.
es
On machines with JCB Plus ('+') Pattern control, there are

two backhoe control levers. The left hand lever A operates
the boom and slew. The right hand lever B operates the
dipper and bucket. For operation of the stabilisers.
Both levers move in a '+' pattern for individual backhoe

actions. Combined actions can be selected by moving the
levers in directions between the four main ones.
rv
Both levers are spring-loaded to their central (hold)

positions. The backhoe will stay in any position until you
move it with the levers.
ic
Both levers can be operated at the same time, for more

efficient operation. The speed of the backhoe action
depends on how far you move the levers. The further you
move a lever, the faster the action.
Se
A decal near the controls shows, by symbols, what lever

movements cause which backhoe actions. The symbols,
lever movements and backhoe actions are explained on
the following pages.
Fig 104.
Fig 103.
83
9821/1300-1
83
Operation
Operating Levers
Slew Left
Dipper In
To slew the boom to your left C, move the lever to your left.
To bring the dipper in E, pull the lever towards the front of

the machine.
Note: Some backhoe buckets and attachments may

collide with the stabiliser legs if slewed too far round.
Check this before using different attachments.
Note: Some backhoe attachments may collide with the

boom if brought too far in. Check this before using different
attachments.
Slew Right
Dipper Out
To push the dipper out F, push the lever towards the rear
of the machine. If the boom is already up, check that it is
clear overhead before swinging the dipper out.
es
To slew the boom to your right D, move the lever to your

right.
Se
rv
ic
84
Fig 105.
Fig 106.
9821/1300-1
84
Operation
Operating Levers
Close Bucket
To close the bucket G move the lever to your left.
Open Bucket
To open the bucket H move the lever to your right.
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 107.
85
9821/1300-1
85
Operation
Operating Levers
Manual Controls - ISO Plus ('+') Pattern
Dipper In
!MWARNING
To bring the dipper in A, pull the lever towards the front of

the machine.
2-2-3-1
On machines with ISO Plus ('+') Pattern control, there are

the slew and dipper. The right hand lever B operates the
boom and bucket. For operation of the stabilisers.

attachments.
Dipper Out
To push the dipper out B, push the lever towards the rear
es


rv

ic

Se

86
T039550-12
Fig 108.
9821/1300-1
Fig 109.
86
Operation
Operating Levers
Slew Left
Raise Boom
To raise the boom E, pull the lever towards the front of the
overhead.

stabiliser legs if slewed too far round. Check this before
using different attachments.
Slew Right
Lower Boom
To lower the boom F, push the lever towards the rear of the
machine.
es

right.
rv
Se
ic
87
Fig 111.
Fig 110.
9821/1300-1
87
Operation
Operating Levers
Close Bucket
Open Bucket
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 112.
88
9821/1300-1
88
Operation
Operating Levers
Manual Controls - JCB Diagonal (X) Pattern
Raise Boom
!MWARNING
To raise the boom A, pull the lever diagonally left and

towards you. Before raising the boom check that it is clear
overhead.
Lower Boom
On machines with JCB Diagonal ('X') Pattern control, there

are two backhoe control levers. The left hand lever A
operates the boom and slew. The right hand lever B
operates the dipper and bucket. For operation of the
stabilisers. K Stabiliser Controls ( T 104).
To lower the boom B, push the lever diagonally right and

away from you.
es
2-2-3-1
Both levers move in a 'X' pattern for individual backhoe

rv

ic

Se

89
Fig 114.
T039550-12
Fig 113.
9821/1300-1
89
Operation
Operating Levers
Dipper In
To slew the boom to your left C, push the lever diagonally

left and away from you.
To bring the dipper in E, pull the lever diagonally right and

towards you.


attachments.
Slew Right
Dipper Out
To slew the boom to your right D, pull the lever diagonally

right and towards you.
To push the dipper out F, push the lever diagonally left and
away from you. If the boom is already up, check that it is
es
Slew Left
C
D
Se
rv
ic
90
Fig 115.
Fig 116.
9821/1300-1
90
Operation
Operating Levers
Close Bucket
To close the bucket G pull the lever diagonally to your left.
Open Bucket
To open the bucket H push the lever diagonally to your
right.
es
Se
rv
ic
Fig 117.
91
9821/1300-1
91
Operation
Operating Levers
Easy Controls - SAE Plus ('+') Pattern
!MWARNING
When the seat is locked in the forward facing position,

pressing and holding switch C on the right hand control
lever will make the levers operational so that the backhoe
can be operated. Release switch C to disable both control
levers. The alarm will sound while the switch C is held in.
Push button G on the left hand control lever to sound the
horn.
2-2-3-1
On machines with SAE Plus ('+') Pattern control, there are

Machines fitted with the optional ISO, SAE changeover
valve, make sure the selector valve F is pointing to SAE.
A
F
es
ic
Fig 118.
rv
Se

T027690-3
Fig 119.



When the seat is facing the rear of the machine to the
halfway position to the front, to activate both control levers
A and B press and release switch C on the right hand
control lever. The lights D on both control levers will
illuminate when they are activated.
92
9821/1300-1
92
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise Boom
Slew Left
overhead.
Lower Boom
machine.

Slew Right
es

right.
ic
rv
SAE
ISO
Se
SAE
ISO
T027700-2
Fig 120.
T027710-2
Fig 121.
93
9821/1300-1
93
Operation
Operating Levers
Dipper In
Close Bucket

the machine.

Open Bucket

attachments.
Dipper Out
es
rv
ic
Se
94
SAE
ISO
T027730-5
Fig 123.
SAE
ISO
T027720-5
Fig 122.
9821/1300-1
94
Operation
Operating Levers
Easy Controls - ISO Plus ('+') Pattern
!MWARNING

pressing and holding switch C on the right hand control
lever will make the levers operational so that the backhoe
can be operated. Release switch C to disable both control
levers. The alarm will sound while the switch is held in.
horn.
2-2-3-1

valve, make sure the selector valve F is pointing to ISO.
es
ic
Fig 124.
rv
Se

T027690-2
Fig 125.



A and B press and release switch C on the right hand
control lever. The lights D on both control levers will
illuminate when they are activated.
95
9821/1300-1
95
Operation
Operating Levers
Dipper In
Slew Left

the machine.

attachments.

Slew Right
Dipper Out
right.
es
rv
ic
SAE
Se
SAE
ISO
ISO
T027750-2
Fig 127.
T027740-2
Fig 126.
96
9821/1300-1
96
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise Boom
Close Bucket
overhead.
Lower Boom
Open Bucket
machine.
es
ic
Se
rv
SAE
ISO
SAE
ISO
T027770-5
Fig 129.
T027760-5
Fig 128.
97
9821/1300-1
97
Operation
Operating Levers
Advanced Easy Controls (SAE + Pattern),
Advanced Easy Controls Plus (SAE + Pattern)
the right hand control lever. The lights D on both control

levers will illuminate when they are activated.
!MWARNING
To disable both control levers, select rocker switch E on the

right hand seat pod to the centre position.
2-2-3-1
On machines with SAE Plus ('+') Pattern control, there are


press rocker switch to excavator services then pressing
and holding switch C on the right hand control lever will
make the levers operational so that the backhoe can be
operated. Release switch C to disable both control levers.
The alarm will sound while the switch C is held in.
horn.
es


valve, make sure the selector valve F is pointing to SAE.
ic
rv
Fig 130.
Se




807680-2
Fig 131.

A and B press rocker switch E to select rear services. To
activate the control levers, press and release switch C on
98
9821/1300-1
98
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise Boom
Slew Left
overhead.
Lower Boom
machine.

Slew Right
es

right.
ic
B
A
SAE
ISO
Se
rv
SAE
ISO
C011230-2
Fig 132.
C011250-2
Fig 133.
99
9821/1300-1
99
Operation
Operating Levers
Dipper In
Close Bucket

the machine.

Open Bucket

attachments.
Dipper Out
es
ic
rv
SAE
ISO
C011260-2
Se
Fig 135.
SAE
ISO
C011240-2
Fig 134.
100
9821/1300-1
100
Operation
Operating Levers
Advanced Easy Controls - ISO + Pattern,
Advanced Easy Controls Plus - ISO + Pattern
the right hand control lever. The lights D on both control

levers will illuminate when they are activated.
!MWARNING
To disable both control levers, select rocker switch E on the

right hand seat pod to the centre position.
2-2-3-1


press rocker switch to excavator services then pressing
and holding switch C on the right hand control lever will
make the levers operational so that the backhoe can be
operated. Release switch C to disable both control levers.
The alarm will sound while the switch C is held in.
horn.
es


valve, make sure the selector valve F is pointing to ISO.
ic
rv
Fig 136.
Se




807680-2
Fig 137.

A and B press rocker switch E to select rear services. To
activate the control levers, press and release switch C on
101
9821/1300-1
101
Operation
Operating Levers
Dipper In
Slew Left

the machine.

attachments.

Slew Right
Dipper Out
right.
es
rv
ic
SAE
Se
SAE
ISO
ISO
C011280-1
Fig 139.
C011270-1
Fig 138.
102
9821/1300-1
102
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise Boom
Close Bucket
overhead.
Lower Boom
Open Bucket
machine.
es
ic
Se
rv
SAE
ISO
SAE
ISO
C011300-1
Fig 141.
C011290-1
Fig 140.
103
9821/1300-1
103
Operation
Operating Levers
Stabiliser Controls
Lever Controls
!MWARNING
Stabilisers
Bystanders could be crushed and obstacles could be
damaged if they are beneath the stabilisers while they
are being lowered. Before lowering the stabilisers,
make sure any bystanders are clear of the machine.
Also make sure that there are no obstacles beneath
the stabilisers.
es
2-2-2-10
!MWARNING
Do not operate the stabilisers from outside the
machine. Otherwise you could be crushed when the
machine moves.
rv
The stabilisers must be down when you use the

excavator, or the machine will rock violently. Each
stabiliser has its own control lever and can be
operated independently.
ic
You must be sitting in the driving seat when operating

the stabiliser controls.
2-2-2-8_1
Before travelling, fully raise both stabiliser legs. On

sideshift machines, when stabiliser leg has fully raised, the
top of the stabiliser leg can be seen through the hole E. If
the stabiliser leg has not been fully raised the stabiliser leg
will not be visible as shown at F.
Use the stabiliser control levers that are applicable to your

machine.
104
Stabiliser Warning System (If Fitted)

The stabiliser warning system operates if the stabiliser legs
are not fully raised when either forward or reverse is
selected. K Side Console ( T 57).
Se
Lower each stabiliser to level the machine and take the

weight off of the rear tyres. The loader shovel should
be used along with the stabilisers to level and steady
the machine.
Fig 142.
The warning system alerts the operator that drive has been
selected with the legs down.
So that the machine will not inadvertently move away,
when the alarm is activated carry out the following
procedure.
1
Select the forward reverse lever to the neutral

position.
Raise the stabiliser legs.
Select forward or reverse, the alarm will not sound.
9821/1300-1
104
Operation
Operating Levers
Raise Stabilisers
To raise the stabilisers A and C, pull the levers towards the
front of the machine.
Lower Stabilisers
To lower the stabilisers B and D, push the levers towards
the rear of the machine.
338901-2
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 145.
405090
Fig 143. Manual Controls
366080
Fig 146.
Occasionally there may be a need for fully extending one

or both stabiliser legs and rams in order to level the
machine on steep slopes. In these conditions it may be
necessary to use the boom to apply a down force to enable
the stabiliser to fully extend, also raising the shovel off the
ground can help.
Stabiliser indicator lights
Some machines are fitted with optional stabiliser indicator

lights. The lights will illuminate when both stabiliser legs
are in the down position and the weight of the machine is
supported.
Fig 144. Easy / Advanced Easy Controls
105
794920
If fitted, ensure both indicator lights illuminate when the

stabiliser legs are in the down position. If the lights do not
illuminate do not use the machine until the fault is
investigated and corrected.
9821/1300-1
105
Operation
Operating Levers
Auxiliary Controls
6 in 1 Clamshovel
Open Clam - To open the clam F, push the lever

forward.
Close Clam - To close the clam G, pull the lever

back.
Manual Controls
Se
rv
Set the change over lever J on the carriage to the correct

position, as shown at H, so that the auxiliary lever in the
cab will operate the clamshovel. To change to Quickhitch
operation. Refer to Optional Attachments, Loader
Quickhitch.
ic
The two levers can be operated at the same time to

produce combined loader actions. The lever movements
and their effects on the shovel are shown on a plastic decal
located close to the lever.
es
On machines fitted with a 6 in 1 clamshovel there is a

second control lever next to the standard one. On these
machines, the standard lever operates as described
earlier. The second lever operates the clam on the 6 in 1
clamshovel.
Fig 148.
106
407981-2
Fig 147.
9821/1300-1
106
Operation
Operating Levers
Easy Controls
thumb switch on the loader lever that operates the service.
Open Clam - To open the clam F, push the switch

up.
Close Clam - To close the clam G, push the switch

down.

Quickhitch.
To enable the thumb switch, press and hold for a few

seconds, then release the servo enable switch C.
K Fig 151. ( T 107).
es
Ensure the seat is locked in the forward facing position.
Fig 150.
Se
rv
ic
T027790-3
Fig 151.
407981-2
Fig 149.
107
9821/1300-1
107
Operation
Operating Levers
On machines fitted with a 6 in 1 clamshovel, the thumb
switch on the loader lever operates the service.

right.

left.

Quickhitch.
Fig 153.
ic

seconds, then release the servo enable switch C. The
thumb switch should be isolated before roading or when
not in use, press rocker switch D to the centre position on
the right hand seat pod. K Fig 154. ( T 108).
es
Se
rv
807690-2
Fig 154.
Fig 152.
108
9821/1300-1
108
Operation
Operating Levers
thumb switch on the loader lever that operates the service.

up.

down.

Quickhitch.

seconds, then release the servo enable switch C.
K Fig 151. ( T 107).
es
Fig 156.
Se
rv
ic
T027790-3
Fig 157.
407981-2
Fig 155.
109
9821/1300-1
109
Operation
Operating Levers
Auxiliary Options Control
Easy Controls
Manual Controls (If Fitted)
Switch A on the right hand control lever can be used to

operate various options such as power sideshift, extending
dipper and auxiliary attachments.
The pedal is the rocking type, operated by heel-and-toe. It

is spring-loaded to its mid-position. Speed of operation
depends on how far the pedal is pressed down. The
attachment will stay in any position until you move it with
the pedal.
Some machines may have a floor mounted switch B. This
is used to operate the hammer. K Hammer (If
Fitted) ( T 288), K Bi-Directional and Hammer Circuits
(If fitted) ( T 292).
operation.
Se
rv
For power sideshift, extending dipper

K Working With The Backhoe ( T 138).
es
A decal, located on the pedal, shows the pedal and the

attachment movements.
The switch is a proportional roller type. It is spring-loaded

to its mid-position. Speed of operation depends on how far
the switch is pressed. The attachment will stay in any
position until you move it with the switch.
ic
Some machines may have a foot operated pedal A. This

can be used to operate various options such as power
sideshift, extending dipper and auxiliary attachments.
T039550-60
Fig 158.
T027780-1
110
Fig 159.
9821/1300-1
110
Operation
Operating Levers
Advanced Easy Controls, Advanced Easy Controls
Plus
Switch A on the right hand control lever can be used to
operate various options such as power sideshift, extending
dipper and auxiliary attachments.
The switch is a proportional roller type. It is spring-loaded
to its mid-position. Speed of operation depends on how far
the switch is pressed. The attachment will stay in any
position until you move it with the switch.
es
The excavator auxiliary roller switch A can not be operated

with the seat locked in the forward facing position.
For power sideshift and extending dipper operation.
Se
rv
ic
111
Fig 160.
9821/1300-1
111
Operation
Safety Equipment
Safety Equipment
Boom and Slew Locks
Boom Lock
We recommend that the boom lock and the slew lock be
engaged before travelling on the road.
es
Check on a daily basis that the boom lock fully engages

and secures the boom. If the lock does not fully engage (or
disengage) the boom stop A may need adjusting (consult
your JCB Distributor).
Controls
seated.
0179_2
rv
It is recommended that the slew lock is engaged before

fitting the boom lock.
ic
!MWARNING
Note: The illustration shows a centremount boom and

slew lock arrangement. Sideshift machines stow the slew
lock in a bracket which is mounted on the kingpost casting.
Se
Engage the Boom Lock
Set the backhoe straight behind the machine, rest the

boom on the ground.
Make sure that the boom lock B is fully raised, if

necessary lift control lever C to raise the lock.
Close the boom ram (raise the boom).
Lower control lever C to lower the boom lock B, make

sure that the lock is fully engaged in the boom lugs.
Fig 161.
Lower the boom a little to tighten the lock.
Disengage the Boom Lock

1
Raise the boom a little to release the lock.
Lift control lever C to raise the boom lock B.
112
9821/1300-1
112
Operation
Safety Equipment
Slew Lock
Remove the lock pin G and put it in its stowage

position.
We recommend that the boom lock and the slew lock be

engaged before travelling on the road.
!MWARNING
Controls
seated.
0179_2
B-2-1-8
Note: The illustration shows a centremount boom and

slew lock arrangement. Sideshift machines stow the slew
lock in a bracket which is mounted on the kingpost casting.
Se
Engage the Slew Lock
rv
It is recommended that the slew lock is engaged before

fitting the boom lock.
ic
If two people are doing this job make sure that the
person working the controls is a competent operator.
If the wrong control lever is moved, or if the controls
are moved violently, the other person could be killed
or injured.
es
!MWARNING
Slew the backhoe into the required position. Make

sure that hole E (in the kingpost) aligns with hole F (in
the mainframe). Stop the engine.
!MWARNING
Fig 162.
Do not attempt to install or remove the slew lock pin

when sat in the cab, you will be leaning over the
backhoe control levers. You or others can be killed or
seriously injured if the control levers are accidently
operated.
2-2-3-10_1
Remove the slew lock pin G from its stowage position

and fit it into the aligned holes.
Disengage the Slew Lock

1
113
Stop the engine.
9821/1300-1
113
Operation
Safety Equipment
Control Lever Locks (If Fitted)

To prevent the loader arms and the backhoe from being
accidentally operated when the driver is entering or leaving
the cab, or driving on the highway, safety locking pins can
be installed.
es
Always fit the locking pin before leaving the cab. Only
remove the locking pin when you are correctly seated
inside the cab. Put the pins in their stowage position during
machine operation. This will prevent the pin from being
misplaced.
Se
rv
ic
Fig 164.
114
Fig 163.
9821/1300-1
114
Operation
Safety Equipment
Overload Warning System (If Fitted)

The Overload warning system is only applicable to
machines installed with object handling capabilities.
K Lifting (Object Handling) ( T 156).
If your machine has not been fitted with an approved

lifting point such as a hook or shackle and hose burst
check valves then it must not be used for object
handling. Using a machine for object handling without
these devices could lead to injury. Use the machine for
earth-moving purposes only.
2-2-1-13
!MWARNING
817
/2 0 0
82
ic
The overload warning system senses the pressure in the

boom raise pressure circuit, and gives a visual and audible
warning when the pressure exceeds predetermined limits.
When using the machine for lifting, the machine may
become unstable, if these limits are exceeded there is a
need for an audible and visible warning system.
es
!MWARNING
B
T032730-9
Fig 165.
rv
You must set the overload warning switch to on before

using the excavator for object handling. If you do not
turn the switch on this could lead to a stability hazard.
2-2-1-14
Se
The overload warning switch A is situated on the right hand

switch panel. K Fig 165. ( T 115).
If the safe operating lift limit is exceeded the buzzer will
activate.
!MWARNING
When the alarm activates the operator must take the

necessary corrective action to reduce the lift or a
stability hazard could occur. When the machine is in a
safe position the buzzer will stop sounding.
2-2-1-15
When not lifting, the overload circuit should be switched

off. Otherwise the alarm will activate during digging
operations giving nuisance alarms.
All lifting with the machine must be done in
accordance with the machines specific Load Chart and
also with the Lift Regulations and Safe Working
Loads
(see Specifications).
115
9821/1300-1
115
Operation
Safety Equipment
Beacon
In certain territories you will be breaking the law if you do
not fit a rotating beacon before you travel on public
highways - make sure you are complying with local laws.
Note: Be careful when you operate the machine with a
beacon. The total height of the machine is increased when
the beacon is in the operating position.
1
Put the beacon A on the cab roof.
Put the plug B into the cab roof socket C.
Use the switch D to operate the beacon. The indicator

light in the switch comes ON when the beacon is
operating.
In some territories, to meet legislative requirements, a

beacon extension mount E must be fitted, or the beacon
must be mounted on the dipper. Consult your JCB
Distributor for advice.
Se
rv
Do not climb on the machine to fit the beacon on the

dipper. Fully extend and lower the boom and dipper so that
it is possible to fit the beacon whilst standing on the
ground.
ic
es
Note: The beacon is held in position by a magnetic base.
116
227600-3
Fig 166.
9821/1300-1
116
Operation
Safety Equipment
Fire Extinguisher (If Fitted)

Location
The fire extinguisher is found on the front console and is
held in position by a stowage bracket. Keep the fire
extinguisher in this position until you need to use it.
Operation
T2-041_3
!MWARNING
es
Do not use the fire extinguisher in a confined space.

Make sure that the area is well ventilated during and
after using the fire extinguisher.
S170520-3
Fig 167.
4-2-3-1
After any use, the extinguisher should be replaced or

serviced.
4-2-3-2
rv
Make sure that you understand how to use the fire

extinguisher. If necessary, refer to the instructions found
on the fire extinguisher.
ic
The fire extinguisher should be inspected daily. Refer to

Routine Maintenance, Fire Extinguisher (if fitted).
!MWARNING
Only try to extinguish a fire if the circumstances permit and

your safety is not endangered. If necessary, contact your
nearest fire department.
Se
Using the fire extinguisher:
If the circumstances permit and your safety is not

endangered, move the machine to a safe place to
prevent the fire from spreading.
Remove extinguisher from its stowage bracket.
Remove safety pin A.
Aim directly at the fire from an upwind position, if

possible.
Squeeze trigger B to operate the extinguisher,

release the trigger to stop the flow.
117
9821/1300-1
117
Operation
Before Starting the Engine

P5-2033_4
Note: Read Operating Environment in Operation section

if you will be using the machine in very cold or very hot
climates.
Note: If the fuel tank has been empty or if any part of the
fuel system has been drained or disconnected, the fuel
system must be primed before attempting to start the
engine. See Bleeding the System, Maintenance section.
Keep the machine controls clean and dry. Your hands

and feet could slide off slippery controls. If that
happens you could lose control of the machine.
2-2-3-6
The park brake should have been engaged when the

machine was last parked. But if it is not already
engaged, engage it now.
d Make sure that your hands and shoes are clean

and dry.
!MDANGER
!MWARNING
2-2-3-4
Loose articles can fall and strike you or roll on the

floor. You could be knocked unconscious, or the
controls could get jammed. If that happens you could
lose control of the machine.
ic
Before lowering the attachments to the ground, make

sure that the machine and the area around it are clear
of other people. Anyone on or close to the machine
could fall and be crushed by the attachments, or get
caught in the linkages.
2-2-3-7_1
Make sure that the attachment is on the ground.
!MCAUTION
Se
On machines fitted with hose burst protection valves

the attachments cannot be lowered with the engine
stopped. On these machines start the engine and
lower the attachments before doing the walk round
inspection.
2-2-3-5
For your own safety (and others) and for a maximum

service life of your machine, do a pre-start inspection
before starting the engine.
If you haven't already done it, do a walk round

inspection of the outside of the machine. See
Before Entering the Cab. Also, complete the
daily checks as detailed in the Service Schedules.
Inspect the ROPS/FOPS structure for damage.

Get your JCB Distributor to repair any damage.
Make sure all its securing bolts are fitted and
correctly tightened.
g Check around the cab for loose or missing bolts,

screws etc. Replace or tighten where necessary.
h Inspect the seat belt and its mountings for
damage and excessive wear.
!MWARNING

2-3-1-7_1
b Remove dirt and rubbish from the cab interior,

specially around the pedals and control levers.
118
Remove or secure all loose articles in the cab such as lunch boxes, tools etc.
rv
Remove oil, grease and mud from the pedals,

control levers and the steering wheel.
es
!MWARNING
Check that the following are in working order:

Lights, Warning Lights, Horn, Indicator Lights, All
Switches, Direction Indicators, Hazard Warning
Lights, Windscreen Washer and Wipers (if fitted).
9821/1300-1
118
Operation
Adjust the seat so that you can comfortably reach all
the driving controls. You should be able to apply full
brake pedal travel with your back against the seat
back.
If fitted, adjust the armrest so that you can reach and

operate the controls without stretching.
If possible, adjust the steering column so that you can

reach the steering wheel and the steering column
switches without stretching.
If fitted, set the rear view mirror(s) to give you a good

view close behind the machine when you are
correctly seated.
Fasten the seat belt.
Se
rv
ic
es
119
9821/1300-1
119
Operation
Starting The Engine
Starting The Engine

1
Read and comply with Before Starting The Engine.
b Fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor.
Put the Forward, Reverse lever in neutral.
The engine will not start unless the forward, reverse

lever A is in neutral.
Put the gear lever in neutral.
Note: The gear lever B is only fitted to machines equipped

with Synchro Shuttle (manual) transmission.
4
Note: Do not operate the starter motor for more than 10

seconds without the engine firing. If the engine fires but
does not fully start, do not operate the starter motor for
more than 40 seconds. Let the starter motor cool for at
least two minutes between starts.
Set the hand throttle lever to minimum.

Make sure that hand throttle lever C is set at the
minimum engine revs position.
!MWARNING
ic
It is recommended that the Hydraulic Flow Control

Eco switch (if fitted) is selected to LO when starting
the engine to reduce the load on the engine and help
it start.
Se
Exhaust Gases
Breathing the machine exhaust gases can harm and
possibly kill you. Do not operate the machine in closed
spaces without making sure there is good ventilation.
If possible, fit an exhaust extension. If you begin to
feel drowsy, stop the machine at once and get into
fresh air.
INT-2-1-10_2
D
E
rv
es
When the warning light goes OFF, turn the starter

switch E to the `start' position III and hold it there
until the engine starts.
Normal engine start.

a
Slightly depress the accelerator pedal D.
T039550-16
Note: If the temperature is above -6C (21F), the cold

climate heater warning light will flash momentarily to
indicate the system is functioning correctly (Where this
option is fitted). K Fig 45. ( T 58).
b Turn the starter switch E to position III and hold it

there until the engine starts.
Cold climate engine start (if fitted), -6C (21F).

a
120
Turn the starter switch E to position I, the cold start

inlet manifold heater warning light will come ON.
K Fig 45. ( T 58).
9821/1300-1
120
Operation
Starting The Engine
Note: If any warning lights fail to go off, or come on while
the engine is running, stop the engine as soon as it is safe
to do so.
11
Operate the backhoe a few times to help warm up the

hydraulic system.
Do not operate attachments until the hydraulic oil has
reached its normal working temperature.
C
T039550-40
Fig 169. Easy Controls/ Advanced Easy Controls

Release the starter key as soon as the engine starts.
The switch will return to `IGN' position I.
!MWARNING
rv
Note: Do not attempt to move the machine if the Service

Brake warning light does not go off. Contact your JCB
dealer.
ic
es
Note: New engines DO NOT require a running-in period.

The engine/machine should be used in a normal work
cycle immediately; glazing of the piston cylinder bores
resulting in excessive oil consumption, could occur if the
engine is gently run-in. Under no circumstances should the
engine be allowed to idle for extended periods; (e.g.
warming up without load).
3-2-1-9
Se
Do not use ether or other starting fluids to assist cold

starting. Using these fluids may result in an explosion
causing possible injury and/or damage to the engine.
Ease off on the accelerator pedal to reduce engine

speed.
10
Once the engine has started, check that all the

warning lights have gone off. Do not race the engine
until the oil pressure low light has gone out. Racing
the engine too soon could damage the turbo-charger
due to under lubrication. Check that the audible alarm
is silent.
Note: The engine noise and or tone may be louder than

usual when cold. This is normal and is due to the fuel
injection pump being advanced. The engine will become
quieter when the engine reaches normal operating
temperature.
121
9821/1300-1
121
Operation
Preparing The Machine For Travel

When travelling on the road or on site there are usually
local rules and safety regulations for the machine travelling
position. The 'Road Travelling Position' and 'Site
Travelling Position' described on the following pages are
recommendations that should help you meet the
requirements of these regulations; they are not necessarily
the applied law:
es
PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT BEFORE TRAVELLING

ON THE ROAD OR ON SITE, YOU AND YOUR
MACHINE COMPLY WITH ALL THE RELEVANT LOCAL
LAWS - IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
The 'tucked-in' position, i.e. the backhoe is placed

across the back of the machine. K Fig 170. ( T 122).
The 'central protruding' position, i.e. the backhoe is

placed central and protruding from the back of the
machine. K Fig 171. ( T 122). All centremount
machines must travel in the 'central protruding'
position.
rv
ic
Whether driving on the road or on site, there are two

possible travelling positions:
Backhoe Attachments
We recommend that all backhoe attachments be removed
before travelling on the road. However, if the machine IS
driven on the road with attachments fitted, then the
conditions listed under the headings Tucked-In Travel
Position and Central Protruding Travel Position should be
maintained.
Se
Choosing the correct travelling position will depend on; the

type of machine you are operating and the type of
equipment you have fitted to the backhoe.
182290-1
Fig 171. Central Protruding Position
Tucked In Travel Position

1
The attachments must not cause the maximum

overall machine width to exceed 2.5m (8.2ft). If any
part protrudes beyond the outer edge of the rear
frame, it must be marked with red and white stripes to
warn that a hazard exists.
The boom lock and slew lock must be securely fitted.

In certain territories, it will be necessary to fit a bucket

crowd ram safety strut.
182280-1
Fig 170. Tucked In Position
122
9821/1300-1
122
Operation
The attachments must not protrude from the back of
the machine by more than 1m (3.28ft). If the
attachments do protrude by more than 1m (3.28ft)
then a rear protrusion plate/light must be fitted. If the
attachment is removed, then the tipping link must be
secured.
Machine stability must be maintained.
The rear stop, tail, indicator lights (both sides) must

be clearly visible from the rear of the machine.
The hydraulic clamps (kingpost clamps) must be

engaged.
strut is removed and the pivot plate is in position C before

performing loading operations.
es
Central Protruding Travel Position
The backhoe must be set centrally on the rear frame

and hydraulic clamping engaged (applicable to
sideshift machines only).
The boom lock and slew lock must be securely fitted.

In certain territories, it will be necessary to fit a bucket

crowd ram safety strut.
A protrusion plate/light must be fitted. If the

attachment is removed, then the tipping link must be
secured and the rear protrusion plate/light must still
be fitted.
Se
ic
The attachments must not affect machine stability.

For instance there must be at least 20% of the total
machine weight acting on the front axle.
rv
Road Travel Position
Read and understand the information given on Preparing

The Machine For Travel. The recommendations given
below ARE NOT necessarily the applied law, please make
sure you are complying with the relevant local laws.
Note: Machines without headlights and sidelights are

designed for site use, you may be breaking local laws if
you travel on the road without headlights or sidelights.
Note: In Certain countries legislation requires the forks to
be folded back before travelling on public roads. Make
sure the pivot plate is in the travel position A and the travel
strut B is installed in the correct position (The clam shovel
must be in closed position for travelling). Make sure the
123
9821/1300-1
T053430
Fig 172.
Secure any additional backhoe bucket inside the front
loader shovel. If fitted, use the shovel mounted
hanger bracket; the bucket MUST BE secured before
travelling on the road.
a
Select Smooth Ride System to On (if fitted). Use

of the Smooth Ride System during loader
operation not requiring power down of the loader
arms will enhance machine operation by
smoothing the ride across uneven surfaces.
123
Operation
!MCAUTION
When the Smooth Ride System is selected ON the

loader arms may lift or lower slightly, make sure
personnel are clear.
b Utilise the restraint device (described) to ensure

that the equipment is in the travelling position.
2-2-5-10
b Raise the front loader shovel 600 mm (2ft), press

switch A which will illuminate when the system is
ON, roll the shovel fully back.
!MCAUTION
Always assess your route for overhead structures

such as bridges which could be damaged by your
machine.
Important: Whilst this information is believed to be

correct, JCB can not be aware of all circumstances in
which JCB machines may be operated on a Public
Highway and it is the responsibility of the user to ensure
compliance with the regulations.
!MCAUTION
Restraints must not be used for lifting purposes.
0112
ic
For UK machines fit the restraint to wrap around

either the left or right loader arm and secure.
K Fig 174. ( T 124).
Se
rv
Note: If both hose burst check valve and SRS options are
fitted, switch A will be a 3 position switch. To engage SRS
Press switch A to the 3rd spring loaded position, on
release it will spring back to mid position and SRS will be
active. If the engine or the ignition is switched OFF the
HBCV option is activated, you must press and release
switch A to select the SRS on again.
2-2-5-8
es
If both Smooth Ride System (SRS) and Hose Burst

Check Valve (HBCV) options are fitted on your
machine, when the SRS is selected ON there will be no
HBCV protection. Do not switch the SRS ON when the
front loader shovel is above 600mm (2ft).
T039550-41
Fig 174.
Fig 173.
Machines without smooth ride system, roll the shovel

fully back. Position it to clear the road surface by 300
mm (1ft in).
Set the backhoe, there are two possible positions.

K Tucked In Travel Position ( T 122), K Central
Protruding Travel Position ( T 123). For UK
machines fit the restraint. K Fig 175. ( T 125).
In the UK before travelling on public roads, it is your

responsibility as a user to comply with The Road
Vehicles (Construction and Use) (Amendment)
Regulations 1997 (Bridge Bashing Regs.). By way
of guidance only, the following steps may be taken to
comply:
124
9821/1300-1
124
Operation
Note: Make sure the stabiliser legs are clean and free from
debris before retracting. An alarm will sound if the stabiliser
legs are not fully retracted.
11
Select the following drive

(depending on machine type):
a
or
steer
positions
2 Wheel Steer Machines - select 'Two Wheel

Drive - All Wheel Braking'.
b 4 Wheel Steer Machines - select 'Two Wheel

Steer'.
Fit the flashing beacon. K Beacon ( T 116).
13
Check that the road lamps, including the flashing

beacon, are all in working order and clearly visible. Do
not drive the machine unless both stop lights work
correctly.
es
12
ic
Site Travel Position
rv
Read and understand the information given on Preparing

The Machine For Travel. The recommendations given
below ARE NOT necessarily the applied law, please make
sure you are complying with the relevant local laws.
303770-1
Fig 175.
Engage the boom and slew locks. K Boom and Slew

Locks ( T 112).
If the backhoe is set central to the rear frame, attach

a protrusion plate/light to the dipper. Ensure that the
plate light is plugged in.
!MCAUTION
When the Smooth Ride System is selected ON the

loader arms may lift or lower slightly, make sure
personnel are clear.
Se
2-2-5-10
If any attachments are fitted, make them safe, for

example, fit tooth guards etc. If forks are fitted, put
them in the fork stowage position.
Note: In certain territories you will be breaking the law if

you do not fit a tooth guard to the loader shovel, even if the
teeth are not fitted. Make sure you are complying with local
laws.
On machines with dual brake pedals, lock the pedals

together when driving on the road in any gear. The
stop lights should come on when the brakes are
applied.
10
Select Smooth Ride System to On (if fitted).

a
Use of the Smooth Ride System during loader

operation not requiring power down of the loader
arms will enhance machine operation by
smoothing the ride across uneven surfaces.
b If Smooth Ride System is fitted and selected ON

the loader can not power down. For duties other
than light handling the system should be selected
OFF.
c
Raise the front loader shovel 600 mm (2ft), press

switch A which will illuminate when the system is
ON.
Make sure the stabilisers are fully up. K Stabiliser

Controls ( T 104).
125
9821/1300-1
125
Operation
7
4 Wheel Steer Machines Only:

Select the mode of steering most suitable for the
terrain and the work you are doing.
Select the drive and brake mode most suitable for the
terrain and the work you are doing.
A
T039550-41
Machines without smooth ride system, roll the shovel

fully back. Position it to clear the surface by 300 mm
(12 in), as shown at F.
rv
ic
es
Fig 176.
Se
762410-1
Fig 177.
Set the backhoe, there are two possible positions.

K Tucked In Travel Position ( T 122), K Central
Protruding Travel Position ( T 123).
If any attachments are fitted, make them safe. Unless

you are using the forks to carry a load, put the forks in
the stowage position.
Engage the boom and slew locks. K Boom and Slew

Locks ( T 112).
Make sure the stabilisers are fully up. K Stabiliser

Controls ( T 104).
126
9821/1300-1
126
Operation
Getting The Machine Moving
When moving the machine, keep it under control at all

times. Stay alert for obstructions and possible hazards.
Do not use the brake pedals as footrests.
Do not coast the machine in neutral, you will not have full
control. Also, coasting the machine will damage the
transmission.
Select the necessary gear before starting down a slope.
Use the same gear you would use to go up the slope. Do
not change gear on the slope. If operating a machine with
autoshift transmission, select low gears in manual mode
before starting down a steep slope.
Check your seat belt and seat.

a
Make sure that your seat belt is correctly

fastened.
b Make sure that the seat is correctly adjusted.

2
Select 2 or 4 wheel drive.

a
4-Wheel Steer Machines Only - Switch A.

K Fig 179. ( T 128).
rv
If the load will be pushing the machine on a down slope,

select first gear (1) before starting downhill.
After you have warmed up the engine and tested the park
brake, make sure the service brake warning light has gone
off, then move off as described below.
es
The machine can be put in motion in any gear. But do not

over work the engine unnecessarily by using too high a
gear for example, on a hill. Operating in too high a gear will
overheat the torque converter fluid.
Wheel slip is an indication that the limited slip limit has

been reached. On high traction surfaces (concrete etc.)
noise and judder may be experienced when the LSD is
operating, particularly on full steering lock. The level of
noise depends on the weight of the machine, the ground
conditions and steering angles. Noise in the LSD is not an
indication of axle damage.
ic
Operating Practices
Use the brake pedal to prevent overspeeding down a

slope.
Note: Do not use 4-wheel drive on the road or hard

surfaces, as it will cause excessive tyre wear and fuel
consumption.
Se
Approach deep mud in first gear (1) with the front wheels
straight.
b 2-Wheel Steer Machines Only - Rotary switch B.

K Fig 178. ( T 128).
The front and rear axles are fitted with axle breathers. If the
machine is to be driven into deep water (i.e. above the
level of the breather), care should be taken to ensure that
water does not enter the breather.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES must the rear axle

breather be blanked off, as this could cause a reduction in
brake efficiency.
Limited Slip Differential (LSD)
This is an option which can be specified on some

machines to enhance traction in difficult conditions. This is
achieved by transferring a high proportion of the available
driving torque from the spinning wheel to the gripping
wheel. The limited slip differential operates automatically
and should not be confused with differential locks.
127
9821/1300-1
127
Operation
es
rv
ic
762430-1
Fig 178.
Select the required steer mode (4-Wheel Steer

machines Only).
Se
Select the required steer mode with switch C.

Remember that the steering may temporarily remain
in the last selected mode until the rear wheels pass
through the 'straight ahead' position. Crab steer may
not be available on all models.
!MWARNING
In 4-wheel steer, the back end of the machine will

swing out when you make a turn. Check for clearance
before making a turn.
762440-1
Fig 179.
Engage a gear.
Synchro Shuttle Machines - select the required

gear using gear lever G. K Fig 180. ( T 129).
!MWARNING
Do not change from a high gear to a low gear in one

sudden movement when the machine is moving.
Otherwise the machine will rapidly decelerate, you or
others could be killed or seriously injured. When
selecting lower gears, allow the engine speed to drop
before each gear change.
2-1-1-9_2
b Powershift Machines - select the required gear

using gear select switch E. K Fig 180. ( T 129).
5-2-3-3
128
9821/1300-1
128
Operation
!MWARNING

While the machine is travelling slowly, check the

steering and brakes. Do not drive the machine
unless the steering and brakes are working
correctly. If you are not sure, assume they are
faulty.
2-2-2-4_2
!MWARNING
Travelling at High Speeds

Travelling at high speeds can cause accidents. Do not
reverse in a high gear with full throttle. Always travel
at a safe speed to suit working conditions.
es
INT-5-3-3
Select Forward or Reverse and move off

a
Check that the attachments are in one of their

travel positions.
b Push the brake pedal(s) D hard down

c
Lift the forward/reverse lever E from its detent

position and select forward or reverse.
ic
T007300-2
rv
Note: When forward or reverse drive is selected, an

audible alarm will sound and a warning light will show to
remind you that the park brake is still engaged.
Se
d Release the park brake F.
!MWARNING

2-2-2-2
Make sure it is safe to move off, then release the

brake pedals and push down on the accelerator
pedal. The machine will move smoothly away.
!MWARNING
Engine/Steering Failure
If the engine or steering fails, stop the machine as
quickly as possible. Do not operate the machine until
the fault has been corrected.
INT-2-1-5
129
Fig 181. Easy Controls / Advanced Easy Controls
9821/1300-1
129
Operation
Stopping and Parking the Machine

Stop the machine on dry and level ground where the
machine will not be a hazard or danger. It is recommended
that the backhoe is extended when parking, make sure
there is enough room.
Lower the loader arms and backhoe assembly to the

ground. It is recommended that the backhoe is
positioned with the bucket fully open, boom and
dipper fully extended. K Fig 182. ( T 130).
Parking
An incorrectly parked machine can move without an
operator. Follow the instructions in the Operator
Manual to park the machine correctly.
INT-2-2-4_2
es
!MWARNING
Fig 182.
Ease up on the accelerator pedal A and down on the

brake pedals B to bring the machine to a smooth stop.
Keep the foot brakes on until the park brake has been
pulled on.
!MCAUTION
It is recommended that turbocharged engines are run

at 1000 RPM (approximately) and reduced load for 2
- 3 minutes before shut down. This will allow the
turbocharger to cool.
If you are leaving the machine, make sure that all
switches are set to off. If necessary, leave the hazard
warning and/or side lights switched on. Remove the
starter key D.
rv
The park brake must not be used to slow the machine

from travelling speed, except in an emergency,
otherwise the efficiency of the brake will be reduced.
Whenever the park brake has been used in an
emergency, always renew both brake pads.
4-2-1-1_2
Pull the park brake lever C fully up. Make sure that the
park brake indicator lights up. Release the foot
brakes.
E
B
Se
ic
!MWARNING
C
D
Do not dismount a moving machine.

3-2-3-12
Set the forward/reverse lever E to neutral. Make sure

the lever is in its detent position.
Lower the stabiliser legs until they just touch the

ground.
!MDANGER

T039550-39
2-2-3-4
130
9821/1300-1
130
Operation
E
B
A
C
Use the handholds and step when you climb down

from the machine. If you are leaving the machine,
close and latch all windows and lock both doors.
Make sure that the filler cap is locked on.
!MWARNING
rv
ic
Fig 184. Easy Controls / Advanced Easy Controls
es
INT-2-1-7_1
At the end of a working cycle or if the machine is

being left unattended, provided the lights are not
required remove the battery isolator key (if fitted).
K Battery Isolator (If Fitted) ( T 217).
Se
Entering/Leaving
Entering or leaving the cab or canopy must only be
made where steps and handrails are provided. Always
face the machine when entering and leaving. Make
sure the step(s), handrails and your boot soles are
clean and dry. Do not jump from the machine. Do not
use the machine controls as handholds, use the
handrails.
131
9821/1300-1
131
Operation
Working With The Machine
This section explains some techniques and procedures for

efficient and safe use of the machine and its attachments.
Attention is also drawn to the various safety aspects of
operating on site.
Read and understand this section before you start working
with the machine.
Make sure that you have had adequate training and that
you are confident in your ability to operate the machine
safely before you use it. Practice using the machine and its
attachments until you are completely familiar with the
controls and what they do.
With a careful, well trained and experienced operator, your
machine is a safe and efficient machine. With an
inexperienced or careless operator, it can be dangerous.
Do not put your life, or the lives of others, at risk by using
the machine irresponsibly.
The information in this section is given in good faith and in

light of the best information available, JCB can accept no
responsibility for the recommendations, advice,
statements, opinions and conclusions expressly or by
implication and gives no warranty or representation of
assurance in respect of the accuracy of the same.
Remember that your machine is mobile. Whenever
possible, manoeuvre it into a position which combines
safety and efficiency. But if you have to choose, always
remember that: Safety must come first.
Clothing and Safety Equipment
T2-069
Do not wear loose clothing or jewellery that can get caught

on controls or moving parts. Wear protective clothing and
personal safety equipment issued or called for by the job
conditions, local regulations or as specified by your
employer.
rv
Before you start to work, tell your work mates what you will
be doing and where you will be working. On a busy site,
use a signalman.
applicability of these notes must be determined by the

person seeking to apply them, on the basis of his/her own
judgement, in the light of the conditions in which use is
intended and subject to all relevant statutory requirements.
es
T2-057_2
ic
Operating Practices and Site Safety
Danger Zone
Restricted areas
T2-046
The danger zone is the circular area around the machine

where the moving parts can reach. During operation of the
machine, keep all persons out of the danger zone. Persons
in the danger zone could be injured. Refer to
Specifications.
Se
Appropriate job site organisation is required in order to

minimise hazards that are caused by restricted visibility.
Job site organisation is a collection of rules and
procedures that coordinates machines and people that
work together in the same area. Examples of job site
organisation include:
Log Moving/Handling
Controlled patterns of machine movement

A system of communication
You and/or your company could be legally liable for any

damage you may cause to public utilities. It is your
responsibility to make sure that you know the locations of
any public utility cables or pipes on the site which could be
damaged by your machine.
T2-047
Do not use the machine to move or handle logs unless it

has been fitted with adequate log protection. You could
cause serious injury to yourself and damage the machine.
Contact your JCB dealer.
Before doing any job not covered in this manual, find out
the correct procedure. Your local JCB distributor will be
glad to advise you.
There are a wide variety of situations in which your
machine may be used. Consequently, in all cases, the
132
9821/1300-1
132
Operation
!MWARNING
Safety Practices
P2-2019_3
Reworking Old Sites

There could be dangerous materials such as
asbestos, poisonous chemicals or other harmful
substances buried on the site. If you uncover any
containers or you see any signs of toxic waste, stop
the machine and advise the site manager immediately.
2-2-5-5
!MWARNING
Water Supplies and Drains
local public water supplier if there are buried pipes
and drains on the site. If there are, obtain a map of their
locations and follow the advice given by the water
supplier.
2-2-5-6
Fibre Optic Cables

If you cut through a fibre optic cable, Do not look into
the end of it, your eyes could be permanently
damaged.
Older gas pipes can be damaged by heavy vehicles

driving over the ground above them.
Leaking gas is highly explosive.
If a gas leak is suspected, contact the local gas

company immediately and warn all personnel on the
site. Ban smoking, ensure that all naked lights are
extinguished and switch off any engines which may be
running.
regulations concerning work near buried gas pipes.
2-2-6-1_1
8-2-9-20
Hand dig trial holes to obtain precise pipe locations.

Any cast iron pipes found should be assumed to be
gas pipes until contrary evidence is obtained.
Se
!MWARNING
Some modern gas pipes cannot be detected by metal

detectors, so it is essential that an accurate map of
buried gas pipes is obtained before any excavation
work commences.
rv

regulations concerning work near buried pipes and
drains.
If there are buried gas pipes we recommend that you

ask the gas company for any specific advice regarding
the way you should work on the site.
es
!MWARNING
Underground Gas Pipes

local gas company if there are any buried gas pipes on
the site.
ic
Read Operating Safety (Introduction Section), plus the

following information.
133
9821/1300-1
133
Operation
Working With The Loader

Introduction
P2-2015
To use the JCB Backhoe Loader efficiently and safely you

must know the machine and have the skill to use it. This
manual instructs you on the machine, its controls and its
safe operation. It is not a training manual on the art of
loading. If you are a new operator, get yourself trained in
the skills of using a JCB Backhoe Loader before trying to
work with it. If you don't, you will not do your job well, and
es
Remember that you will be driving the machine while you

are using the loader. Keep alert for bystanders and
possible hazards. Stay in the correct driving position. Keep
your seat belt fastened.
Keep the loader shovel low to the ground when travelling.

This increases your visibility and makes the machine more
stable.
rv
Whenever possible, travel in reverse when you are

carrying a loaded shovel downhill. Travel forward when
you are going uphill. With heavily loaded shovels, do not
travel faster than 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.).
ic
When working with the loader, set the backhoe straight

behind the machine, as for road travel.
812080
Fig 185.
Se
If Smooth Ride System is fitted and selected ON the loader

can not power down. For duties other than light handling
the system should be selected OFF.
!MWARNING
Do not attempt to use the lugs on the top of a loader

shovel for lifting equipment, towing or using as tie
down points. The lugs have not been designed for
these purposes.
2-4-5-8
Loader shovels without forks fitted, lugs A must not be

used for lifting, towing or tie down points under any
circumstances.
134
9821/1300-1
134
Operation
Filling the Loader Shovel
Loading a Truck
T2-004_2
2-2-6-3
On hard surfaces, select Float. As the shovel enters the

pile, start rolling the shovel back while raising it at the same
time. This will sweep the shovel up the pile, gathering
material as it goes.
When entering a stockpile, pressing the hydraulic flow rate
selector switch to LO will give more tractive force to the
loader.
Pressing the transmission dump switch will give more
power to the loader and speed the operation. Try to fill the
shovel in one pass. Half full shovels are less productive.
When moving the load, roll the shovel right back to prevent
spillage.
Move your machine as close as possible to the truck

before unloading.
If the truck body is about as long as a shovel's width, tip the
load into the centre of the truck. If the truck is two shovelwidths long or more, load the front of the truck first.
Do not dump the material in one sudden movement. Roll
the shovel forward in stages until it is empty. Use the
control lever to rock the shovel back and forth to loosen
any sticky material.
rv
When you are loading from a pile of loose material, start at

the bottom and follow up the face as shown. Approach the
pile with the shovel level and skimming the ground.
Keep the wind on your back. This keeps dust away from
you and your machine.
es
When loading with material from a high bank or pile,

remove any overhang first. Watch out for sliding
material. If overhanging material falls, you and your
machine could be buried.
ic
!MWARNING
Put the truck(s) at an angle of about 45 to the pile, as

shown. This cuts out unnecessary manoeuvring. Allow
enough distance for the shovel to reach its unloading
height while you are travelling, without slowing down.
Se
In tightly packed material, start at the top and work down.
When removing material from a stockpile, start at a

shovel's height from the base. Once the height of the
stockpile has been reduced, begin loading from the base.
135
145500-2
Fig 187.
145491-1
Fig 186.
9821/1300-1
135
Operation
!MDANGER
P2-2025
Factors affecting machine stability include size and

type of load, angle of elevation, the distance the boom
is extended, ground condition and wind speed and
direction.
It is the responsibility of the operator to assess the
wind conditions and size of load before operating the
machine.
It is the responsibility of the operator to assess the
terrain, surface roughness, firmness of ground
(remember that when wet, the ground will not support
the same loads as when dry) before operating the
machine.
and that the operator is satisfied that no part of the

operation is outside the scope of his/her training and
experience.
Traffic routes should be of consolidated firm ground with
no gradient more severe than the following:
Maximum up slope :
15% (1 in 7)
Maximum down slope:
15% (1 in 7)
Maximum lateral slope:
15% (1 in 7)
These figures apply only to the machine in it's normal

travelling mode, that is with the upper surface of the heels
of the fork arms not more than 500mm (20in) above mean
ground level, and travelling no faster than walking pace.
Particularly in the case of a lateral slope, some form of
restraint on the load may be necessary.
es
Risk Assessment
0074
Observe the maximum wading depth of this machine.

Water can enter the engine and axles, and the cooling fan
can be damaged if the machine is operated in deeper
water.
ic
It is the responsibility of the competent people planning the

job and operating the machine to make judgement as to
the safe use of the machine, having taken into account the
specific application and conditions of use at the time.
Personnel
rv
It is essential that a risk assessment of the work to be done

is completed and that the operator complies with any
safety precautions that the assessment identifies.
Is supervision needed? Is the supervisor adequately

trained and experienced?
Se
If you are unsure of the suitability of the machine for a

specific task, contact your JCB distributor who will be
pleased to advise you.
Are all persons who are going to take part in the

operation adequately trained, experienced and
competent? Are they fit and adequately rested? A
sick or tired operator is a dangerous operator.
The following considerations are intended as suggestions

of some of the factors to be taken into account when
making a risk assessment. Other factors may need to be
considered.
Important: An adequate risk assessment depends on the
training and experience of the operator. Do not put your life
or the lives of others at risk.
General
The machine
Is it in good working order?
Have any reported defects been rectified?
Have the daily checks been carried out?
Are the tyres still at the correct pressure and in good
condition and is there sufficient fuel to complete the
job?
An area selected as a loading/unloading area should be

large enough to accommodate all the wheels of the
machine and stabilisers (if fitted). It should not be
necessary for the machine to make tight turns with an
elevated load.
As well as the machine operator, are any assistants or

lookouts needed?
However, your machine may safely be used for loading/

unloading operations in areas which are not substantially
level provided that its design capabilities are not exceeded
136
9821/1300-1
136
Operation
Lifting and Loading Operations
The load
P5-2067
How heavy is it? Is it within the capabilities of the

machine?
How bulky is it? The greater the surface area, the
more affected it will be by wind speeds.
Is it an awkward shape? How is the weight
distributed? Uneven loads are more difficult to
handle.
Ensure that all local and national legislation governing

operations such as lifting and loading are fully satisfied
before operating the machine. This should include the
selection of the correct model of machine for the operation,
and the planning of the lifting operation itself.
Is there a possibility of the load shifting whilst being

moved? If so, can it be secured on the forks?
es
Loading/unloading area
Is it level? Any gradient of more than 2.5% (1 in 40)
should be carefully considered.
Is the ground firm? Will it support the weight of the

machine when loaded?
How rough is the ground? Are there any sharp
projections which could cause damage, particularly to
the tyres?
rv
Are there any obstacles or hazards in the vicinity, for

example, debris, excavations, man-hole covers,
power lines?
ic
Is more than one direction of approach to the load

possible? Approaching across the gradient should be
avoided, if possible.
Is the space adequate for safe manoeuvring?
Se
Are any other vehicles or persons likely to be in or to

enter the area whilst operations are in progress?
The route to be traversed
How firm is the ground, will it provide adequate

traction and braking?
How steep are any gradients, up/down/across? Cross

gradients are particularly hazardous, is it possible to
detour to avoid them?
Weather
How windy is it? High wind will adversely affect the

stability of a loaded machine, particularly if the load is
bulky.
Is it raining or is rain likely? The ground that was firm

and smooth when dry will become uneven and
slippery when wet, and it will not offer the same
conditions for traction, steering or braking.
137
9821/1300-1
137
Operation
Working With The Backhoe

Introduction
!MWARNING
P2-2020
Before you start using the excavator, you must

convert the machine into a safe and stable working
platform. See Preparing to Use the Backhoe
(Operation Section) for details.
2-2-6-4_2
ic
rv
If you will be working with a labourer, make sure you both

understand what each other will be doing. Learn and use
the recognised signalling procedures. Do not rely on
shouting - he will not hear you.
es
To use the JCB Backhoe Loader efficiently and safely you

must know the machine and have the skill to use it. This
manual instructs you on the machine, its controls and its
safe operation. It is not a training manual on the art of
excavating. If you are a new operator, get yourself trained
in the skills of using a JCB Backhoe Loader before trying
to work with it. If you don't, you will not do your job well, and
Make sure the correct bucket for the job is fitted.

Instructions for removing and installing buckets are given
on the following pages.
Se
For the best fuel economy when using the backhoe, keep
the tachometer pointer in the green band. Refer to
Instruments, Side Console.
138
9821/1300-1
138
Operation
Preparing to Use the Backhoe
P2-2021_2
When choosing a digging position, avoid digging downhill

if possible. Whenever possible, dump the load on the uphill
side of the excavation. Both these precautions will help to
keep the machine stable.
1
When the machine is in the desired position on the

site, roll the shovel forward, then lower it to take the
weight off the front tyres.
es
If Smooth Ride System is fitted, switch OFF the

system then lower the shovel in order to take the
weight off the front tyres.
!MWARNING
The machine will drop suddenly if the Smooth Ride
System is selected ON when the machine is supported
on the loader shovel.
763520-5
Fig 188.
rv
Note: On tarmac surfaces, do not roll the shovel fully

forward. Keep the bottom of the shovel flat on the ground.
This will minimise damage to the surface. When a
Clamshovel is fitted, do not put weight on the fork carriers.
ic
2-2-6-9
Set the transmission to the neutral position. Make

sure the lever is in its detent position.
Engage the park brake.
Turn the seat to face the backhoe. Make sure the seat
locks in position.
Then lower the stabilisers to raise the rear tyres just

clear of the ground. Adjust the stabiliser positions until
the machine is level. K Fig 188. ( T 139).
Se
In soft ground, put heavy duty planks beneath the

stabilisers. This will spread the weight and prevent
sinking.
139
9821/1300-1
139
Operation
Kingpost Clamps
On sideshift machines only, the kingpost assembly must
be clamped to the cross rails before starting any
excavation work.
For detailed instructions on how to move the kingpost and
backhoe assembly across the rails. K Sideshifting The
Backhoe ( T 144).
Release Clamps
es
To release the clamps, press switch B on, switch light

illuminated.
Tighten Clamps
rv
ic
To enable the clamps to tighten, press switch B off.
T039550-55
Se
Fig 189.
140
9821/1300-1
140
Operation
Repositioning the Adjustable Tipping Lever
!MWARNING
P2-2022
or injured.
B-2-1-8
es
On some machines the bucket tipping lever can be set to

give either maximum force or maximum rotation of the
bucket.
Note: When using the JCB Hitchmaster that is fitted with a

cover plate D, the tipping link pivot pin must only be fitted
in the maximum rotation position shown at B. Using the
maximum tearout position, shown at A, will result in
damage to either the cover plate or the tipping link.
Position the backhoe, set the backhoe straight behind
the machine. Rest the bucket on the ground with the
dipper positioned. K Fig 190. ( T 141).
Uncouple the lever, remove the nut and bolt which

secure the tipping lever C to pivot pin B. Remove the
pivot pin.
Reposition the tipping lever, operate the bucket ram

to line the link up exactly with the other pair of holes
in the tipping lever.
Se
768520-2
Fig 190.
Refit the pivot pin, once the lever and link are lined up,
carefully insert the pivot pin, making sure it is the right
way round. Secure the pin with the nut and bolt.
rv
ic
The two possible positions of the lever are shown at A

(maximum tearout force) and B (maximum rotation).
141
260460-1
Fig 191. JCB Hitchmaster
9821/1300-1
141
Operation
Changing a Bucket
!MWARNING
P2-2023_2
or injured.
B-2-1-8
Removing a Bucket
Position the backhoe, set the backhoe straight behind
the machine. Rest the bucket on level ground, with
the bucket flat as shown. Block the bucket to prevent
its movement.
es
Stand clear and to one side of the bucket while you

remove the pivot pins. With the pins removed, the
bucket could roll over.
2-2-6-6
Remove the pivot pins, unclip and remove the tipping

lever lynch pin A and spacer B. Remove the pivot pin
C. Then remove the dipper pivot lynch pin D, spacer
E and pivot pin F.
Withdraw the dipper, using the controls, carefully lift

the dipper clear of the bucket.
Se
rv
ic
!MWARNING
Installing a Bucket
Position the bucket, set the bucket flat on level ground

as shown, using a suitable lifting device.
Reverse the machine while aligning the dipper end

with the bucket hinge area.
Engage the dipper, carefully operate the controls to

line up the holes in the dipper and tipping link with the
holes in the bucket. Fit the pivot pin F. Fit the spacer
E and the lynch pin D. After the dipper pivot pin has
been locked in, fit the tipping link pivot pin C, spacer
B and lynch pin A.
142
763530-1
Fig 192.
9821/1300-1
142
Operation
Digging
P2-2001
To start the dig, reach out with the boom and dipper and
position the bucket. K Fig 193. ( T 143).
es
Fig 195.
Note: Do not use the side of the excavation to stop the
bucket. This could damage the machine.
Fig 193.
Se
rv
When the bucket is full, close it fully and at the same time
move the dipper out a little way. K Fig 194. ( T 143). This
will keep soil from building up under the machine.
ic
Slowly close the bucket and at the same time bring the
dipper in. Make sure the bucket stays at the same angle to
the ground while it travels. If necessary, at the same time
apply a downward pressure on the boom, to increase the
digging force on the bucket.
Backfill the excavation by loading the bucket with soil from

the pile. Do not push the soil with the side of the bucket.
Fig 194.
Swing the bucket towards the dump area.

K Fig 195. ( T 143). Start dumping as the bucket
approaches the pile. Do not waste time by dumping too far
from the excavation. Dump close to the start dig position.
Swing the bucket back to the excavation and start the next
dig.
143
9821/1300-1
143
Operation
Sideshifting The Backhoe
backhoe, move the bucket control lever to fully crowd the

bucket, hold the lever in this position for a minimum of five
seconds (engine at 1500 r.p.m.).
Manual Sideshift
Use the stabilisers to set the machine level and

stable, with the kingpost A vertical.
Rest the bucket on the ground, straight behind the

machine.
Release the clamps, press the rocker switch B to the

'ON' position, the switch light should be illuminated.
rv
ic
es
Note: Before sideshifting the backhoe, make sure that the

kingpost rails are clear of debris.
208710-6
Se
Fig 196.
Loosen the kingpost on its rails, operate the boom up

and down a few times.
Raise and slew the backhoe directly to one side of the

machine. Slew to the left if you want to sideshift to the
right. Slew to the right if you want to sideshift to the
left. Set the bucket on the ground, with the dipper at
90 to the boom as shown.
Open the bucket. As the bucket opens, the kingpost

will be pushed across the back of the machine. If the
kingpost A sticks in mid-travel, raise or lower the
boom slightly to keep the kingpost vertical to the rails.
Once the kingpost is in the required position, tighten

the clamps by pressing rocker switch B to the 'OFF'
position.
Note: Pressure generated in the backhoe services will

ensure the clamps fully engage. Before operating the
144
9821/1300-1
144
Operation
Powered Sideshift (Manual Controls)
kingpost rails are clear of debris and wear pads are
greased.
stable.
Empty the bucket, then slew the backhoe to the rear

of the machine. K Fig 197. ( T 145).
Release the clamps by pressing the rocker switch B

to the 'ON' position, the switch light should be
illuminated and a warning buzzer will sound.
C
D
es
!MWARNING
Keep all people clear of the area before operating this

service.
2-2-7-13
T039550-56
Retract the boom E so that the bucket is clear of the

ground.
Note: If the backhoe is slow or difficult to sideshift, position

the backhoe in the central protruding position and lower
the bucket to take the weight off the carriage E then raise
the bucket to the original position. This action will release
the carriage which can stick if locked in one position for a
long time.
rv

and down a few times A.
ic
Fig 198.
Se
Once the carriage is in the required position, tighten

position. The switch light should be extinguished and
the warning buzzer silent.

Fig 197.
Sideshift the backhoe. Operate the foot pedal Toe end

to sideshift right C and heel to sideshift left D.
145
9821/1300-1
145
Operation
Powered Sideshift (Easy Controls)

greased.
stable.
Empty the bucket, then slew the backhoe to the rear


B
D
es
!MWARNING
T039550-57
Fig 200.
2-2-7-13

Retract the boom E so that the bucket is clear of the

ground.

rv

the bucket to take the weight off the carriage E then raise
the bucket to the original position. This action will release
long time.
ic

service.
Se

Fig 199.
Sideshift the backhoe.Operate the right hand joystick

thumb switch. To sideshift right C push switch to the
right and to sideshift left D push the switch to the left.
146
9821/1300-1
146
Operation
6
Retract the boom E so that the shovel is clear of the

ground.

greased.
Enable excavator auxiliary services with rocker

switch F.
Press and release the servo enable switch G, the

lights on the top of both joysticks will illuminate.
Operate the right hand joystick thumb switch to

sideshift the backhoe. To sideshift right C push switch
to the right and to sideshift left D push the switch to
the left.
Make sure the seat is locked in the rear facing

position. The excavator auxiliary roller switch can not
be operated with the seat locked in the forward facing
position.
Use the stabilizers to set the machine level and

stable.
Empty the shovel, then slew the backhoe to the rear

es
Powered Sideshift (Advanced Easy Controls)
ic
Se
rv
Fig 201.

!MWARNING
774170-4
Fig 202.

the shovel to take the weight off the carriage E then raise
the shovel to the original position. This action will release
long time.
10

service.

2-2-7-13

147

backhoe, move the shovel control lever to fully crowd the
shovel, hold the lever in this position for a minimum of five
9821/1300-1
147
Operation
b When the backhoe is shifted to one side (sideshift
machines only), take care when slewing to that
side. Slew the backhoe slowly, to prevent any
chance of the machine becoming unstable. For
the same reason, avoid dumping downhill if
possible.
Using the Extending Dipper

Manual Controls
The extending dipper gives you greater reach for digging
and dumping. Before it can be used, the extending dipper
must be unlocked.
c
1
Rest the bucket on the ground and reposition the

dipper securing pins as follows:
a
Pull out the pin locking clip E.
es
b Lift the pin up as far as the second locking hole.

Insert the locking clip E into hole as shown at B.
Se
rv
ic
Do not extend or retract the dipper while you are

tearing out material.
211531-2
Fig 203.
Fig 204.
!MCAUTION
Fully retract and lock the extending dipper when

Extradig is not required or if an attachment other than
a bucket is fitted.
2-2-8-1
Use the foot-operated pedal and extend C the dipper

to the required reach or depth. Extend or retract D the
dipper as required for dumping.
Raise the bucket clear of the ground before operating

the extending dipper.
148
Fully retract the extending dipper.
b Pull out locking pin E.
When using the dipper fully extended, take the

following precautions. Otherwise the machine could
become unstable or be damaged.
When not required, the dipper must be retracted and

locked as follows.
Make sure that you do not exceed the working

capacity of the backhoe at maximum reach.
9821/1300-1
Push the securing pin down as far as it will go.
d Insert the locking pin E into the hole as shown at

A.
148
Operation
7

must be unlocked.
1

position.
Pull
out
the
pin
K Fig 205. ( T 149).
locking
clip
E.
c
c


possible.
Rest the bucket on the ground and reposition the

a

es
Easy Controls

ic
rv
Se
211531-2
Fig 205.
Press the switch F to change between loader clam

and excavator. K Fig 206. ( T 149).

Raise the bucket clear of the ground before operating

795070-8
Fig 206.
Push the right hand control lever switch to the right C

to extend the dipper to the required reach or depth.
Push the switch to the left D to retract the dipper as
required for dumping.
149
9821/1300-1
149
Operation
!MCAUTION
a bucket is fitted.
2-2-8-1

locked as follows.
a
es
b Pull out locking pin E. K Fig 205. ( T 149).

Se
rv
ic

A.
150
9821/1300-1
150
Operation
depth. Push the thumb switch to the left D to retract

the dipper as required for dumping.

must be unlocked.
To isolate the thumb switch, press rocker switch F to

the centre position.

position.

Rest the shovel on the ground and reposition the


possible.
Pull out the pin locking clip E.

c

ic
es

rv
Se
211531-2
Fig 207.

switch F.

Raise the shovel clear of the ground before operating

795070-9
Push the right hand control lever thumb switch to the

right C to extend the dipper to the required reach or
151
9821/1300-1
Fig 208.
151
Operation
!MCAUTION
a bucket is fitted.
2-2-8-1

locked as follows.
a
es
b Pull out locking pin E.

Se
rv
ic

A.
152
9821/1300-1
152
Operation
Using the Knuckle Boom
Manual Controls
The knuckle boom permits the dipper to be pivoted up to

30 degrees each side of the centre line. With a knuckle
boom you can, for example, dig around obstacles without
moving the machine.
Raise the bucket.
With the seat facing the rear, use the foot operated
pedal (toe) A to pivot left and (heel) B to pivot right.
es
ic
Se
rv
Fig 210.
Fig 209.
153
9821/1300-1
153
Operation
Easy Controls

moving the machine.
Press rocker switch A to change between loader clam

and excavator.
Press and release the servo enable switch B, the

K Fig 212. ( T 154).
Raise the bucket.
Push the right hand control lever switch to the left to

pivot left C and right to pivot to the right D.
es

position.
795080-9
Fig 212.
Se
rv
ic
Fig 211.
154
9821/1300-1
154
Operation
B
moving the machine.
position.
Press and release the servo enable switch B, the

Raise the bucket.
Push the right hand control lever thumb switch to the

left to pivot left C and right to pivot to the right D.
To isolate the control lever thumb switch, press rocker

switch F to the centre position.
es

switch F.
795080-10
Fig 214.
Se
rv
ic
155
Fig 213.
9821/1300-1
155
Operation
Lifting (Object Handling)

Introduction
Key
Table 4.
K Fig 215. ( T 156).
Lifting Shackle.
Load Charts. K Load Charts ( T 158).
Overload Warning switch. K Overload

Override Warning Switch ( T 159).
Hose Burst Protection Valve (HBPV).

Refer to Routine Maintenance, Hose
Burst Protection Valves (If fitted).
(1)
!MWARNING
Do not use the machine for object handling unless it is
equipped for this purpose. Without the relevant
devices the machine can become unstable and tip
over. You and others could be seriously injured or
killed
8-2-8-19_2
!MWARNING
es
(1) For load charts for specific machines, refer to Load

Charts, Specifications Section.
Before you lift a load with the excavator, you must read
and understand this section. Failure to take the
precautions shown can result in death or injury.
Before using this machine for lifting, refer to

Specifications, Lifting (Object Handling) Regulations
and Safe Working Loads.
Se
The kit comprises:
rv
Your machine may be used for object handling if it has

been fitted with an approved lifting point such as a hook /
shackle or hose burst check valve, if it has been tested,
plated and certified for its safe working load, and if all other
regulation requirements have been met (consult your JCB
distributor). If your machine is not fitted with this equipment
you must use the machine for earthmoving purposes only.
ic
2-2-7-38
3
2
8 1 7 /2 0 0 8 2
T032730-10
Fig 215. Object Handling kit
156
9821/1300-1
156
Operation
Lifting With the Backhoe
Open the bucket to adjust the height accurately.
P2-2017_4
d Lower the load by bringing the dipper in.
Note: Use a signalman when lifting with the excavator.

Make sure you both understand and use the recognized
signals. Keep all persons clear of the load and machine
while the load is on the excavator.
!MWARNING
Make sure you know the weight of the load before
lifting or placing it.
es
Do not exceed the Safe Working Load of your

machine. Do not exceed the limits shown on the Load
Charts.
5-2-4-8_2
A bucket should be fitted when lifting with the

excavator. Check that the load is not greater than the
safe working load for the bucket.
!MWARNING
rv
Do not lift objects with the Backhoe in the 'tucked-in

travel position'. If the slew lock fails, then the boom
could fall and cause death or injury.
2-2-7-39
Position the machine. Refer to Preparing to Use the

Backhoe.
212630-3
Fig 216.
Attach the lifting chains to the shackle. Keep the chain

length as short as possible, to prevent swinging.
Se
ic
Important: Always use lifting tackle which is strong

enough and in good condition. Check the load weight
before choosing the lifting chains.
Attach a handline to the load. Make sure the person

holding the handline stands clear of the load and
machine.
Test the load by lifting it 25-50 mm (one or two inches)

and slowly manoeuvring it across the ground with the
excavator controls. Lower the load to the ground if
you feel any instability - of the load or the machine.
Start the lift with the bucket closed. Set the dipper
in close to the boom.
b Open the bucket (slowly) to bring the load up and

out. Then swing the dipper out to raise the load.
157
9821/1300-1
157
Operation
Load Charts
Introduction
The Safe Working Load (SWL) of the machine depends on
how far the boom is extended and the angle it is raised to.
K Safe Working Loads ( T 303).
Lifting operations must be carried out using the load charts
in the cab. The load charts refer to lift capacities relevant
to the machine specification when equipped with an
approved JCB tipping link, shackle and bucket ram.
Weights of buckets, slings and auxiliary devices must be
deducted from these capacities. Care must be taken to
ensure that these loads are not exceeded. K Load
Charts ( T 306).
es
Important: If a load chart is not provided in the cab the

machine is not designed for lifting.
817
/2 0 0
82
5-2-4-2
Using the Load Chart
Se
The load chart B is only fitted to machines with the object

handling kit, it is located on the right hand switch panel.
The chart shows how far you can raise and extend a load
without exceeding the safe working load. Each machine
model has its own specific load chart. K Fig 217. ( T 158).
The relevant load chart for your machine contains a part

number C, if the chart is missing or damaged, a new decal
must be fitted, refer to Load Charts, Specification
Section. Contact your dealer for advice if you are not sure.
158
T032730-11
Fig 217.
rv
The Load Chart shown is only an example. Do not use

it to find the loading limits on your machine. Before
lifting or placing loads, refer to the Load Charts in the
cab of your machine.
ic
!MCAUTION
8 1 7 /2 0 0 8 2
A B
D
T032730-2
Fig 218. Example European Specification
Table 5.
Excavator Straight back
Excavator Central position swung to side
Excavator Sideshift position swung to side
Safe working load
Warning Stability Hazard
Distance of Bucket pivot from Slew centre (metres)
Weight to be lifted (kgs)
9821/1300-1
158
Operation
Getting the Machine Unstuck
P2-2024
If the machine gets stuck in the trench, use the shovel to

free it: set the drive in neutral, then roll the shovel forward
as shown.
Then select shovel Lower to raise the front wheels. When
the front wheels are free, slowly roll the shovel back, to
push the machine backwards. When the front wheels are
on firm ground, select reverse and drive clear.
8 1 7 /2 0 0 8 2
es
T033660
Fig 219. Example Non European Specification

Note: Refer to Object handling lift charts for correct chart
for machine specification (Specifications section).
145411
Fig 220.
Se
rv
The overload warning switch A is only fitted to machines

with the object handling kit, it is located on the right hand
switch panel. The overload override warning switch must
be switched OFF when lifting. Otherwise the alarm will
activate during digging operations giving nuisance alarms.
K Fig 217. ( T 158).
ic
Overload Override Warning Switch
159
9821/1300-1
159
Operation
Operating Environment
Operating Environment
Operating in Low Temperatures
Check the fan belt regularly.
Check the air vents. Make sure that the air vents to
and from the engine compartment are not blocked.
Check the engine pre-cleaner regularly (if fitted).
Check the battery electrolyte level.
T3-069_2
In low temperature situations, take the following

precautions. They will make for easier starting and prevent
possible damage to your machine.
1
Use the correct viscosity engine lubricating oil.
If available use a low temperature diesel fuel.
Use the correct coolant mixture.
Keep the battery at full charge.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each work period. This
will help to prevent condensation forming on the tank
walls.
Install a cold weather starting aid. In very low

temperatures, -18C (0F) and below, additional
starting aids may be needed. Examples are fuel, oil
and coolant heaters. Ask your JCB distributor for
advice.
Operating in Coastal Regions

1
After daily operations, wash the machine thoroughly

and take special care when cleaning the electrical
devices and hydraulic cylinders to prevent salt entry
and eventual corrosion.
ic
Protect the machine when not in use. Park the

machine inside a building or cover it with a tarpaulin.
Securely tighten the hydraulic oil tank filler cap to

prevent sand and dust from entering the
hydraulic system.
Operating on Wet or Soft Ground
rv
es
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Areas
Se
Important: Do not connect two batteries in series to give

24 volts for starting as this can cause damage to the
electrical circuits.
Clean the Machine.

Moisture or mud will cause the paint, wiring and
metallic parts to deteriorate. When operating the
machine keep it as dry as possible and regularly
grease the machine.
Remove snow from the engine compartment before

starting otherwise snow could get into the air filter.
Operating in High Temperatures
T3-070
In high temperature situations, take the following

precautions to prevent possible damage to the machine.
Use the correct viscosity engine lubricating oil.
Use the correct coolant mixture.
Check the coolant system regularly, keep the coolant

at the correct level. Make sure there are no leaks.
Keep the radiator/oil cooler clean, regularly remove

dirt and debris from the radiator/oil cooler and the
engine.
160
9821/1300-1
160
Operation
Refuelling the Machine

Low Fuel Levels
Filling the Tank
If you operate the machine on very low fuel levels, then air
can enter the fuel system. To prevent the entry of air,
always add more fuel when the fuel gauge shows a low
level of fuel.
Important: Before you add the fuel to the machine, refer

to Fluids, Lubricants and Capacities, Fuels. If you use
the incorrect type of fuel or fuel which is contaminated,
then damage to the fuel injection system can occur.
If air enters the fuel system, the engine speed will vary
dramatically and low power will be experienced. The
symptoms may be made worse when the machine
operates on steep gradients.
!MCAUTION
GEN-9-2
Note: If you Increase the engine speed or load while there

is air in the fuel system, then subsequent damage to the
engine can occur.
Fuel
rv
Important: You must bleed the fuel system after a fuel

filter change.
!MWARNING
ic
If the fuel supply contains air, you must stop the engine, fill
the fuel tank then bleed the fuel system to remove the air.
Refer to Routine Maintenance, Fuel System.
es
Consult your fuel supplier or JCB distributor about the

suitability of any fuel you are unsure of.
INT-3-2-2_3
!MWARNING
Se
Petrol
Do not use petrol in this machine. Do not mix petrol
with the diesel fuel; in storage tanks the petrol will rise
to the top and form flammable vapours.
INT-3-1-6
161
!MWARNING
Mobile Phones
Switch off your mobile phone before entering an area
with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in
such an area could cause an explosion or fire
resulting in death or serious injury.
Switch off and do not use your mobile phone when
refuelling the machine.
INT-3-3-9
9821/1300-1
161
Operation
!MCAUTION
Spilt fuel may cause skidding and therefore accidents.
Clean any spilt fuel immediately.
Do not use fuel to clean the machine.
When filling with fuel, choose a well aired and
ventilated area.
INT-2-2-12
es
At the end of every working day, fill the tank with the correct
type of fuel. This will prevent overnight condensation from
developing in the fuel.
Important: If fitted the Extreme Cold Climate Heater must
also be switched OFF before filling the tank. K Extreme
Cold Climate Heater Switch (Optional) ( T 65).
Make the Machine safe with the loader arm lowered.
Remove all unwanted material from around the filler

cap A. K Fig 221. ( T 162).
Remove the
Cap ( T 162).
cap
A.
K Removing
the
rv
filler
T033140-1
Fig 221.
ic
Note: The cap A incorporates a side mounted barrel lock

that is operated by the ignition / door key.
Add the fuel through the filler neck, as necessary.
Install the filler cap.
Se
Removing the Cap
Once the key has been removed, the cap will simply rotate
on the filler neck. To remove the cap from the filler neck,
the key must be re-inserted and the cap unlocked.
Note: The key MUST be inserted in the cap when

removing and fitting.
162
9821/1300-1
162
Operation
Moving A Disabled Machine

Towing and Retrieval
Important: Do not tow a machine unless there is no
alternative. Remember that further damage might be
caused to the machine by towing it. If at all possible repair
the machine where it stands. If the machine must be
towed, follow the procedure below.
Wrap the towing slings A around the front axle just inside
the steering linkages, avoid any sharp edges, use rubber
protectors B if necessary. K Fig 222. ( T 163).
Note: Maximum Permissible Towing Force - 154kN.
!MDANGER
es
If the engine is not running, there will not be enough

pressure to apply the service brakes. Carefully follow
the precautions on this page before moving the
machine or there may be a serious accident.
Important: Towing a machine too far or too fast can

damage the transmission or structural members. Do not
tow the machine further than necessary. Move the
machine at a speed of 2mph (3kph) or less to a convenient
location for repair or access to a trailer for transportation.
rv
Important: If towing is the only alternative, one towing

machine must be coupled to the front of the disabled
machine. Another towing machine must be coupled to the
rear of the disabled machine, to provide braking power.
ic
13-2-4-4
Se
Important: Always transport the machine on a suitable

trailer if long distance moving is required.
Before towing, make sure that both towing slings

have the correct strength for the vehicle that is to be
towed, this must be 1.5 times more than the gross
machine weight per sling.
T033440-1
Fig 222.
It is advised to use shielding on both machines to

protect the operators if the tow line breaks.
Keep the tow line angle to a minimum. Do not exceed
a 20 degree angle from the straight ahead position.
Prevent any quick machine movement. This could

overload the tow line, gradual and steady movements
will be required for a safe retrieval.
Make sure that the towing machine has enough

weight, power and braking capacity to perform the
towing procedure safely.
Note: Block the loader arms before attaching the towing

slings.
163
9821/1300-1
163
Operation
Disabled Engine Procedure
Note: All scenarios cannot be listed, due to the vastly

different situations that could occur, dependent on the
problem and the reason for towing. It is advised you
contact your JCB dealer for help and advice on the correct
and safest procedure for machine preparation before
attempting to move the machine.
Note: All scenarios cannot be listed, due to the vastly

different situations that could occur, dependent on the
problem and the reason for towing. It is advised you
contact your JCB dealer for help and advice on the correct
and safest procedure for machine preparation before
attempting to move the machine.
Raise all attachments off the ground.
Set the gear lever to neutral (synchro shuttle

machines only) or forward/reverse lever to neutral on
powershift machines.
All attachments must be raised into their transport

positions and secured, move the appropriate control
lever to the raise position when performing this
procedure. Ensure the control lever is returned to its
neutral position after lifting.
The machine is now ready for towing. Make sure you

understand what the towing driver will be doing. Obey
his instructions and all relevant regulations.
Set the gear lever to neutral (syncro shuttle machines

only) or forward/reverse lever to neutral on powershift
machines.
Release the park brake to allow the machine to move.
The machine is now ready for towing. Make sure you

understand what the towing driver will be doing. Obey
his instructions and all relevant regulations.
Release the park brake to allow the machine to move.
Se
rv
ic
es
Running Engine Procedure
164
9821/1300-1
164
Operation
Lowering a Load
During normal operation, the engine must be running
before a load can be lowered. The following information
describes how to safely and correctly lower a load in the
event of engine failure or a hose burst; we recommend that
only a competent maintenance engineer perform the
procedures.
es
After lowering a load do not use the machine until the

manual over-ride screw has been reset (Loader HBPV) or
a new end cap and valve assembly fitted (Boom HBPV) by
a qualified engineer, otherwise the valve will not operate as
intended.
!MDANGER
2-3-5-3
C097490-C1
Fig 223.
rv
Boom and Dipper Hose Burst Protection Valve

(HBPV)
ic
Do not stand underneath the raised load during the

lowering procedure. Stand clear and to one side until
the load has been safely lowered. Make sure that the
area is clear of other people before lowering the load.
If you do not follow these precautions you or others
could be killed or seriously injured.
Se
The boom and dipper HBPV is not accessible. The boom/

dipper ram pivot pins must be removed. See relevant
Service manual, Section E -Rams.
Loader Hose Burst Protection Valve (HBPV)
Remove cap 1 from both HBPV check valves on the

loader lift arms. K Fig 223. ( T 165).
If a hose has burst, position a suitable container to

catch the oil.
On the burst hose HBPV, insert a 5mm allen key into

the socket head of screw. Turn the allen key in a
clockwise direction so that the screw winds fully in.
Repeat slowly for the opposite side as the load is now
supported on this HBPV.
Note: Count the number of full turns on each screw for

resetting purposes.
4
Operate the control lever in the cab to lower the load.
165
9821/1300-1
165
Operation
Transporting The Machine
es
rv
ic
T001280-2
Fig 224.
Se
!MWARNING
The safe transit of the load is the responsibility of the

transport contractor and driver. Any machine,
attachments or parts that may move during transit
must be adequately secured.
5-2-5-9
Note: Before transporting the machine make sure you will

be obeying the rules and laws of all the areas that the
machine will be carried through.
Make sure that the transporting vehicle is suitable. Refer

to Specifications section, Static Dimensions and
Machine Weight for the relevant information of your
machine.
166
!MWARNING
Before moving the machine onto the trailer, make sure

that the trailer and ramp are free from oil, grease and
ice. Remove oil, grease and ice from the machine
tyres. Make sure the machine will not foul on the ramp
angle. See Static Dimensions in SPECIFICATION
section for the minimum ground clearance of your
machine.
2-2-7-5_1
Place blocks at the front and rear of the trailer wheels.
Make sure the ramps are correctly in place and

secure.
Set the loader shovel and backhoe. K Preparing

The Machine For Travel ( T 122).
Engage the boom and slew locks. K Boom

Lock ( T 112), K Slew Lock ( T 113).
9821/1300-1
166
Operation
5
If the machine has an extendable dipper make sure

that the locking pin is securely in place. K Using the
Extending Dipper ( T 148).
Carefully move the machine onto the trailer.

a
When the machine is safely in position, engage

the park brake and set the drive to neutral.
es
b When the machine is safely in position, engage

the park brake and set the drive to neutral, lower
the loader shovel and backhoe onto the trailer
bed.
On sideshift machines, lower the stabilisers to the
trailer bed and remove the starter key.
d Lock all doors and access panels.

e
Cover the exhaust opening.
Measure the maximum height of the machine from

the ground. Make sure the truck driver knows the
clearance height before he drives away.
Put blocks at the front and rear of all four tyres. Make
sure they are securely in place.
Secure the machine to the trailer bed with chains. Use

the tie down points indicated by the safety decal.
Tension the chain as close to 45 degrees as possible.
K Fig 225. ( T 167).
Se
rv
ic
Note: If for any reason the slew or boom lock cannot be

engaged, then the bucket must be securely lashed to the
trailer bed, if no bucket is fitted, then secure the dipper end
to the trailer bed.
T033270-1
Fig 225.
Note: Refer to safety decal A to identify the correct

positions to secure your machine during transportation.
K Fig 224. ( T 166).
167
9821/1300-1
167
Operation
Lifting A Machine
Lifting A Machine
!MWARNING
Lifting Equipment
You can be injured if you use incorrect or faulty lifting
equipment. You must identify the weight of the item to
be lifted then choose lifting equipment that is strong
enough and suitable for the job. Make sure that lifting
equipment is in good condition and complies with all
local regulations.
es
INT-1-3-7_2
Se
rv
Note: The correct lifting points are marked on the machine

by this decal.
ic
Note: Weights may vary with different attachments,

therefore none standard attachments i.e.: hammer, brush
etc. must be removed before attempting to lift the machine.
Only lift the machine with a standard shovel and bucket
fitted.
T033280
Fig 226.
Remove all attachments (except bucket and shovel)

from the machine.
Position the crane for a level machine lift.
Make sure there are no loose items in the cab or on

the machine. Stow all loose items in a lockable
container.
Use correctly adjusted spreader bars to avoid contact

between the lifting gear and the machine.
K Fig 227. ( T 168).
168
T033430-1
Fig 227.
5
On Sideshift machines make sure that the excavator

carriage is in the centre position.
Set the loader shovel and backhoe. K Preparing

The Machine For Travel ( T 122).
9821/1300-1
168
Operation
Lifting A Machine
Engage the boom and slew locks. K Boom
Lock ( T 112), K Slew Lock ( T 113).
If the machine has an extendable dipper make sure

that the locking pin is securely in place. K Manual
Controls ( T 148).
Engage the Park Brake, Set the gear lever to Neutral
10
Switch OFF the engine, remove the starter key, shut

the doors and windows and vacate the machine.
11
Use correctly rated slings A either side of the front

axle. Use rubber protectors B beneath the axle.
rv
ic
es
T033450
Fig 229. Sideshift machine
b The lifting eyes on Centremount machines.
Se
Note: When using the lifting eyes, suitably rated D links

must be used.
T033440
Fig 228.
For the rear lifting points, use:
12
169
The top of the rear frame on side shift machines.

K Fig 229. ( T 169).
T033460
Fig 230. Centremount machine
9821/1300-1
169
Operation
Lifting A Machine
13
Make sure the area is clear of personnel before

attempting to lift the machine.
14
Lift the machine slightly, check the balance of the

machine.
!MWARNING
es
Raised Machine
NEVER position yourself or any part of your body
under a raised machine which is not properly
supported. If the machine moves unexpectedly you
could become trapped and suffer serious injury or be
killed.
Se
rv
ic
INT-3-3-7_1
170
9821/1300-1
170
Operation
Storage of the Machine

Introduction
Put the Machine into Storage

T2-074
If you will not use the machine for an extended period, you
must store the machine correctly. If you prepare the
machine carefully and apply on-going care you can
prevent deterioration and damage to the machine while it
is in storage.
T2-077
Park the machine on level, solid ground.

Park the machine in a position where the machine is
easy to get access (in case the machine does not
start at the end of the storage period).
Place suitable timbers under the machine to eliminate
direct contact with the ground.
Storage Area
es
Note: JCB Dealers must check stock monthly.
Retract all rams and lower the attachments to the

ground.
-40C to 54C (-40F to 129F).
Vent the hydraulic system.
When possible, you must keep the machine in a dry

building or shelter.
Remove the starter key.
If only an outdoor storage area is available, look for a

storage area with good drainage.
Apply a thin layer of grease or petroleum jelly to all

exposed ram piston rods.
Remove the battery. Charge the battery.
rv
If the machine is to be out of use for an extended period,

careful preparation and on-going care will minimise the
possibility of deterioration and damage while in storage.
ic
The machine can be stored in a temperature range of:
Keep the battery in warm, dry conditions. Charge the

battery periodically.
Prepare the Machine for Storage
If you keep the machine outdoors, cover the machine

with tarpaulins or plastic sheets.
T2-076
Clean the machine to remove all unwanted material

and corrosive products.
Se
Dry the machine to remove solvents and moisture.
Apply grease to the moving parts. Refer to Greasing

the Machine.
Examine the machine for worn or damaged parts.

Replace if necessary.
Examine the coolant condition. Replace if necessary.
Fill the fuel tank to prevent a build up of condensation

in the tank.
Examine all fluid levels. Top up if necessary.
171
During Storage
T2-078
Operate the machine functions each week to prevent a

build up of rust in the engine and hydraulic circuits, and to
minimise deterioration of the hydraulic seals.
1
Clean the machine to remove all unwanted material

and corrosives.
Remove the grease or petroleum jelly from the ram
piston rods.
Install a charged battery.
Start the engine.
9821/1300-1
171
Operation
5
Operate the hydraulic controls.

Make sure that the hydraulic functions operate
correctly.
Prepare the machine for storage. Refer to Put the

Machine into Storage.
Take the Machine Out of Storage

Examine the coolant condition. Replace If necessary
Clean the machine to remove unwanted material and

corrosives.
es
T2-079
Install a charged battery.
Start the engine.
Operate the hydraulic controls.
rv
ic
Remove the grease or petroleum jelly from the ram

piston rods.
Se
Make sure that the hydraulic functions operate

correctly.
172
9821/1300-1
172
Routine Maintenance
Service Requirements
Introduction
Owner/Operator Support
T3-095
JCB together with your Distributor wants you to be

completely satisfied with your new JCB machine. If you do
encounter a problem however, you should contact your
Distributor's Service Department who are there to help
you!
This section of the Manual gives full details of the service

requirements necessary to maintain your JCB machine at
peak efficiency.
To get the most from your Distributor please help them to

satisfy you by:
es
Your machine has been designed and built to give

maximum performance, economy and ease of use under a
wide variety of operating conditions. Prior to delivery, your
machine was inspected both at the Factory and by your
Distributor to ensure that it reaches you in optimum
condition. To maintain this condition and ensure trouble
free operation it is important that the routine services, as
specified in this Manual, are carried out by an approved
JCB Distributor at the recommended intervals.
ic
You will have been given the names of the relevant service
contacts at your Distributor when the machine was
installed.
Giving your name, address and telephone number.
Quoting your machine model and serial number.
Date of purchase and hours of work.
It can be seen from the Service Schedules on the following

pages that many essential service checks should only be
carried out by a JCB trained specialist. Only JCB
Distributor Service Engineers have been trained by JCB to
carry out such specialist tasks, and only JCB Distributor
Service Engineers are equipped with the necessary
special tools and test equipment to perform such tasks,
thoroughly, safely, accurately and efficiently.
Nature of the problem.
JCB regularly updates its Distributors advising them of any

product developments, changes in specifications and
procedures. Therefore only a JCB Distributor is fully able
to maintain and service your machine.
Service/Maintenance Agreements
rv
A Service Manual for your machine is available from your

JCB Distributor. The Service Manual contains information
on how to repair, dismantle and assemble your machine
correctly.
Se
Remember, only your JCB Distributor has access to the

vast resources available at JCB to help support you. In
addition, your Distributor is able to offer a variety of
programmes covering Warranty, Fixed Price Servicing,
Safety Inspections, including weight tests, covering both
legal and insurance requirements.
A Service Record Sheet or Book is provided which will

enable you to plan your service requirements and keep a
service history record. It should be dated, signed and
stamped by your Distributor each time your machine is
serviced.
Remember, if your machine has been correctly
maintained, not only will it give you improved reliability but
its resale value will be greatly enhanced.
173
To help plan and spread the costs of maintaining your

machine, we strongly recommend you take advantage of
the many Service and Maintenance Agreements your
Distributor can offer. These can be tailor made to meet
your operating conditions, work schedule etc.
Please consult your JCB Distributor for details.
Initial Service and Inspection

T3-005_2
To further protect your machine's performance it is

essential your JCB Distributor carries out an initial service
and inspection when the machine is one month old or
when it has completed 100 hours of operation (whichever
9821/1300-1
173
Routine Maintenance
occurs first). You should notify your Distributor in advance
to allow the necessary arrangements to be made.
Fit for Purpose Tests for Lifting

Equipment
T3-097
All lifting equipment (for example forks, lifting hooks and

shackles) need regular inspection and testing by a
competent person to ensure they are fit for purpose.
es
This may be needed every six months or at least annually

in some countries to meet and comply with legislation and
for insurance purposes.
Check with your local JCB distributor for further advice.
Obtaining Replacement Parts
rv
A Parts Book for your machine is available from your JCB

Distributor. The Parts Book will help you identify parts and
order them from your JCB distributor.
ic
T3-096
If you use non-genuine JCB parts or consumables, then

you can compromise the health and safety of the operator
and cause machine failure
Your dealer will need to know the exact model, build and
serial number of your machine. See Identifying Your
Machine (Introduction section).
Se
The data plate also shows the serial numbers of the

engine, transmission and axle(s), where applicable. But
remember if any of these units have been changed, the
serial number on the data plate may be wrong. Check on
the unit itself.
174
9821/1300-1
174
Routine Maintenance
Health and Safety
Health and Safety
T3-060_3
Introduction
It is most important that you read and understand this
information and the publications referred to. Make sure all
your colleagues who are concerned with lubricants read it
too.
Hygiene
JCB lubricants are not a health risk when used properly for
their intended purposes.
However, excessive or prolonged skin contact can remove
the natural fats from your skin, causing dryness and
irritation.
The collection and disposal of used oil should be in

accordance with any local regulations. Never pour used
engine oil into sewers, drains or on the ground.
Handling
!MWARNING
Oil
Oil is toxic. If you swallow any oil, do not induce
vomiting, seek medical advice. Used engine oil
contains harmful contaminants which can cause skin
cancer. Do not handle used engine oil more than
necessary. Always use barrier cream or wear gloves to
prevent skin contact. Wash skin contaminated with oil
thoroughly in warm soapy water. Do not use petrol,
diesel fuel or paraffin to clean your skin.
Low viscosity oils are more likely to do this, so take special

care when handling used oils, which might be diluted with
fuel contamination.
Used Oil
Used engine crankcase lubricants contain harmful

contaminants.
Here are precautions to protect your health when handling
used engine oil:
Always keep lubricants out of the reach of children.
Never store lubricants in open or unlabelled containers.
Waste Disposal
There are no special precautions needed for the handling

or use of new oil, beside the normal care and hygiene
practices.
Se
Storage
New Oil
rv
Whenever you are handling oil products you should

maintain good standards of care and personal and plant
hygiene. For details of these precautions we advise you to
read the relevant publications issued by your local health
authority, plus the following.
ic
INT-3-2-3
!MCAUTION
Avoid prolonged, excessive or repeated skin contact

with used oil.
Apply a barrier cream to the skin before handling

used oil. Note the following when removing engine oil
from skin:
It is illegal to pollute drains, sewers or the ground.

Clean up all spilt fluids and/or lubricants.
Used fluids and/or lubricants, filters and contaminated

materials must be disposed of in accordance with
local regulations. Use authorised waste disposal sites.
INT-3-2-14
All waste products should be disposed of in accordance

with all the relevant regulations.
175
es
Lubricants
9821/1300-1
Wash your skin thoroughly with soap and water.
b Using a nail brush will help.

c
Use special hand cleansers to help clean dirty

hands.
d Never use petrol, diesel fuel, or paraffin for

washing.
175
Routine Maintenance
Health and Safety
3
Avoid skin contact with oil soaked clothing.
Don't keep oily rags in pockets.
Wash dirty clothing before re-use.
Throw away oil-soaked shoes.
First Aid - Oil

Eyes
es
In the case of eye contact, flush with water for 15 minutes.

If irritation persists, get medical attention.
Swallowing
If oil is swallowed do not induce vomiting. Get medical
advice.
In the case of excessive skin contact, wash with soap and

water.
rv
Spillage
ic
Skin
Fires
Se
Absorb with sand or a locally approved brand of absorbent

granules. Scrape up and remove to a chemical disposal
area.
!MWARNING
Do not use water to put out an oil fire. This will only
spread it because oil floats on water.
Extinguish oil and lubricant fires with carbon dioxide,

dry chemical or foam. Fire fighters should use self
contained breathing apparatus.
7-3-1-3_1
176
9821/1300-1
176
Routine Maintenance
Health and Safety
!MCAUTION
Battery
T3-061
Batteries give off an explosive gas. Do not smoke

when handling or working on the battery. Keep the
battery away from sparks and flames.
Battery electrolyte contains sulphuric acid. It can burn
you if it touches your skin or eyes. Wear goggles.
Handle the battery carefully to prevent spillage. Keep
metallic items (watches, rings, zips etc) away from the
battery terminals. Such items could short the
terminals and burn you.
Set all switches to OFF before disconnecting and
connecting the battery. When disconnecting the
battery, take off the earth (-) lead first.
Damaged or spent batteries and any residue from fires

or spillage should be put in a closed acid proof
receptacle and must be disposed of in accordance
with local environmental waste regulations.
INT-3-1-12
!MWARNING
Battery Gases
Batteries give off explosive gases. Keep flames and
sparks away from the battery. Do not smoke close to
the battery. Make sure there is good ventilation in
closed areas where batteries are being used or
charged. Do not check the battery charge by shorting
the terminals with metal; use a hydrometer or
voltmeter.
5-3-4-12
!MCAUTION
rv
When reconnecting, fit the positive (+) lead first.
ic
INT-3-1-8
Re-charge the battery away from the machine, in a well

ventilated area. Switch the charging circuit off before
connecting or disconnecting the battery. When you
have installed the battery in the machine, wait five
minutes before connecting it up.
es
!MWARNING
INT-3-1-14
Se
Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is

running, otherwise the electrical circuits may be
damaged.
!MWARNING
Electrical Circuits
Understand the electrical circuit before connecting or
disconnecting an electrical component. A wrong
connection can cause injury and/or damage.
INT-3-1-4
!MDANGER
Electrolyte
Battery electrolyte is toxic and corrosive. Do not
breathe the gases given off by the battery. Keep the
electrolyte away from your clothes, skin, mouth and
eyes. Wear safety glasses.
INT-3-2-1_3
177
9821/1300-1
177
Routine Maintenance
Health and Safety
Warning Symbols
First Aid - Electrolyte
The following warning symbols may be found on the

battery.
Do the following if electrolyte:

Gets into your eyes
Symbol
Meaning
Immediately flush with water for 15 minutes, always get

medical help.
Keep away from children.
Is swallowed
A289230-1
es
Do not induce vomiting. Drink large quantities of water or

milk. Then drink milk of magnesia, beaten egg or vegetable
oil. Get medical help.
Shield eyes.
Gets onto your skin
A289260-1
No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks.
Flush with water, remove affected clothing. Cover burns

with a sterile dressing then get medical help.
A289280
ic
Explosive Gas.
A289250
rv
Battery acid.
A289240
A289270
Se
Note operating instructions.
178
9821/1300-1
178
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Service Schedules
Introduction
How to Use the Service Schedules
!MWARNING
T3-036_3
Maintenance must be done only by suitably qualified

and competent persons.
T3-012_4
In the example shown, A shows all service requirements to

be carried out every 10 hours and B shows the
requirements to be carried out every 500 hours.
Important: Services should be carried out at either the
hourly interval or calendar interval, whichever occurs first.
Refer to Calendar Equivalents.
To prevent anyone starting the engine, remove the

starter key. Disconnect the battery when you are not
using electrical power. If you do not take these
precautions you could be killed or injured.
Important: The intervals given in the schedules must not

be exceeded. If the machine is operated under severe
conditions (high temperature, dust, water, etc.), shorten
the intervals.
es
Before doing any maintenance make sure the machine

is safe, it should be correctly parked on level ground.
A badly maintained machine is a danger to the operator

and the people working around him. Make sure that the
regular maintenance and lubrication jobs listed in the
service schedules are done to keep the machine in a safe
and efficient working condition.
Se
rv
Apart from the daily jobs, the schedules are based on

machine running hours. Keep a regular check on the
hourmeter readings to correctly gauge service intervals.
When there is no hourmeter fitted, use the calendar
equivalents to determine the service intervals. Refer to
Calendar Equivalents. Do not use a machine which is
due for a service. Make sure any defects found during the
regular maintenance checks are rectified immediately.
ic
8-3-1-1
795390-1
Calendar Equivalents
Every 10 Hours = Daily
T3-051
Every 50 Hours = Weekly
179
Every 500 Hours = Six Months

Every 1000 Hours = Yearly
Every 2000 Hours = 2 Years
Every 6000 Hours = 6 Years
9821/1300-1
179
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Pre-start Cold Checks, Service Points and Fluid Levels

Operation
10
50
100(1)
500
- Check
1000 2000 6000
ENGINE
Coolant Quality and Level K Checking the
Coolant Level ( T 231).
Cooling System K Changing the
Coolant ( T 232).
- Drain / Refill
Oil and Filter
K Oil and Filter ( T 229).
- Check
Air Cleaner Inner Element K Changing the Air

Filter Elements ( T 235).
- Change
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) Belt Condition

K Inspecting the Drive Belt ( T 233).
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) Belt
K Changing the Drive Belt ( T 234).
- Drain
- Change
- Change
- Check
- Change
- Check
Se
Engine Mounting Bolts for Tightness
rv
Engine Fuel Filter(5) K Changing the Engine Fuel

Filter Element ( T 240).
ic
- Change
Water Separator Fuel Filter(5) K Changing the

Water Separator Pre-Filter ( T 238).
- Change
Air Cleaner Outer Element(4) K Changing the Air

Filter Elements ( T 235).
Water Separator and Engine Fuel Filter

K Draining the Water Separator and Engine
Fuel Filter ( T 237).
es
Oil level K Checking the Oil Level ( T 229).

(2)(3)
- Check
Radiator(4) K Cleaning the Machine ( T 197).
- Clean
Breather Gauze
- Clean
Valve Clearances(6)
- Check / Adjust
Oil Filler and Dipstick Seals(6) K Oil and

Filter ( T 229).
- Check / Adjust
All Hoses - Condition K Check the Hydraulic

Hoses and Fittings ( T 200).
Rocker Cover and Injector Seals(6)
- Change
Injectors(6)
- Change
- Change
High Pressure Fuel Lines(6)
- Inspect
Injector(s) Leak Off Rail
(6)
TRANSMISSION, AXLES AND STEERING

Transmission Oil Level K Checking the Oil
Level ( T 249).
180
- Check
9821/1300-1
180
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Operation
10
50
100(1)
500
K Changing the Oil and
- Change
Transmission Filter K Changing the Oil and

Filter ( T 250)
- Change
- Check
Axle Oil Level (incl. Hubs when applicable)(8)

K Checking the Differential Oil Level ( T 252),
K Checking the Hub Oil Levels ( T 253)
- Change
Axle Oil - Limited Slip Differential
- Change
- Clean
- Security and
Grease
- Check
rv
Oil Level(11) K Oil and Filter ( T 244).
- Grease
- Grease
Se
HYDRAULICS
- Check
Front Axle Main Pivot K Greasing ( T 203).
Front Hub Bearings
Steer Axle Pivots and Linkages

K Greasing ( T 203).
- Check
(10)
Wheel Nut Security K Checking the Wheel Nut

Torques ( T 257).
Steer Axle Movement and Shimming(6)
- Check
Drive Shafts(10) K Greasing ( T 203).
Tyre Pressures and Condition K Tyre

Inflation ( T 256).
Transmission Strainer K Changing the Oil and

Filter ( T 250).
ic
Axle Oil (incl. Hubs when applicable)(9)

K Changing the Differential Oil ( T 252),
K Changing the Hub Oil ( T 253).
1000 2000 6000
es
Transmission Oil
Filter ( T 250).
(7)
- Check
Rams - Chrome Condition
- Check
Hydraulic Oil Cooler
- Clean
Hydraulic Oil Strainer K Changing the Suction

Strainer ( T 246).
- Clean
Hydraulic Tank Filler Cap (with integral filter)

K Hydraulic Tank Filler Cap ( T 243).
- Change
Hammer 1inch (diameter) Return Line Filter (if

fitted) K Changing the 1 inch (Diameter) Return
Line Filter (If Fitted) ( T 291).
- Change
Inline magnetic Filter
- Change
Oil K Oil and Filter ( T 244).
Oil Filter K Oil and Filter ( T 244).
181
- Sample, Change
- Change
9821/1300-1
181
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Operation
10
50
100(1)
500
1000 2000 6000
BRAKES
Park Brake K Park Brake ( T 218).
- Check / Adjust
ELECTRICS
- Check
Wiring for Chaffing/Routing K Check the

Electrical Circuits ( T 201).
- Check
Battery Terminals for Condition and Tightness

K Battery Disconnection/Connection ( T 220).
- Check
All Pins and Bushes K Greasing ( T 203).
ic
BODYWORK AND CAB
- Check / Grease
Door/Window Hinges
- Lubricate
All Cables
- Lubricate
Cab Heater Fresh Air Filter(4) K Cleaning the Cab

Heater Fresh Air Filter ( T 216).
- Clean / Change
Cab Air Conditioning Recirculation Filter (if fitted) (4)

K Changing the Cab Air Conditioning
Recirculation Filters (If Fitted) ( T 217).
- Clean/Change
Extending Dipper K Greasing ( T 203).
rv
- Adjust / Grease
Kingpost clamp K Kingpost Clamps ( T 140).

Door - Fit and Catches
es
Battery Electrolyte Level (if applicable)

K Checking the Electrolyte Level ( T 220).
- Check
- Check
Se
Cab Seat - Operation K Check the Seat and Seat

Belt ( T 200)
- Check / Adjust
Front Mudguards - Security (if fitted)
- Check
Windscreen Washer Fluid Level K Windscreen

Washer ( T 263).
- Check
Boom Lock Engagement K Boom and Slew

Locks ( T 112).
- Check
Condition of Paintwork K Check the Machine

Body and Structure ( T 200).
- Check
- Check / Adjust
Machine Generally K Cleaning the

Machine ( T 196).
- Check / Clean
Stabiliser Legs (Sideshift) K Stabiliser Legs

(Sideshift Machines Only) ( T 261).
ROPS/FOPS K Checking The ROPS/FOPS

Structure ( T 201).
Power Sideshift Wear Pads K Greasing ( T 203).
Power Sideshift Wear Pads K Wear
Pads ( T 259).
182
- Check
- Grease
- Check
9821/1300-1
182
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Operation
Power Sideshift Chain K Power
Sideshift ( T 209).
10
- Lubricate
Power Sideshift Chain Tension K Chain

Adjustment ( T 262).
50
100(1)
500
- Check / Adjust
1000 2000 6000
ATTACHMENTS
- Grease
Backhoe & Loader Quick Hitch

K Greasing ( T 203).
- Grease
es
6-in-1 Clam Shovel K Greasing ( T 203).
Se
rv
ic
(1) First 100 Hours Service only, to be completed by your JCB Distributor.
(2) If operating under arduous conditions, change the engine oil and filter every 250 hours.
(3) The oil service interval will be affected if there is a high sulphur content in the fuel. Refer to Fuel System for more
information.
(4) If operating in dusty working environments, change more frequently.
(5) If the engine is difficult to start or the engine has poor performance, fit new filters. For the water separator filter, use a
30 micron filter for normal conditions and a 150 micron filter for cold climate (-10C, 14F).
(6) Jobs which should only be done by a specialist.
(7) After a major transmission repair, the new oil should be run to operating temperature and changed again to remove
any contamination which entered during the repair. Change the oil and filter after a further 100 hours if the oil was
heavily contaminated because of, or from the failure (e.g. water contamination).
(8) Check for leaks every 50 hours, check level if leaking.
(9) After a hub repair, the new oil should be run to operating temperature and changed again to remove any contamination
which entered during the repair. Change the oil again after a further 100 hours to remove any bedding-in wear. This is
particularly important if new brake plates have been fitted.
(10) The axles and driveshafts are factory greased with a high performance grease, if during service a standard grease is
used, then the interval must be reduced to every 50 hours, contact your JCB Distributor for advice.
(11) Check the hydraulic fluid level with the loader and backhoe in the travel position.
183
9821/1300-1
183
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Functional Test and Final Inspection

Operation
10
50
100(1)
500
1000 2000 6000
ENGINE
- Check and Adjust
Idle Speed(2)
(2)
- Check and Adjust
Exhaust Smoke (excessive)
- Check
Maximum No-Load Speed
Exhaust System Security
- Check
Throttle System and Control Cable
- Check
(2)
TRANSMISSION, AXLES AND STEERING

- Check
2WD/4WD Selection
- Check
Wheel Nuts Torque
- Check
Forward/Reverse and Gear Change Operation

Hydraulic Flow Control - Operation (if fitted)
- Check
- Check
rv
- Check
Steer Circuit Pressure(2)
- Check
Brake Circuit Pressure(2)

Transmission Main Line Pressure(2)
Transmission Dump Operation
- Check
- Check
- Check
Se
Neutral Start Operation
- Check
Clutch Pack Pressures(2)
MRV Pressure(2)
ic
Steer Modes - Operation/Phasing
es
Air Inlet System Security
HYDRAULICS
- Check
(2)
- Check and Adjust
Operation All Services
Hose Burst Protection Valves (if fitted)

(2)
- Check
- Check and Adjust
Offloader Valve Pressure
- Check
- Check and Adjust
Foot Brake - Charge cut-in Pressure (2)
- Check and Adjust
Foot Brake - Charge cut-out Pressure (2)
- Check and Adjust
Foot Brake - Warning switch Pressure (2)
- Check and Adjust
Auxiliary Circuit & Pressures(2)

BRAKES
Foot Brake - Operation
184
- Check
9821/1300-1
184
Routine Maintenance
Service Schedules
Operation
Foot Brake - Accumulator Set Pressure
10
100(1)
500
50
- Check and Adjust
(2)
Park Brake - Operation
- Check
1000 2000 6000
ELECTRICS
- Check
Alternator - Output
- Check
All Electrical Equipment Operation, (e.g.

warning lights, beacon, alarms, horn, wipers
etc.)
- Check
Operation of Stop Control/E.S.O.S.
- Check
BODYWORK AND CAB

- Check
Doors and Windows - Fitment/Leaks
- Check
Seat / Seat Belts
- Check
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Fit for Purpose Test (3)
ic
Teeth and Side Cutters
es
Starter Motor
- Complete
Se
rv
(1) First 100 Hours Service Only, to be completed by your JCB Distributor.
(2) Jobs which should only be done by a specialist.
(3) This may be required every six months or at least annually in some countries to meet and comply with legislation and
for insurance purposes.
185
9821/1300-1
185
Routine Maintenance
Fluids, Lubricants and Capacities

ITEM
Table 6.
FLUID/LUBRICANT
CAPACITY
Fuel Tank
Litres
UK Gal
160
35.2
Engine (Oil)
12
2.64
Max.
15
3.3
Diesel Oil
ASTM D975-66T
Nos. 1D, 2D
JCB Extreme Performance
SAE 15W/40,
ACEA E5/B3/
A3,API CH-4/SG
(-10C to +50C (14F to 122F)
es
Min.
INTERNATIONAL
SPECIFICATION
JCB Cold Climate Engine Oil
SAE 5W-40, ACEA

E5/B3/A3, API CH4/SJ
(-20C to +50C (-4F to 122F)
ic
! CAUTION: DO NOT USE ORDINARY ENGINE OIL

17.5
18.5
4.07 Dry
Syncro Shuttle (2WD)(2)
14.4
3.2 Dry
10
2.2 Wet
-32C to 40C (-25F to 104F)
10W, EL4117
-5C to 46C (23F to 115F)
SAE30, EL4118
Powershift 6 speed
(2)
3.4 Dry
11
2.4 Wet
-32C to 40C (-25F to 104F)
10W, EL4117
11
2.4 Wet
-5C to 46C (23F to 115F)
SAE30, EL4118
16
3.5 Dry
11.5
2.5 Wet
-32C to 40C (-25F to 104F)
10W, EL4117
-5C to 46C (23F to 115F)
SAE30, EL4118
15.5
3.4 Dry
11
2.4 Wet
-32C to 40C (-25F to 104F)
10W, EL4117
-5C to 46C (23F to 115F)
SAE30, EL4118
Powershift 4 speed(2)
ASTM D6210
15.4
Se
Syncro Shuttle (4WD)
(2)
3.85 Wet JCB High Performance Antifreeze and Inhibitor/

Water K Coolant Mixtures ( T 188).
rv
Engine (Coolant)
(1)
JCB HD90 Gear Oil (without LSD)
API-GL-5
Housing (2WS)
13
2.86
JCB Gear Oil HP Plus (with LSD)
API-GL-4
Housing (4WS)(3)
18
3.96
Must be suitable for use with limited slip differentials (LSD).
Hubs (x2)
2.0
0.44
Rear Axle (4WS)
JCB Gear Oil HP Plus
Housing
16.5
3.62
Hubs (x2)
1.9
0.41
Front Axle (4WD)
API-GL-4
Must be suitable for use with oil immersed brakes and

limited slip differentials (LSD).
Rear Axle (2WS)
21
4.61
Brake System
Uses Hydraulic system Oil
Hydraulic System
(Manual and Easy
Control) (4)
130
28.6
JCB High Performance Hydraulic Oil
ISO VG46
(Above 38 C, 100 F)
186
9821/1300-1
186
Routine Maintenance
ITEM
CAPACITY
FLUID/LUBRICANT
INTERNATIONAL
SPECIFICATION
JCB Hydraulic Fluid HP32
ISO VG32
(Below 38 C, 100 F)
Hydraulic System
130
(Advanced Easy Control)
28.6
JCB Multigrade Anti Shear Hydraulic Fluid
ISO 11158 cat HV

DIN 51524 cat
HVLP
SS 155434 cat AV
Denison HF-o
---
---
JCB HP Grease
Lithium complex
NLGI No.2
consistency
including extreme
pressure additives
es
Grease Points
ic
or JCB Special MPL-EP Grease(5)
---
---
Waxoyl(6)
Electrical connections
---
---
As a corrosion and moisture inhibitor all exposed

connections should be coated liberally with petroleum
jelly.
Power Sideshift Chains
---
---
rv
Extending Dipper
Lithium based
NLGI No.2
consistency
including extreme
pressure additives
JCB Chain Lubricant
Se
(1) It is recommended that the cooling system be filled at a maximum rate of 10 litres per minute. If the fill rate is any higher
than this there is a possibility of air becoming trapped in the system.
(2) The figure quoted is TOTAL system capacity. Use the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick when filling the system.
Figures quoted within 1.0 litre (0.22 U.K. gal).
(3) 4WS axles with limited slip differential must use JCB Special Gear Oil Plus.
(4) The total hydraulic system capacity depends on the equipment being used. Fill with all rams closed. Watch level
indicator on hydraulic tank.
(5) JCB HP Grease is the recommended specification grease, if using JCB Special MPL-EP then the greasing must be
carried out more frequently.
(6) WARNING: Waxoyl contains turpentine substitute, which is inflammable. Keep flames away when applying Waxoyl.
Waxoyl can take a few weeks to dry completely. Keep flames away during the drying period. Do not weld near the
affected area during the drying period. Take the same precautions as for oil to keep Waxoyl off your skin. Do not
breathe the fumes. Apply in a well-ventilated area.
187
9821/1300-1
187
Routine Maintenance
Coolant Mixtures
T3-009_3
Check the strength of the coolant mixture at least once a

year, preferably at the start of the cold period.
Replace the coolant mixture according to the intervals
shown in the machine's Service Schedule.
!MWARNING
Antifreeze can be harmful. Obey the manufacturer's
instructions when handling full strength or diluted
antifreeze.
es
7-3-4-4_1
The correct concentration of antifreeze protects the engine

against frost damage in winter and provides year round
protection against corrosion.
50% Concentration (Standard)
rv
The protection provided by JCB High Performance

Antifreeze and Inhibitor is shown below.
ic
You must dilute full strength antifreeze with clean water

before use. Use clean water of no more than a moderate
hardness (pH value 8.5). If this cannot be obtained, use
de-ionized water. For further information advice on water
hardness, contact your local water authority.
Se
Protects against damage down to -40 C (-39 F)
60% Concentration (Extreme Conditions Only)

Protects against damage down to -56 C (-68 F)
Important: Do not exceed a 60% concentration, as the

freezing protection provided reduces beyond this point.
If you use any other brand of antifreeze:
Ensure that the antifreeze complies with International

Specification ASTM D6210.
Always read and understand the manufacturer's
instructions.
Ensure that a corrosion inhibitor is included. Serious

damage to the cooling system can occur if corrosion
inhibitors are not used.
Ensure that the antifreeze is ethylene glycol based
and does not use Organic Acid Technology (OAT).
188
9821/1300-1
188
Routine Maintenance
!MCAUTION
Fuels
Acceptable and Unacceptable Fuels
T3-031
Important: No warranty liability whatsoever will be

accepted for failure of fuel injection equipment where the
failure is attributed to the quality and grade of the fuel used.
Consult your fuel supplier or JCB distributor about the

suitability of any fuel you are unsure of.
GEN-9-2
Table 7.
Applicable Engines
Fuel Specification
BS2869 Class A2
ASTM D975-91 Class 2, US DF1, US DF2,
US DFA
JIS K2204 (1992) Grades 1, 2, 3 and Special
Grade 3
All Dieselmax engines.
MIL T38219 XF63

NATO F63
French EN590 (RME5) with 5% maximum
usual
routine
schedules
and
Obey
the
usual
routine
maintenance
schedules
and
Important: Engines operated with procedures. Fuel additives are
these fuels may have a reduced recommended for use with low
service life.
sulphur
fuels.
K Additives ( T 190).
ic
ASTM D975-91 Class 1DA
Obey
the
maintenance
procedures.
es
EN590 Diesel fuel types - Auto/C0/C1/C2/ All Dieselmax engines.

C3/C4
Se
rv
AVTURFSII, NATO F34, JP8, MIL T83133, All Dieselmax engines.

DERD 2463, DEF STAN 91-87
AVCAT FSII, NATO F44, JP5, MIL T5624, Important: Engines operated with
these fuels may have a reduced
DERD 2452, AVTOR
service life.
NATO F35, JET A1, DEF STAN 91-91,
DERD 2494, JP7
Obey
the
usual
routine
maintenance
schedules
and
procedures. Fuel additives must be
used. K Additives ( T 190).
AVCAT, NATO F43 (obsolete), JP5 without

additives
JET A (ASTM D1655)
ASTM D3699 Kerosene
B20 Biodiesel - RME content blended with Dieselmax engines

mineral derived diesel (20% maximum) - from 2007 on only(1).
ASTM D6751, DIN 51606, ISO 14214
manufactured You must obey special routine

maintenance
schedules
and
procedures. K Warranty ( T 190).
These fuels are not acceptable with or

AVTAG FSII (obsolete), NATO F40, JP4, without additives. Engines must not
be operated with these fuels.
DERD 2454
AVTAG (obsolete)
JET B (ASTM D1655)
BS MA100
JIS K2203 No.2
Unmodified vegetable oils
(1) The year of manufacture is part of the engine serial number. Refer to Typical Engine Identification Number.
189
9821/1300-1
189
Routine Maintenance
Additives
and factory filled with CH4 oil) - this is not approved

with other manufacturers.
Lubrizol 539N. Dosage (on Swedish low sulphur fuel)

250 ppm.
Paradyne 7505 (from Infineum). Dosage 500 ppm
(0.05%).
Note: These products are given as examples only. The
information is derived from the manufacturers data. The
products are not recommended or endorsed by JCB.
Service Requirements for use of B20 Biodiesel
The engine oil must be a grade CH4 as minimum
specification.
Note: If necessary use a test kit to confirm the fuel

specification. Testing kits are available (not from JCB
currently), use the internet as a source for the kits.
Note: If performance related issues are to be reported to
JCB Service, and the engine has been run on biodiesel,
then the fuel system must be filled with standard diesel (at
least 2 x tank fills) to EN590 specification and relevant stall
speeds recorded prior to making the report.
Warranty
JCB have shown a commitment to support the

environment by approving the use of biodiesel blended
fuels.
Using a B20 blend of biodiesel requires caution and
additional servicing of the engine is required. K Service
Requirements for use of B20 Biodiesel ( T 190).
rv
Do not leave unused B20 biodiesel in the fuel tank for

extended periods (top up each day).
The biodiesel must meet the following standards:

ASTM D6751, DIN 51606, ISO 14214
es
Elf 2S 1750. Dosage 1000-1500 ppm (0.1 - 0.15%),

specifically for Indian Superior Kerosene (SKO) but
may be applicable to other fuels.
Use heater kits in low ambient temperature territories.
ic
The additives listed below are advertised as being suitable

for bringing the lubricity levels of kerosene/low sulphur
fuels up to those of diesel fuels. They must be used as
specified by your fuel supplier who will understand the
concentration level necessary.
Make sure that 1 in 5 fuel tank fills use standard diesel

to EN590 specification, this will help to prevent
'gumming'.
Failures resulting by the incorrect use of biodiesels or

other fuel additives are not defects of the JCB Dieselmax
engine workmanship and therefore will not be supported
by JCB Warranty.
Se
Make sure regular oil sampling is completed (look for

excessive unburnt fuel content, water or wear
particles.
Failure to follow the additional recommended service

requirements may lead to a warranty claim being declined.
Change the engine oil and filter more frequently (as a

minimum half the recommended intervals), or as
indicated by oil sampling.
Change the fuel filters more frequently (as a minimum
half the recommended intervals), or if there are
engine performance related issues.
Make sure the fuel is stored correctly, care must be

taken to make sure no water enters the machine fuel
tank (or the storage tank). Water will encourage micobacterial growth.
Make sure that the fuel pre-filter is drained daily (not

every week as currently advised).
Only JCB engines built after Jan. 2007 are applicable

(i.e. engines with 07 on the end of their serial number
190
9821/1300-1
190
Routine Maintenance
Sulphur Content
Effects of Fuel Contaminates

T3-032
T3-033
High sulphur content can cause engine wear. (High

sulphur fuel is not normally found in North America,
Europe or Australia.) If you have to use high sulphur fuel
you must change the engine oil more frequently.
K Table 8. Sulphur Content ( T 191).
The effect of dirt, water and other contaminants in diesel

can be disastrous for injection equipment:
!MCAUTION
A combination of water and sulphur will have a
corrosive chemical effect on fuel injection equipment.
It is essential that water is eradicated from the fuel
system when high sulphur fuels are used.
Table 8. Sulphur Content

Percentage of sulphur in Oil Change Interval
the fuel (%)
Normal
0.5 to 1.0
0.75 of normal
More than 1.0
0.50 of normal
Se
rv
Less than 0.5
Wax - Wax is precipitated from diesel when the

ambient temperature falls below that of the fuel's
cloud point, causing a restriction in fuel flow resulting
in rough engine running. Special winter fuels may be
available for engine operation at temperatures below
0C (32F). These fuels have a lower viscosity and
limit wax formation.
ic
ENG-3-2
Water - Water can enter fuel through poor storage or

careless handling, and will almost inevitably
condense in fuel tanks. The smallest amounts of
water can result in effects that are just as disastrous
to the fuel injection pump as dirt, causing rapid wear,
corrosion and in severe cases, even seizure. It is
vitally important that water is prevented from reaching
the fuel injection equipment. The filter/water trap must
be drained regularly.
es
Low sulphur fuels must have the appropriate fuel lubricity

additives, these lubricity improvers must not create
residual deposits that block the fuel system, e.g. injectors,
filters etc. Contact your fuel Supplier.
Dirt - A severely damaging contaminant. Finely

machined and mated surfaces such as delivery
valves and distributor rotors are susceptible to the
abrasive nature of dirt particles - increased wear will
almost inevitably lead to greater leakage, uneven
running and poor fuel delivery.
191
9821/1300-1
191
Routine Maintenance
Tools
Tools
Carrying Tools onto the Machine
All tools must be kept in the toolbox A (If fitted) when not in
use. Additional tool storage B is available under the engine
cover for the wheel brace and tommy bar.
When you carry tools onto the machine you must maintain
three points of contact with the machine at all times. Lift
tools onto the machine in intervals if necessary. Place the
tools down before you adjust your grips on the machine.
Do not try to adjust your grips on the machine while holding
tools.
ic
es
Toolbox (If fitted)
rv
Se
T053820-1
Fig 231.
192
9821/1300-1
192
Routine Maintenance
Prepare the Machine for Maintenance

Introduction
!MWARNING
Maintenance must be done only by suitably qualified
and competent persons.
Before doing any maintenance make sure the machine
is safe, it should be correctly parked on level ground.
es
To prevent anyone starting the engine, remove the

starter key. Disconnect the battery when you are not
using electrical power. If you do not take these
precautions you could be killed or injured.
Make the machine safe before you start a maintenance

procedure.
rv
You can complete most of the maintenance procedures

with the loader arm lowered (Position A). Unless a
maintenance procedure instructs you differently, you must
lower the loader arm. Refer to How to Make the Machine
Safe (Loader Arm Lowered).
ic
8-3-1-1
T024630-1
Fig 232.
Se
If you lift the loader arm to get access for maintenance

(Position B), you must install the maintenance strut on the
loader arm. Refer to How to Make the Machine Safe
(Loader Arm Lifted).
193
9821/1300-1
193
Routine Maintenance
How to Make the Machine Safe (Loader

Arm Lowered)
Important: You can complete most of the maintenance
procedures with the loader arm lowered. Unless a
maintenance procedure instructs you differently, you must
lower the loader arm.
b Remove strut C from its stowage bracket.

4
Retract then lower the loader arm.
Put the attachment flat on the ground.
Stop the engine and remove the starter key.
Disconnect the battery

operation of the engine.
If necessary, put chocks against the two sides of the

wheels before you get below the machine.
To prevent any chance of the loader arms creeping

down and trapping your fingers, the loader arms
should be carefully lowered onto the safety strut as
shown.
Start the engine and slowly lower the loader arms
onto the safety strut, stop the movement immediately
the weight of the loader arms is supported by the
safety strut.
accidental
Note: When lowering the loader, operate the control lever

carefully. 'Feather' the lever to lower the loader very slowly.
rv
How to Make the Machine Safe (Loader

Arm Lifted)
Lower the arm onto the strut.
es
!MWARNING
Push strut C over the ram piston rod.
b Secure the strut in position with strap B.
If necessary, refer to Stopping and Parking the

Machine in the Operator Manual.
prevent
Install the strut.

a
Park the machine on level, solid ground.
to
Release fastener A.
ic
P2-3009_2
Se
Raised Equipment
Never walk or work under raised equipment unless it
is supported by a mechanical device. Equipment
which is supported only by a hydraulic device can
drop and injure you if the hydraulic system fails or if
the control is operated (even with the engine stopped).
Make sure that no-one goes near the machine while
you install or remove the mechanical device.
13-2-3-7_3
Installing the Loader Arm Safety Strut

Install the loader arm safety strut as detailed below before
working underneath raised loader arms.
C006740-1
Fig 233.
H
1
Empty the shovel and raise the loader arms fully.
Release the strut.
194
9821/1300-1
194
Routine Maintenance
Removing the Loader Arm Safety Strut
1
Fully raise the loader arms to take the weight off the
safety strut.
Remove the strut.

a
Undo the strap B.
b Remove the strut C from the ram piston rod.

Stow the strut.
es
Se
rv
ic
Secure the strut in its stowage position with fastener

A.
C006740-2
Fig 234.
195
9821/1300-1
195
Routine Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
!MCAUTION
Introduction
T3-062_2
Cleaning must be carried out either in the area of

components to be removed or, in the case of major
work, or work on the fuel system, the whole engine
and surrounding machine must be cleaned.
When cleaning is complete move the machine away
from the wash area, or alternatively, clean away the
material washed from the machine.
Important: When removing components be aware of any

dirt or debris that may be exposed. Cover any open ports
and clean away the deposits before proceeding.
Ensure that the alternator, starter motor and any other

electrical components are shielded and not directly
cleaned by the high pressure cleaning system.
ENG-3-3
es
Before carrying out any service procedures that require

components to be removed:
The engine or certain components could be damaged

by high pressure washing systems; special
precautions must be taken if the engine is to be
washed using a high pressure system.
Important: Do not aim the water jet directly at bearings, oil

seals or electrical and electronic components such as the
engine electronic control unit (ECU), alternator or fuel
injectors.
Use a low pressure water jet and brush to soak off caked
mud or dirt.
ic
Clean the machine using water and or steam. Do not allow

mud, debris etc. to build upon the machine.
Use a pressure washer to remove soft dirt and oil.

Note: The machine must always be greased after
pressure washing or steam cleaning.
rv
Detergents
Avoid using full strength detergent - always dilute
detergents as per the manufacturer's recommendations,
otherwise damage to the paint finish may occur.
Preparing the Machine for Cleaning

1
Pressure Washing and Steam Cleaning
Important: Stop the engine and allow it to cool for at least

one hour. Do not attempt to clean any part of the engine
while it is running.
Se
Always adhere to local regulations regarding the disposal

of debris created from machine cleaning.
!MWARNING
When using a steam cleaner, wear safety glasses or a

face shield as well as protective clothing. Steam can
cause serious personal injury.
Make the machine safe with the loader arm lifted.

Make sure that all electrical connectors are correctly

coupled. If connectors are open fit the correct caps or
seal with water proof tape.
13-3-2-10_2
196
9821/1300-1
196
Routine Maintenance
Note: Machines with air conditioning have a condenser

matrix fitted in front of the oil cooler, the fins of the
condenser matrix may get clogged. In this case, clean the
tubes/fins of the condenser matrix as described above.
!MWARNING
To avoid burning, wear protective gloves when
handling hot components. To protect your eyes, wear
goggles when using a brush to clean components.
HYD-1-3_2
!MWARNING
es
Airborne particles of light combustible material such

as straw, grass, wood shavings, etc. must not be
allowed to accumulate within the engine compartment
or in the propshaft guards (when fitted). Inspect these
areas frequently and clean at the beginning of each
work shift or more often if required. Before opening
the engine cover, ensure that the top is clear of debris.
!MCAUTION
8-3-4-8
Pay particular attention to:

Cooling Pack
Se
rv
Never use water or steam to clean inside the cab. The

use of water or steam could damage the on-board
computer and render the machine inoperable. Remove
dirt using a brush or damp cloth.
ic
5-3-1-12_3
The cooling pack is located in front of the engine, the

pack consists of the engine cooling radiator, hydraulic
oil cooler, intercooler and air-conditioning condenser
(optional). If the cooler tubes/fins get clogged (by dirt
and flies etc.) the radiator and coolers will be less
efficient.
a
Remove the front grille.
b Brush off all debris from the cooler tubes and fins.
Make sure the loosened material is brushed out of
the cooler enclosure.
H
197
Engine
Do not allow mud to build up on the engine and

transmission. Pay particular attention to the exhaust
area, remove all combustible material.
The engine or certain components could be damaged
by high pressure washing systems, special
precautions must be taken if the engine is to be
washed using a high pressure system.
Important: Do not place the jet nozzle closer than 600mm

(24 in) to any part of the engine.
Note: When cleaning the matrix make sure that the brush
follows the same direction as the fins are to avoid
damaging them. Damaged fins will reduce the cooling
efficiency of the matrix.
c
711790-2
Fig 235.
Refit the radiator grille.
Do not attempt to clean any part of the engine while it

is running. Stop the engine and allow it to cool for at
least one hour.
a
Disconnect the battery.
b Do not aim the jet wash directly at the fuel injector

seals A. K Fig 236. ( T 198).
9821/1300-1
197
Routine Maintenance
4
Backhoe
Pay particular attention to:
Backhoe hoses passing through mainframe.
b Around twin slew rams.

Twin ram slew recess in chassis (centremount).
es
ic
Se
Fig 236.
rv
Do not wash any part of the:

i
Fuel injection pump.
ii
Cold start device.
iii Electrical shut off solenoid (ESOS).
iv Electrical connections.
d Ensure that the alternator, starter motor and any

other electrical components are shielded and not
directly cleaned by high pressure cleaning
system.
Stabiliser cavities can become clogged when

operating in soft/wet ground conditions. Remove and
clean away all debris that may have built up.
198
9821/1300-1
C006700-3
Fig 237.
d Kingpost slide rails (sideshift).
e
Kingpost hose tray and bottom 'shelf' (sideshift).
198
Routine Maintenance
e
C006710-2
Recess between slew ram and kingpost casting

(sideshift).
Se
rv
Fig 238.
ic
es
f
C006720-1
Fig 239.
199
9821/1300-1
199
Routine Maintenance
Checking for Damage
Checking for Damage

Check the Machine Body and Structure
Check the Seat and Seat Belt
T3-063_4
Make sure that all guards and protective devices are in

place, attached by their locking devices and free from
damage.
Inspect all steelwork for damage. Note damaged paintwork
for future repair.
!MWARNING
T3-008_2

2-3-1-7_1
Check steps and handrails are undamaged and secure.

Check for broken, cracked or crazed window glass and
mirrors. Replace damaged items.
Inspect the seat belt for signs of fraying and stretching.

Check that the stitching is not loose or damaged. Check
that the buckle assembly is undamaged and works
correctly.
es
Check pivot pins are correctly in place and secured by their

locking devices.
Check that the belt mounting bolts are undamaged,

correctly fitted and tightened.
Check all attachment teeth are undamaged and secure.
Check the Tyres
!MWARNING
Check the Hydraulic Hoses and Fittings
!MWARNING
T3-065_2
T3-072
Hydraulic Hoses
Damaged hoses can cause fatal accidents. Inspect the
hoses regularly. Do not use the machine if a hose or
hose fitting is damaged.
Se
You could be killed or injured if a machine tyre bursts.

Do not use the machine with damaged, incorrectly
inflated or excessively worn tyres. Recognise the
speed limitation of the tyres fitted and do not operate
at more than their recommended maximum speed.
13-2-1-2
Check seats are undamaged and secure. Check seat

adjustments for correct operation.
rv
Check all safety and instructional labels are in place and

undamaged. Fit new labels where necessary.
ic
Check all lamp lenses for damage.
INT-3-3-2_4
Inspect the hoses regularly for:

Damaged hose ends
Always drive with consideration for the condition of the

tyres. Incorrect tyre pressures will affect the stability of the
machine. Check the tyres daily for the correct tyre
pressure and signs of damage. For example:
Chafed outer covers

Ballooned outer covers
Kinked or crushed hoses
Embedded armouring in outer covers
Displaced end fittings
Signs of distortion (bulges)

Cuts or wear
Do not use the machine if a hose or hose fitting is

damaged. Replace damaged hoses before you use the
machine again.
Embedded objects (nails, etc.)
Install the valve caps firmly to prevent dirt from entering the
valve. Inspect for leaks when you check the tyre
pressures.
Replacement hoses must be of the same size and

standard.
Inspect the tyre valve for leaks, when you check the tyre
pressures.
200
9821/1300-1
200
Routine Maintenance
Checking for Damage
Check the Electrical Circuits

T3-099
Inspect the electrical circuits regularly for:

Damaged connectors
Loose connections
Chafing on wiring harnesses
Corrosion
Missing insulation
Incorrect routing of harness
es
Do not use the machine if one or more of these faults are

found. You must make sure that the electrical circuit is
repaired immediately.
Checking The ROPS/FOPS Structure
rv
You could be killed or seriously injured if you operate

a machine with a damaged or missing ROPS/FOPS. If
the Roll Over Protection Structure (ROPS)/Falling
Objects Protection Structure (FOPS) has been in an
accident, do not use the machine until the structure
has been renewed. Modifications and repairs that are
not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous
and will invalidate the ROPS/FOPS certification.
ic
!MWARNING
INT-2-1-9_6
Se
Check the structure for damage. Check that the mounting

bolts are installed and undamaged. Check the bolt torques.
K Torque Settings ( T 201). Tighten them to the correct
torque if necessary.
1
Remove the rear wheels to gain access to the rear

mounting bolts A.
Remove the covers C and external trim panels D to

gain access to the front mounting bolts B.
Table 9. Torque Settings

205 Nm (150 lbf ft)
Bolts A and B
201
9821/1300-1
201
Routine Maintenance
Checking for Damage
ic
es
rv
Se
Fig 240.
202
9821/1300-1
202
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Greasing
Introduction
Preparing the Machine for Greasing

T3-028_2
You must grease the machine regularly to keep it working

efficiently. Regular greasing will also lengthen the
machine's working life. Refer to the Service Schedule for
the correct intervals.
Note: The machine must always be greased after
pressure washing or steam cleaning.
Make the machine safe before you start a greasing

procedure. Refer to Prepare the Machine for
Maintenance.
Important: You can complete most of the greasing
procedures with the loader arm lowered. If you lift the
loader arm to get access for greasing, you must install the
maintenance strut on the loader arm.
!MCAUTION
rv
Note: Where applicable, refer to the manufacturers

manual for instructions on the maintenance of optional
attachments.
ic
In the following illustrations, the grease points are

numbered. Count off the grease points as you grease each
one. Refit the dust caps after greasing.
es
Greasing should be done with a grease gun. Normally, two

strokes of the gun should be sufficient. Stop greasing when
fresh grease appears at the joint. Use only the
recommended type of grease. Do not mix different types of
grease, keep them separate.
Se


5-3-1-9
203
9821/1300-1
203
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Loader Arms
1,2
15,16
3,4
5,6
7,8
es
9,10
11,12
ic
13,14
18,17
rv
19,20
21,22
Fig 241.
Se
For each grease point shown, there is another on the other

side of the machine.
Total 22 grease points.
204
9821/1300-1
204
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Backhoe and Quickhitch
16
es
15
ic
17
14
18
rv
13
19
12
10
Se
6
4
9
20
11
21
22
2
Fig 242.
22 Grease Points
Note: Figure shows

arrangement.
205
typical
boom
and
dipper
9821/1300-1
205
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Front Axle (2 Wheel Drive Machines)
rv
ic
es
9 Grease Points
Note: Grease point 5 is a remote grease point mounted on

the side of the mainframe chassis (near the left front
wheel).
Fig 243.
Front Axle (4 Wheel Drive Machines)
Se
5 Grease Points

wheel).
206
Fig 244.
9821/1300-1
206
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Front Axle (All Wheel Drive Machines)
ic
es
5 Grease Points

wheel).
rv
Fig 245.
Rear Axle (All Wheel Drive Machines)
Se
4 Grease Points
207
Fig 246.
9821/1300-1
207
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Extending Dipper
Driveshafts
!MCAUTION
Front Driveshaft

3 Grease Points

es
5-3-1-9
ic
Extend the dipper. Coat the runners with Waxoyl.

K Fig 247. ( T 208).
rv
Fig 248.
Rear Driveshaft
Se
3 Grease Points
208
Fig 249.
Fig 247.
9821/1300-1
208
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Loader Quickhitch
3 grease points each end-
2 grease points each end -
Total 6 Grease Points
ic
es
6-in-1 Clamshovel
Fig 252.
rv
Fig 250.
Stabilisers (Centremount Machines)
Power Sideshift
3 grease points on each stabiliser -
Note: Release the kingpost clamps and lower the

excavator to the ground before greasing.
Se
1, 2
3, 4
Fig 253.
Fig 251.
209
9821/1300-1
209
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Kingpost
Knuckle (If Fitted)
9 Grease Points
For the boom and dipper grease points. K Backhoe and

Quickhitch ( T 205).
Note: Figure shows a centremount kingpost, greasing is

same for sideshift kingpost.
2 Grease Points
Fig 255.
Se
rv
ic
es
Note: It is recommended that grease points 2 and 3 are

lubricated using a hand grease gun. The use of a power
grease gun may result in the mounting plate being
distorted.
Fig 254.
210
9821/1300-1
210
Routine Maintenance
Greasing
Backhoe Quickhitch (Hydraulic)
!MCAUTION
es
5-3-1-9
Coat the slide A with Waxoyl.
Se
rv
ic
4 Grease Points
211
Fig 256.
9821/1300-1
211
Routine Maintenance
Access Panels
Access Panels
Introduction
T3-100
When placed in their maintenance position, the access

panels give you access to parts or areas of the machine
that are not required during machine operation.
Before you operate the machine, make sure that all of the
access panels are in their operation position and secure.
es
Engine Cover
Cab Machines
Opening and Closing

!MWARNING
rv
5-2-6-5
ic
!MWARNING
10-1-1-40
Se

Important: Before you stop the engine, you must allow the
engine to operate at low idle for four minutes. The delay
allows the coolant temperatures to stabilise before you
open the engine cover.

To release the engine cover, pull handle A, the cover

will automatically open and will be supported on gas
struts.
Note: In windy conditions fit a suitable size bolt or pin

through the engine cover hinge lever mechanism C to
prevent the engine cover inadvertently closing.
3
802920-1
Fig 257.
To close the engine cover, pull the cover down by

means of the cable B, push the cover down, make
sure it is locked in place.
212
9821/1300-1
212
Routine Maintenance
Access Panels
Emergency Release Cable

Remove the front grille. K Front Grille ( T 215).
Reach under the engine cover and pull the wire loop
C, the cover will automatically open and will be
supported on gas struts.
To close the engine cover, refer to Opening and

Closing. K Engine Cover ( T 212).
es
Note: If the main engine cover release cable has been

damaged, there is an emergency release cable hidden
under the engine cover.
Se
rv
ic
T011190-2
Fig 258.
213
9821/1300-1
213
Routine Maintenance
Access Panels
Canopy Machines
Opening and Closing
!MWARNING
5-2-6-5
!MWARNING
es


To release the engine cover, open the front grille.

K Fig 260. ( T 215).
Pull handle A, the cover will automatically open and

will be supported on gas struts.
rv
ic
10-1-1-40
807140-1
Fig 259.
To close the engine cover, pull the cover down by

means of the cable, push the cover down, make sure
it is locked in place and that handle A returns to the
original position.
Se
Note: In windy conditions fit a suitable size bolt or pin

through the engine cover hinge lever mechanism C to
prevent the engine cover inadvertently closing.
K Fig 257. ( T 212).
214
9821/1300-1
214
Routine Maintenance
Access Panels
Front Grille
1

Use the starter key to unlock the front grille.
Remove the front grille B, lift the grille upwards and

outwards.
Fit the front grille, carefully slot the grille into position.
Use the starter key to lock and secure the front grille
es
Note: Press the top part of grille B if the key is difficult to

turn.
Se
rv
ic
T011190-3
Fig 260.
215
9821/1300-1
215
Routine Maintenance
Heater and Air Conditioning

Cleaning the Cab Heater Fresh Air Filter
Important: In dusty conditions the filter will require
cleaning/changing more often than detailed in the service
schedule.
!MCAUTION
The filter may be filled with dust. Wear goggles and a
face mask when removing the filter.
Remove the cover retaining screws (2 off) and then

remove the cover, item A.
Knock loose dust off the filter B. Carefully blow

compressed air through all the folds of the filter, blow
in the opposite direction to the arrows marked on the
filter.
ic

Fig 261.
rv
es
2-3-3-6
Note: The compressed air must be set at a pressure no

greater than 7 bar (100 lb/in2).
Refit the cover A and secure with the retaining screws
(2 off).
Se
216
9821/1300-1
216
Routine Maintenance
Changing the Cab Air Conditioning

Recirculation Filters (If Fitted)
Important: In dusty conditions the filters will require
changing more often than detailed in the service schedule
!MCAUTION
The filter may be filled with dust. Wear goggles and a

face mask when removing the filter.

Turn the re-circulation switch C fully clockwise.
es
2-3-3-6
T034340
Fig 264.
ic
Remove the filters. Note the direction of air flow on

the filters.
rv
C
399460-3
Fig 262.
Remove screw D, Remove the side panel upwards

out of the aperture.
Se
T034350-1
Fig 265.
T039550-52
Fig 263.
Install new filters in correct orientation.
Secure the filters in position with clamp and wingnut.
Install the side panel back into the aperture secure in

position with screw.
Test the Air conditioning system is working correctly.
Unscrew the wingnut E, lift and remove clamp bar F.
217
9821/1300-1
217
Routine Maintenance
Brakes
Brakes
Park Brake
Testing the Park Brake
!MWARNING
Introduction
T3-087
T3-071
!MWARNING
Before testing the park brake make sure the area

around the machine is clear of people.
2-2-4-5
Do not use a machine with a faulty park brake.

3-2-3-10_2
The park brake must be fully

engaged when the lever is vertical.
es
!MWARNING
Non approved modifications to drive ratios, machine
weight or wheel and tyre sizes may adversely affect
the performance of the park brake.
A339340
3-2-3-11
Enter the machine. Fasten your seat belt (if fitted) and
park the machine on a level dry surface.
Fully apply park brake.
Start the engine and raise the attachments to the

appropriate travel position.
rv
If you have any queries concerning the park brake test or

adjustment procedures, consult your local JCB distributor.
ic
Make sure that you obey all health and safety precautions
before you test or adjust the park brake.
The park brake warning light must

come on when the park brake is
engaged and forward or reverse is
selected (starter switch at I).
Select fourth gear.
Push down hard on foot brake pedal.
Select forward drive. The park brake warning light

must illuminate.
Se
!MWARNING
If the machine starts to move during the following test,

immediately apply the foot brake and reduce the
engine speed.
2-2-5-1
H
218
Test the park brake as follows:

Move the park brake lever fractionally forward
until the park brake warning light is just
extinguished.
b Slowly release the foot brake pedal.

c
9821/1300-1
If the machine has not moved, use the accelerator

to gradually increase the engine speed to
approximately 1500 RPM. The machine should
not move.
218
Routine Maintenance
Brakes
Park Brake Adjustment
Note: Do not do this test for longer than 20 seconds.
!MWARNING
d Reduce engine speed to idle and select neutral.

Return the park brake lever to the fully on position.
Lower attachments and stop the engine.
Over adjustment of the park brake could result in the

park brake not fully releasing.
0011
If the machine moved during the test, adjust the park

brake and repeat the test. Refer to Park Brake
Adjustment.
Disengage the park brake (lever horizontal).

Failure to disengage the park brake fully will result in
excessive wear of the park brake mechanism.
Turn handle grip A clockwise, half a turn.
Test the park brake. Refer to Testing the Park Brake.
If the brake fails the test, repeat steps 1, 2 and 3.
es
A347580A-7
Fig 266.
Se
rv
ic
If there is no more adjustment and pin B is at the end

of its travel get the brake checked by your JCB dealer.
219
9821/1300-1
219
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Electrical System
Battery
Checking the Electrolyte Level
Battery Disconnection/Connection
Maintenance free batteries used in normal temperate

climate applications should not need topping up. However,
in certain conditions (such as prolonged operation at
tropical temperatures or if the alternator overcharges) the
electrolyte level should be checked as described below.
T3-020_2
!MWARNING
Keep metal watch straps and any metal fasteners on

your clothes, clear of the positive (+) battery terminal.
Such items can short between the terminal and nearby
metal work. If it happens you can get burned.
5-2-2-4
Get access to the battery. See Access Panels.
Disconnect and remove battery. See Battery

Disconnection/Connection.
Disconnection
!MWARNING
Get access to the battery. See Access Panels.
If the machine has a battery isolator, move the switch

to the OFF position then remove the key.
Remove the leads. Disconnect the earth (-) terminal
first.
Check the battery.
Remove covers A. Look at the level in each cell. The

electrolyte should be 6 mm (1/4 in) above the plates.
Top up if necessary with distilled water or de-ionized
water.
If the terminal is dirty, clean the post.
Se
2-3-4-6
rv
Connection
Do not top the battery up with acid. The electrolyte

could boil out and burn you.
ic
es
T3-019_4
Fig 267.
b If the terminal post is corroded and generates

white powder wash the terminal with hot water. If
considerable corrosion is detected, clean with a
wire brush or abrasive paper.
c
After cleaning, apply a thin coat of petroleum jelly

to the terminal.
Re-connect the leads. Connect the earth (-) terminal

last.
If the machine has a battery isolator, move the switch

to the ON position.
Close and lock the access panels.
220
Fig 268.
4
Refit battery.
Close and lock the access panels.
9821/1300-1
220
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Battery Isolator (If Fitted)
To disconnect the battery from the machine electrics a
battery isolator has been fitted.
!MCAUTION
Except in an emergency, do not use the battery
isolator to switch OFF the engine. Failure to comply
may result in damage to the electrical circuits.
INT-3-2-13
es
!MCAUTION
Before carrying out arc welding on the machine,
disconnect the battery and alternator to protect the
circuits and components. The battery must still be
disconnected even if a battery isolator is fitted.
rv
At the end of a working cycle or if the machine is being left

unattended, provided the lights are not required, the
battery must be isolated. Before attempting to start the
engine or use the machine electrics the battery isolator key
must be fitted and switched on.
Get access to the front grille. See Access Panels.
To isolate the battery turn the battery isolator key A in

an anti-clockwise direction B and remove. Keep the
key in a safe place and available for when the
machine is next required.
Se
To connect the battery insert the key A and turn in a

clockwise direction C.
Close and lock the front grille.
C
A
Fig 269.
ic
INT-3-1-13
221
9821/1300-1
221
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Jump Starting The Engine
The park brake should have been engaged when the

machine was last parked. If it is not engaged, engage
it now.
Do not use a battery if its electrolyte is frozen. To

prevent the battery electrolyte from freezing, keep the
battery fully charged.
Set all switches in the cab to off.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery or jump-start and

run the engine, the battery could explode.

When jump-starting from another vehicle, make sure

that the two vehicles do not touch each other. This
prevents any chance of sparks near the battery.
Set all the machine switches to their OFF positions
before connecting the external power supply. Even
with the starter switch set to off some circuits will be
energised when the external power supply is
connected.
Lower the loader shovel to the ground, if it is not

already there. It will lower itself under its own weight
when you operate the lever. Operate the lever
carefully to control the rate of descent. If your
machine is fitted with hose burst protection valves
you will not be able to lower the shovel. In this case
install the safety strut.
Connect the positive booster cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the machine battery. Connect the other
end of this cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster supply.
rv
Do not connect the booster (slave) supply directly

across the starter motor. Doing this by-passes the
neutral gear safety switch. If the machine is in gear, it
may 'runaway' and kill or injure bystanders.
2-2-3-4
es
Batteries produce a flammable gas, which is

explosive; do not smoke when checking the
electrolyte levels.
!MDANGER
ic
!MWARNING
T3-053
Connect the negative (-) booster cable to a suitable

point on the engine.
Start the engine.
Se
Use only sound jump leads with securely attached

connectors. Connect one jump lead at a time.
The machine has a negative earth electrical system.

Check which battery terminal is positive (+) before
making any connections.
Keep metal watch straps and jewellery away from the
jump lead connectors and the battery terminals - an
accidental short could cause serious burns and
damage equipment.
When the engine is running, there are rotating parts in

the engine compartment. Before disconnecting the
cables, make sure that you have no loose clothing
(cuffs, ties etc.) which could get caught in rotating
parts.
2-2-4-3
Disconnect the negative booster cable from the

engine. Then disconnect it from the booster supply.
Disconnect the positive booster cable from the

positive (+) terminal on the battery. Then disconnect
it from the booster supply.
Make sure you know the voltage of the machine. The

booster (slave) supply must not be higher than that of
the machine. Using a higher voltage supply will
damage your machine's electrical system.
!MWARNING
If you do not know the voltage of your booster (slave)

supply, then contact your JCB dealer for advice. Do
not attempt to jump-start the engine until you are sure
of the voltage of the booster (slave) supply.
4-2-2-3_1
222
9821/1300-1
222
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Fuses (Manual Controls)
Fuse Circuit
No.
Fuses
Always replace fuses with ones of correct ampere
rating to avoid electrical system damage.
8-3-3-5
The electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are

located in the side console underneath cover A. If a fuse
ruptures, find out why and rectify the fault before fitting a
new one.
B1
Instruments, Buzzer
B2
Front horn, Front washer/wiper
15
B3
Rear horn
7.5
B4
Heated seat, Cigar lighter, face level fan 15
B5
Rear washer/wiper
10
B6
Brake switch
10
B7(1)
Return to dig, Smooth ride system

(SRS)
B8
Rear working lights
25
B9
Headlights
20
B10
Front working lights
25
R8
R1
C1
Lights
7.5
C2
Hazard warning lights
15
C3
Beacon, Interior light
10
C4
Radio
C5
Thermostart
C6
Heater blower
30
C7
Ignition relay coils
C8
Main beam
15
C9
Fog light
C10
Dip beam
15
Se
R12
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Right hand side lights
rv
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Left hand side lights
A10
ic
Note: All the fuses are shown (including optional

equipment fuses). Your machine may not be equipped with
all the fuses shown.
A9
R13
R9
es
!MCAUTION
R3 R2
Fuse
Rating
711260-1
Fig 270.
(1) 10 Amp if Smooth Ride System (SRS) with Hose

Burst Protection Valves (HBPV) is fitted.
Table 10.
Fuse Circuit
No.
Fuse
Rating
Engine shut-off solenoid (ESOS)
10
A2
Auxiliary hydraulics
10
A3
Direction indicators
7.5
A4
Steer mode proximity switches
7.5
A5
Transmission
10
A6
Gear select - Forward/Reverse - Lock

up torque converter speed sensors (if
fitted)
A7
Transmission
10
A8
Brake lights
7.5
A1
223
9821/1300-1
223
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Fuses (Easy Controls / Advanced Easy

Controls)
Fuse
Rating
A5
Transmission
10
A6
Fuses
Always replace fuses with ones of correct ampere
rating to avoid electrical system damage.
Gear select - Forward/Reverse - Lock up 3

torque converter speed sensors (if fitted)
A7
Transmission
10
A8
Brake lights
7.5
8-3-3-5
A9
Left hand side lights
The electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are

located in the side console underneath cover A. If a fuse
ruptures, find out why and rectify the fault before fitting a
new one.
A10
Right hand side lights
B1
Instruments, Buzzer
B2
Front horn, Front washer/wiper
15
B3
Rear horn
7.5
B4
Heated seat, Cigar lighter, Face level fan 15
B5
Rear washer/wiper
10
B6
Brake switch
10
!MCAUTION
ic
Note: All the fuses are shown (including optional

equipment fuses). Your machine may not be equipped with
all the fuses shown.
B7
Return to dig, Smooth ride system (SRS) 5
B8
Rear working lights
B9
Headlights
20
B10
25
C1
Lights
7.5
C2
Hazard warning lights
15
C3
Beacon, Interior light
10
C4
Radio
C5
Thermostart
C6
Heater blower
30
C7
Ignition relay coils
C8
Main beam
15
C9
Fog light
C10
Dip beam
15
D1
Joystick Controls
20
D2
Seat position sensors
D3
PWM controller (ECU)
Fuse
Rating
D4
Seat position switches
D5
Excavator, Loader Changeover
15
10
D6
PWM Changeover (Extending Dipper,

Clamshovel)
10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Se
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
rv
(1)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fig 271.
Table 11.
Fuse Circuit
No.
A1
Engine shut-off solenoid (ESOS)
A2
Auxiliary hydraulics
10
A3
7.5
A4
Steer mode proximity switches
7.5
224
es
Fuse Circuit
No.
25
(1) 10 Amp if Smooth Ride System (SRS) with Hose

Burst Protection Valves (HBPV) is fitted.
9821/1300-1
224
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Link Box Fuses

To further protect the machine wiring harnesses and
electrical circuits, a fuse link box A is fitted as shown.
Remember to check the main circuit fuses as well as the
link box fuses shown on this page.
Hazard warning lights, Parking lights, 40 Amp

Face level fan
Wash and Wipe, Transmission,

indicators
50 Amp
Work lights, Fog lights, Brake lights
60 Amp
Ignition, Heater, Thermostart
50 Amp
Cold start grid heater (if fitted)
120 Amp
Hot drinks machine (if fitted, AEC

machine option only)
20 Amp
ic
es
Note: Additional optional fuses 5 or 6 may be fitted for cold

start or Hot Drinks machine.
Se
rv
2
C005140-2
Fig 272.
225
9821/1300-1
225
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Relays (Manual Controls)

The relays listed below are located in the side console
underneath cover A.
Note: All the relays are shown (including optional

equipment relays). Your machine may not be equipped
with all the relays shown.
Table 12.
Blank
Ignition 1
Bi-Directional 1
Bi-Directional 2
Hammer
Blank
Blank
Ignition 2
10
Blank
11
Neutral start
12
Main lights
13
Engine run
14
Stabiliser leg alarm 1
15
16
Park brake warning light
17
Rear horn
18
Hydraulic flow control
19
Instruments warning lights buzzer relay
20
21
Rear working lights
22
Boom overload alarm
23
High Flow / ECO mode
es
11 10
ic
5
12
15 14 13 12
23 22
21 20 19 18
Se
rv
17 16
C089200-1
Fig 273.
Note: There are additional relays located in the front

console B. Consult your JCB distributor for further
information.
226
Fig 274.
9821/1300-1
226
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Relays (Easy Controls / Advanced Easy

Controls)
The relays listed below are located in the side console
underneath cover A.
31
Shovel Reset
32
ECU cut-out
33
34
Note: All the relays are shown (including optional

equipment relays). Your machine may not be equipped
with all the relays shown.
Table 13.
34 33 32
Blank
Joystick control mode
Instruments warning lights buzzer relay
Ignition 1
Hammer, Bi-Directional change over 2
Hammer, Bi-Directional change over 1
Direction Indicators
Rear horn, Quickhitch change over
Ignition 3
10
Hammer
11
Boom Overload alarm
12
High Flow / ECO mode
13
Ignition 2
14
ECU Power
15
Neutral Start
16
Seat facing forward
17
Seat facing rear
18
Main lights
19
Engine Run
20
Front Working Lights
Fig 275.
21
Rear Working lights
22
Park Brake Warning Light
23
Rear Horn
Note: There are additional relays located in the front

console B. Consult your JCB distributor for further
information.
ic
es
13 12 11 10
rv
15 14
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
C089210
Se
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
LH Joystick pilot
25
Joystick PWM Changeover (Extending dipper,

Clam shovel)
26
Joystick Enable (Latching)
27
Joystick Enable (Not Latching)
28
PWM Changeover (Extending dipper, Clam shovel)
29
Excavator, Loader changeover (Auxiliary service)
30
Hydraulic Flow control
24
227
9821/1300-1
227
Routine Maintenance
Electrical System
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 276.
228
9821/1300-1
228
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Engine
Oil and Filter
Checking the Oil Level
1
Get access to the engine. Refer to Access Panels,

Engine Cover.
Check that the oil level is between the maximum and

minimum marks on the dipstick A.
es
!MWARNING
GEN-1-18
If necessary, add the recommended oil through filler

B to the maximum level.
Fit filler cap and dipstick, make sure that they are fully
inserted and tightened.
Fig 277.
Se
rv
ic
Do not exceed the correct level of engine oil in the

sump. If there is too much engine oil, the excess must
be drained to the correct level. An excess of engine oil
could cause the engine speed to increase rapidly
without control.
229
9821/1300-1
229
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Changing the Oil and Filter
Loosen and remove the filter housing drain plug E

and its 'O' ring J. Let the oil fully drain, then clean and
refit the drain plug with a new 'O' ring. Torque the
drain plug to 40-60Nm (30-44lbf ft).
T3-030_2
Drain the oil when the engine is warm as contaminants

held in suspension will then be drained with the oil.
Engine Cover.
Unscrew the filter canister F, use a chain wrench if

necessary.
Place a container of suitable size beneath the sump

drain plug C.
Clean the seal face of the filter head G.
Smear the seal H on the new filter canister F with

clean engine oil.
Screw the filter on until it just contacts the filter head.
10
Turn the filter at least a further 3/4 of a turn.
11
Through the top filler point, fill the engine with the
recommended oil to the MAX mark on the dipstick.
Refer to Checking the Oil Level. Wipe off any spilt
oil, refit the filler cap and make sure it is secure.
!MCAUTION
Oil will gush from the hole when the drain plug is
removed. Hot oil and engine components can burn
you. Keep to one side when you remove the plug.
13-3-1-15
Drain the engine oil.

a
Machine with a sump plug, remove the sump

drain plug C and its 'O' ring D. Let the oil drain out,
then clean and refit the drain plug with a new 'O'
ring. Torque the drain plug to 40-60Nm (30-44lbf
ft).
12
Operate the engine until the oil pressure low warning

light has extinguished. Check for oil leakage. When
the oil has cooled, check the oil level again, and if
necessary top up with clean engine oil.
Se
rv
b Machines with a drain valve, remove the dust cap

K from the sump drain port. Attach drain tube L.
With the free end of the tube in an oil container,
screw in the drain tube assembly to open the
valve.
ic
es
When all the oil has drained, unscrew the drain

tube assembly and fit the dust cap K.
C012110-1
Fig 278.
C012110-5
Fig 279.
Place a container of suitable size under drain plug E

to catch the oil. K Fig 279. ( T 230).
230
9821/1300-1
230
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Cooling System
Checking the Coolant Level
Visually check the coolant level daily.
Check the quality of the antifreeze mixture every year before the cold weather starts. Change it every two years.
!MWARNING
es
The cooling system is pressurised when the coolant is

hot. When you remove the cap, hot coolant can spray
out and burn you. Make sure that the engine is cool
before you work on the cooling system.

Engine Cover.
The coolant level should be between the MIN and the

MAX marks on coolant reservoir.
rv
Note: If the level in the expansion bottle is low, then

continue with steps 3 to 4.
ic
9-3-3-1_2
Carefully loosen cap A on the coolant reservoir. Let

any pressure escape before removing the cap. Fill
with pre-mixed water/antifreeze until it reaches the
correct level.
C007050-5
Fig 280.
Run the engine for a while to raise the coolant to

working temperature and pressure. Stop the engine
and checks for leaks.
Se
Note: To prevent air becoming trapped in the cooling

system, do not exceed the maximum fill-rate shown. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Capacities.
231
9821/1300-1
231
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Changing the Coolant
!MWARNING
The cooling system is pressurised when the coolant is
hot. When you remove the cap, hot coolant can spray
out and burn you. Make sure that the engine is cool
before you work on the cooling system.
Carefully loosen cap A on the coolant reservoir. Let

any pressure escape before removing the cap.
Place a container of suitable size beneath the

radiator.
Disconnect the bottom hose from the radiator.
Flush the system using clean water. After flushing,

reconnect the bottom hose to the radiator.
Use the recommended mix of clean, soft water and

antifreeze. Fill to the MIN level on coolant reservoir.
ic

Engine Cover.
Fig 281.
rv
es
9-3-3-1_2
Note: To prevent air becoming trapped in the cooling

system, do not exceed the maximum fill-rate shown. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Capacities.
Refit the filler cap. Make sure it is tight.
Run the engine for a while, to raise the coolant to

working temperature and pressure.
Se
Note: Make sure the cab heater control is in the hot

position. This will ensure the coolant mixture circulates
through the entire cooling system.
Stop the engine. Check for leaks. Check the coolant
level and top up if necessary.
232
9821/1300-1
232
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Front End Accessory Drive Belt
Inspecting the Drive Belt
Introduction
At the recommended service interval, visually inspect the

belt for damage.
The front end accessory drive belt (FEAD) drives the

alternator, water pump and the air conditioning
compressor (if fitted).
Get access to the drive belt. Refer to Front End

Accessory Drive Belt, Introduction.
Inspect the belt for cracks A, fraying B or missing

pieces C. K Fig 282. ( T 233).
T3-029
The belt is automatically kept in tension so will not need to

be adjusted.
!MWARNING
Fit a new belt as required. Refer to Changing the

Drive Belt.
es
Make sure the engine cannot be started. Disconnect

the battery before doing this job.
2-3-3-5
Turning the Engine

Do not try to turn the engine by pulling the fan or fan
belt. This could cause injury or premature component
failure.
0094
Open the engine cover. Refer to Access Panels,

Engine Cover.
Se
rv
To get access to the drive belt for maintenance:
ic
!MWARNING
763440-2
Fig 282.
233
9821/1300-1
233
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Get access to the drive belt. Refer to Front End

Accessory Drive Belt, Introduction.
Use a 16mm (5/8 in.) socket located on the hexagon

spigot nut D, carefully rotate the tensioner against the
spring force in direction E. Do not use excessive force
or the tensioner will be damaged.
Keep holding the tensioner against the spring force

and lift the belt off the tensioner pulley F.
Slowly release the spring force by rotating the

tensioner unit in the opposite direction.
Before fitting a new belt, check that the tensioner

roller and fan pulley rotate smoothly and that there is
no play in the bearings.
Fit the new drive

K Fig 282. ( T 233).
Use a 16mm (5/8 in.) socket located on the hexagon

spigot nut D, carefully rotate the tensioner against the
spring force in direction E. Do not use excessive force
or the tensioner will be damaged.
Keep holding the tensioner against the spring force

and lift the belt around the tensioner pulley F.
the
pulleys.
ic
around
Se
rv
belt
es
Changing the Drive Belt
234
9821/1300-1
234
Routine Maintenance
Engine
Air Filter
Changing the Air Filter Elements
!MCAUTION
The outer element must be renewed immediately if the
warning light on the instrument panel illuminates.
2-3-3-1
Note: Do not attempt to wash or clean the elements - they

must only be renewed.

Engine Cover.
Depress clips B and lift off cover C. Remove outer
element D. Take care not to tap or knock the element.
If the inner element E is to be changed, lift up pulls

and remove inner element E.
Clean inside the housing F, and cover C make sure

the air holes G are clear.
Check that the scavenge pipe (or dust valve if fitted)

is securely fitted and is in good condition L.
Insert the new elements E and D into the housing,

pushing them firmly in so that they are fully seated.
Fit cover C, secure with clips B.
Se
rv
ic
es
Note: A new inner element must be fitted at least every

other time the outer element is changed. As a reminder,
mark the inner element with a felt tipped pen each time the
outer element is changed.
D
C007020
C
T053980
Fig 283.
235
9821/1300-1
235
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Fuel System
Introduction
Water Separator and Engine Fuel Filter
!MWARNING
Introduction
To get access to the water separator A and engine fuel
filter B for maintenance:
1
INT-3-2-2_3
50 h

skin. Keep face and hands well clear of pressurised
fluid and wear protective glasses. If fluid penetrates
your skin, get medical help immediately.
rv
0177
ic
!MWARNING
!MCAUTION

Engine Cover.
es
Fuel
Se
Do not allow dirt to enter the system. Before

disconnecting any part of the system, thoroughly
clean around the connection. When a component has
been disconnected, always fit protective caps and
plugs to prevent dirt ingress.
Failure to follow these instructions will lead to dirt

entering the system. Dirt in the system will seriously
damage the systems components and could be
expensive to repair.
INT-3-3-12
!MCAUTION
C007470-3
Fig 284.
Running the engine with air in the system could

damage the fuel injection pump. After maintenance,
the system must be bled to remove any air.
2-3-3-11
236
9821/1300-1
236
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Draining the Water Separator and Engine Fuel
Filter
T3-075
Get access to the Water Separator and Engine Fuel

Filter. Refer to Water Separator and Engine Fuel
Filter, Introduction.
Drain off any water in the element A by turning tap B.
Drain off any water in the water separator bowl C by

turning tap D. Do not disconnect the electrical
connector E (if fitted).
If there is sediment in the bowl after draining, support

the bowl and release the locking ring F.
Wash the bowl in clean fuel.
Refit the bowl, secure in position with locking ring F.
Make sure that the electrical connector E is correctly

fitted.
Se
C040110-1
Fig 285.
rv
Important: Ensure the seal is seated correctly before

refitting the bowl. Refer to Changing the Water Separator
Pre-Filter.
ic
es
If there is water in the fuel or if the cab warning light

illuminates, drain the water separator and engine filter as
detailed.
C048590-1
Fig 286.
237
9821/1300-1
237
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Changing the Water Separator Pre-Filter
Get access to the Water Separator. Refer to Water
Separator and Engine Fuel Filter, Introduction.
Drain and remove the water separator bowl C. Refer

to Draining the Water Separator and Engine Fuel
Filter.
To remove the filter element A, release locking ring B

and discard element.
Fit new element and secure in position with locking

ring B.
Refit the bowl, secure in position with locking ring B.
es
T3-076
Make sure that the electrical connector E is correctly

fitted.
C007030-5
Fig 287.
Se
rv
ic
Important: Ensure the seal D is seated correctly before

refitting the bowl.
238
9821/1300-1
238
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Cleaning Water Separator Pump (if fitted)
T3-077
If the priming pump does not operate or if a fuel blockage

is suspected, the hand priming pump can be removed and
the pump and sedimenter cleaned.
A
B
Note: To carry out this procedure you will need a strap

wrench to loosen and tighten locking ring A.
Thoroughly clean the outside of the filter housing and

around the filter head.
To remove the pump assembly, using a suitable strap

wrench release locking ring A, keep the assembly
pressed down to contain the spring once the locking
ring is free.
Carefully remove the pump assembly, take care not to

lose spring B.
Pull out diaphragm C and clean as required using

clean fuel.
Remove any debris in the water sedimenter and inlet

connectors as required.
Make sure seal D is positioned correctly, lubricate

diaphragm C with clean engine oil. Taking care not to
damage diaphragm C, refit diaphragm and spring B.
Secure assembly in position, taking care not to cross

thread locking ring A, tighten to finger tight.
With strap wrench, tighten locking ring A a further 1/4

of a turn.
10
Bleed the system and check for leaks. Refer to

Bleeding the System.
es
ic
Get access to the Water Separator. Refer to Water

812300
Fig 288.
Se
rv
239
9821/1300-1
239
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Changing the Engine Fuel Filter Element
Mechanical Fuel Injection System
Thoroughly clean the outside of the filter housing and

around the filter head.
Loosen the drain tap A and allow the fuel to drain into
a suitable container.
Mark the pipes prior to removal to ensure they are

refitted in the correct position. Press fuel coupling
release button B and disconnect fuel lines C and D.
Release the filter strap retaining screw E and lift the

filter clear.
Install new filter element F. Make sure that the black

dot G is aligned with the locating hole H in the strap.
Torque tighten the filter strap retaining screw E to 24
Nm (17.7 lbf ft).
Reconnect the fuel lines C and D.

Bleed the fuel system. Refer to Bleeding the
System.
C007090
Fig 289.
Se
ic
rv
Get access to the Engine Fuel Filter. Refer to Water

es
T3-078
240
9821/1300-1
240
Routine Maintenance
Fuel System
Bleeding the System

Mechanical Fuel Injection System
Disconnect the fuel line B at the injection pump.
Operate the fuel lift pump priming button C until air

free fuel exits from the fuel filter outlet.
Reconnect fuel line B.
The engine is now ready to start. If the engine runs

smoothly for a short time and then begins to run
roughly, leave at idle until it runs smoothly.
es
To bleed the engine fuel filter A carry out the following:
If the engine continues to run roughly, check again for

air in the fuel system.
ic
If the fault persists contact your nearest JCB dealer.
763990-3
Se
rv
Fig 290.
241
9821/1300-1
241
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic System
!MCAUTION
Introduction
8-3-4-10
!MWARNING
immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions will lead to dirt

entering the system. Dirt in the system will seriously
damage the systems components and could be
expensive to repair.
INT-3-3-12
Releasing the Hydraulic Pressure
P2-3006
INT-3-1-10_3
!MWARNING
es
The temperature of the hydraulic oil will be high soon

after stopping the engine. Wait until it cools (less than
40C) before beginning maintenance.
Do not allow dirt to enter the system. Before

disconnecting any part of the system, thoroughly
clean around the connection. When a component has
been disconnected, always fit protective caps and
plugs to prevent dirt ingress.

ic
!MWARNING
Operate the controls to remove the hydraulic

pressure from the service hose lines:
For manually operated services, operate the
controls (several times) of the service(s) to be
disconnected.
rv
Hydraulic Pressure
the hoses are open.
Se
INT-3-1-11_2
b For electrical and servo operated services, turn

the starter key to the ON position.
!MCAUTION
Using incorrect fluid could damage the system. See

Fluids, Capacities and Lubricants for the correct fluid.
The fluid can harm your skin. Wear rubber gloves.
Cover cuts or grazes.
2-3-5-1_2
242
Press the relevant console switch (to make the

relevant service active). Refer to Operation
Section.
Operate the controls (several times) of the
service(s) to be disconnected.
Important: To release the hydraulic pressure from the

electrical and servo operated services the battery must be
connected while you operate the controls.
3
Carefully remove the hydraulic tank filler cap to vent

residual tank hydraulic pressure. Refer to Hydraulic
Tank Cap.
Install the hydraulic tank filler cap.
9821/1300-1
242
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Hydraulic Tank Filler Cap

The hydraulic tank breather (and filter) forms an integral
part of the hydraulic tank filler cap B. Replace the cap (and
breather filter) with a new one at the recommended
interval.
The cap incorporates a side mounted barrel lock that is
operated by the ignition/door key. It is important to note
that seal C must be in good condition and correctly
installed in the cap.
es
Fit the Cap

Insert the key and turn anticlockwise D, screw the cap on
until resistance is felt then turn a further quarter of a turn,
turn the key clockwise E and remove the key. With the key
removed the cap will rotate and can not be undone.
Insert the key and turn anticlockwise D, unscrew the cap.
Se
rv
Note: The key must be inserted in the cap when removing

and fitting.
ic
Remove the Cap
329760-3
Fig 291.
243
9821/1300-1
243
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Oil and Filter
Changing the Filter Element
!MWARNING
Checking the Fluid Level

1

Look at the fluid level in the sight glass A. The level

should be at the red mark (or above).
K Fig 292. ( T 244).
!MCAUTION
If the fluid level is low, remove filler cap B and

replenish with recommended hydraulic oil as
required.

Remove the element assembly

a
Remove screws A. Remove the cover plate B and

gasket C.
ic
12-5-1-4
es
INT-3-1-10_3
If the fluid is cloudy, then water or air has

contaminated the system. This could damage the
hydraulic pump. Contact your JCB Distributor
immediately.

immediately.
b Remove spring D.
Hold handle E and pull the element assembly

from the hydraulic tank.
rv
Remove the element from its canister.
Se
Hold canister F.
b Hold handle E and rotate the element G 90 anticlockwise.

c
Pull on handle E, the element G should separate

from its canister F. Discard the old element.
d Remove and discard seal H.

e
Clean the inside of canister F.
Note: New machines are fitted with a 5 micron filter

element which must be replaced at the first 100 hour
service with a 10 micron filter element.
Fig 292.
244
Fit the new element.

a
Fit a new seal H.
b Make sure that seal J is fitted in the new element.

c
9821/1300-1
Push the element G into its canister F and rotate

the element 90 to lock it into position. Check that
244
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
the element has locked into position by pulling on
handle E.
d Install the element assembly in the hydraulic tank.
e
Fit spring D and gasket C.
Fit cover plate B and tighten screws A to 24 Nm

(17.7 lbf ft).
H
F
Se
B
C
D
rv
ic
es
g Check oil level and replenish as required through

filler. Fit and tighten the filler cap. K Hydraulic
Tank Filler Cap ( T 243).
Fig 293.
245
9821/1300-1
245
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Changing the Suction Strainer
Remove hydraulic tank filler cap.K Hydraulic Tank

Filler Cap ( T 243).
Place a container beneath the hydraulic tank to catch

the oil, remove drain plug and drain the hydraulic
tank. Make sure the container is large enough to hold
the tank contents. K Fluids, Lubricants and
Capacities ( T 186).
Undo clips A and disconnect the hydraulic suction

hose.
Using a 65mm A/F spanner unscrew suction strainer

B and discard.
Fit a new filter assembly B, torque tighten to 15-20

Nm (11-15 lbf ft).
Reconnect suction hose. Make sure the clips A are

positioned 180 apart.
Refit drain plug, torque tighten to 100 Nm (74 lbf ft).
Refill hydraulic tank, fit and tighten the filler cap.

K Hydraulic Tank Filler Cap ( T 243).
es
ic

rv
A
334050-2
Fig 294.
Se
246
9821/1300-1
246
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Changing the Pilot Filter Element (Easy
Controls)
Unscrew end cap A.
Remove element with associated seals and discard.
Fit new element.
Refit cap A, torque tighten to 25Nm (18lbf ft).
Run the engine and check for leaks.
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 295.
247
9821/1300-1
247
Routine Maintenance
Hydraulic System
Hose Burst Protection Valves (If fitted)

Checking the Hose Burst Protection Valves
Introduction
P5-3001_2
The hose burst protection valves 'lock' to prevent

uncontrolled movement of the ram pistons if hydraulic
pressure fails or a hose bursts. The valves are mounted
directly on the rams.
!MWARNING
es
Keep people clear of the machine while you do these

checks.
5-3-4-2
Important: Ensure the machine is parked on firm level

ground before carrying out the following procedures.
Loader Arm Rams

Raise the loader arms fully.
Stop the engine.
Using the control levers, try to lower the loader. Push

the levers fully to the 'lower' position. If there is any
movement, get the hydraulic system checked by your
JCB dealer.
Se
rv
ic
Check each movement in turn.
Boom and Dipper Rams
Raise the boom to about 45. Raise the dipper to the

horizontal.
Stop the engine.
Using the control levers, try to lower the boom and

dipper. Push the levers fully to the 'lower' position. If
there is any movement, get the hydraulic system
checked by your JCB dealer.
248
9821/1300-1
248
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Transmission
Gearbox
Start then operate the engine at low idle for four

minutes. The delay allows the oil to fill the filter,
pump, torque converter, oil cooler and hoses.
Switch OFF the engine and remove the starter key.

Engine Cover.
es
Before you complete a check of the oil level, you must

wait as shown on the instructional label A.
Check that the oil level is between the end of the

dipstick and maximum mark on the dipstick B.
Add oil as necessary. Fill through the dipstick tube to

maximum dipstick level. Use only the recommended
oil.
C007000-2
Fig 296.
Se
rv
ic
Note: The instructional label shows the time in seconds.
249
9821/1300-1
249
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Changing the Oil and Filter
Synchro Shuttle Transmission
The transmission oil should be drained through the suction
strainer aperture to flush out any particles which fall off the
strainer during its removal.
1

Engine Cover.
Disconnect the battery. K Battery Disconnection/

Connection ( T 220).
es
!MCAUTION
When the strainer is removed, oil will gush out. Keep
to one side when you remove the strainer.
Place a container, of suitable size beneath the suction

strainer. Remove bolts D. Pull out the strainer E and
its gasket F. Allow the oil to drain into the container.
Be aware that the oil may be hot.
Clean the strainer with a suitable solvent. Follow the
solvent manufacturer's instructions on safety.
rv
ic
2-3-4-1
Fit the strainer E and a new gasket F. Apply JCB

Threadlocker and Sealer to bolts D before fitting and
tightening them. Torque tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7
lbf ft).
Unscrew and remove the filter B. Fit the new filter:

a
Se
D
C
Smear seal C with transmission oil.
Fig 297.
b Screw the filter on until it just contacts the filter

head.
c
Fill the system with new oil through the dipstick/filler.

Do not fill past the top mark on the dipstick.
Turn the filter at least another 3/4 of a turn.
Note: Fit only a genuine supplied JCB filter, otherwise

damage to the system may be incurred through
contamination.
250
9821/1300-1
250
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Powershift Transmission
The transmission oil should be drained through the suction
strainer aperture and not the drain plug, to flush out any
particles which fall off the strainer during its removal.
1

Engine Cover.
Disconnect the battery. K Battery Disconnection/

Connection ( T 220).
F
E
es
!MCAUTION
When the strainer is removed, oil will gush out. Keep
to one side when you remove the strainer.
Place a container, of suitable size beneath the suction

strainer. Remove bolts D. Pull out the strainer E and
its gasket F. Allow the oil to drain into the container.
Be aware that the oil may be hot.
Clean the strainer with a suitable solvent. Follow the

solvent manufacturer's instructions on safety.
rv
Fit the strainer E and a new gasket F. Apply JCB

Threadlocker and Sealer to bolts D before fitting and
tightening them. Torque tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7
lbf ft).
Unscrew and remove the filter B. Fit the new filter:

a
Se
ic
2-3-4-1
Smear seal C with transmission oil.
b Screw the filter on until it just contacts the filter

head.
c
Fill the system with new oil through the dipstick/filler.

Do not fill past the top mark on the dipstick.
Fig 298.
Turn the filter at least another 3/4 of a turn.

contamination.
251
9821/1300-1
251
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Axles (All Wheel Steer Machines)
Changing the Differential Oil
Checking the Differential Oil Level
The axle oil is used to lubricate the brake components and

cool the brake plates.
!MCAUTION
The oil level must be checked with the machine level,
otherwise a false indication of the amount of oil will be
given.
16-3-5-3_2
It is important that the oil is changed regularly as specified

in the service schedule - the lubricating properties of the oil
will reduce as a result of brake wear.
Consult your JCB distributor for advice if necessary.


Clean the area around fill/level plug A, then remove

the plug and its sealing washer. Oil should be level
with the bottom of the hole. Add recommended oil if
necessary.
Clean and refit the plug and its washer.
Place a container of suitable size beneath plug B to

catch the oil. Remove the drain plug B and its seal.
Allow oil to drain out. The drain plug is magnetic.
Wipe it clean. (Metallic particles should be carefully
removed). Fit drain plug B and its washer. Tighten to
79 Nm (60 lbf ft).
Fill with recommended oil through fill/level hole A.

Clean and refit plug A and its seal. Tighten to 79 Nm
(60 lbf ft).
Se
rv
ic
es
Fig 299. Front
Fig 300. Rear
252
9821/1300-1
252
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Checking the Hub Oil Levels
Changing the Hub Oil

T3-011_2
Check each hub separately.
Change the oil in each hub separately
Park the machine on level ground with the OIL LEVEL

mark horizontal. There is a tolerance of 5 mm (0.2 in)
above or below the horizontal.
Set the machine level, with the wheels just clear of the
ground. Manually rotate the wheels to bring the OIL
LEVEL mark on the hubs to the vertical position, with
the fill/level plugs 302-C at the bottom.
Engage the park brake. Set the transmission to

neutral. Lower the attachments to the ground. Stop
the engine and remove the starter key.
Drain the oil:

a
Clean the area around the fill/level plug 301-C.

Remove the plug. Oil should be level with the bottom
of the hole. If necessary, add the recommended oil.
Clean the plug before refitting it.
Place a container of suitable size beneath plug

302-C to catch the oil.
!MCAUTION
es
removed. Keep to one side when you remove the plug.
2-3-4-2
ic
b Remove fill/level plugs 302-C. Allow time for the

oil to drain out.
Set OIL LEVEL marks to the horizontal.

Fill the hubs with recommended axle oil, through
the fill/level holes 302-C. Oil should be level with
the bottom of the fill/level hole.
rv
Se
b Clean and refit fill/level plugs 302-C.
Fig 301.
253
Fig 302.
9821/1300-1
253
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
Axles (Two Wheel Steer Machines)
Changing the Oil
The front axle procedures are the same as described on

the previous pages (all wheel steer machines). Refer to the
following procedures for checking and changing the oil on
the rear axle.
The axle oil is used to lubricate the brake components and

cool the brake plates.
!MCAUTION
It is important that the oil is changed regularly as specified

in the service schedule - the lubricating properties of the oil
will reduce as a result of brake wear.
Consult your JCB distributor for advice if necessary.
1
Clean the area around fill/level plug A, then remove

the plug and its sealing washer. Oil should be level
with the bottom of the hole. Add recommended oil if
necessary.
Clean and refit the plug and its washer.
Se
rv

ic
16-3-5-3_2
Park the machine on level ground so that the 'OIL

LEVEL' mark on one hub is at the bottom.
K Fig 304. ( T 254). Engage the park brake. Set the
transmission to neutral. Lower the attachments to the
ground. Stop the engine and remove the starter key.
es
The oil level must be checked with the machine level,

otherwise a false indication of the amount of oil will be
given.
Place a container of suitable size beneath fill level

plug C to catch the oil. Remove the fill level plug C
from the hub. Allow the oil to drain out. The drain plug
is magnetic. Wipe it clean. (Metallic particles should
be carefully removed). Clean and refit the hub fill level
plug C.
Position the other wheel of the rear axle so that the

'OIL LEVEL' mark on its hub is at the bottom. Repeat
step 2.
Place a container of suitable size beneath the drain

plug B to catch the oil.
Fig 303.
254
Fig 304.
9821/1300-1
254
Routine Maintenance
Transmission
!MCAUTION
removed. Keep to one side when you remove the plug.
2-3-4-2
Remove the drain plug B. Allow the oil to drain out.

The drain plug is magnetic. Wipe it clean. (Metallic
particles should be carefully removed). Clean and
refit the drain plug B.
Remove fill level plug A. Fill the axle with the specified
quantity and recommended type of oil. Clean and refit
fill level plug A.
Se
rv
ic
es
255
9821/1300-1
255
Routine Maintenance
Tyres and Wheels
Tyres and Wheels

Tyre Inflation
in a qualified tyre mechanic. The tyre mechanic should use

a tyre inflation cage and the correct equipment to do the
job.
T3-066
!MWARNING
An exploding tyre can kill. Inflated tyres can explode if

over-heated or over-inflated. Follow the instructions
given when inflating the tyres. Do not cut or weld the
rims. Use a tyre/wheel specialist for all repair work.
2-3-2-7_2
Prepare the wheel.

Before you add air to the tyre, make sure it is correctly
fitted on the machine or installed in a tyre inflation
cage. K Fig 305. ( T 256).
Prepare the equipment.

a
!MWARNING
Store with care to ensure that they cannot fall and
cause injury.
13-3-1-7_1
Decreasing the machines stability

Higher tyre temperatures
Se
Excessive strain of the tyre fabric
b Use an air hose fitted with a self-locking air chuck

and remote shut-off valve.
Add the air.
rv
Always try to maintain your tyre pressure to the

recommended settings. Using your machine with underinflated tyres means:
Use only an air supply system which includes a

pressure regulator. Set the regulator no higher
than 1.38 bar (20 psi) above the recommended
tyre pressure. For recommended tyres and
pressures for your machine, see Specfications,
Tyre Sizes and Pressures.
ic
Wheels and tyres are heavy. Take care when lifting or

moving them.
es
Introduction
More bulging of the sidewalls

Shortens the tyres life.
Make sure that the air hose is correctly connected

to the tyre valve. Clear other people from the area.
Stand behind the tread of the tyre while adding the
air.
b Inflate the tyre to the recommended pressure. Do

not over-inflate.
Using the machine with over inflated tyres is dangerous:
It causes excessive tensile loads in the fabric: this

makes a tyre more susceptible to cuts and punctures.
Do not cut or weld on the rim of an inflated tyre.

After checking or amending the tyre pressure always
replace and secure the valve cap.
Always deflate the tyre before removing foreign obstacles

from the tread.
Procedure
T3-067_2
These instructions are for adding air to a tyre which is

already inflated. If the tyre has lost all its air pressure, call
256
9821/1300-1
A089570-1
Fig 305.
256
Routine Maintenance
Tyres and Wheels
Wheel Nuts
Checking the Wheel Nut Torques
T3-014_3
!MWARNING
If, for whatever reason, a wheel stud is renewed, all the

studs for that wheel must be changed as a set, since
the remaining studs may have been damaged.
2-3-2-8
es
On new machines, and whenever a wheel has been

removed, check the wheel nut torques every two hours
until they stay correct.
Every day, before starting work, check that the wheel nuts
are tight.
Table 14.
Rear
Nm (lbf ft)
Nm (lbf ft)
680 (500)
680 (500)
Se
rv
Front
ic
Tighten the wheel nuts (in a diagonal sequence) to the

torque value shown.
257
9821/1300-1
257
Routine Maintenance
Wheel Alignment
Wheel Alignment
Introduction
Electronic Steer Mode Selector
Failure to align the steering before selecting the

required steer mode will cause the machine to steer
incorrectly.
Stop the machine. Select the neutral position on the

forward/reverse lever.
Use the switch A to select 2-wheel steer B.

Sensors on the axles prevent the steer mode from
changing until the wheels pass through the 'straight
ahead' position. Because of this, there will be a short
period when the indicator lights do not agree with the
switch position.
5-2-6-7
!MWARNING
Failure to phase 4-wheel steer at least once per day
may mean a reduction in steering effectiveness.
es
!MDANGER
T3-038
The indicator lights will still show 4-wheel steer.
5-2-1-6
At least once per day.
If having difficulty in steering.
After travelling for 15 miles (24 km) or more on the

road (in 2-wheel steer).
Operate the machine until the rear wheels straighten

up.
ic
The steering must be re-phased:
When the rear wheels straighten up the machine will

go into 2-wheel steer. The indicator lights will show
when 2-wheel steer has engaged.
Use the switch A to select 4-wheel steer C.
rv
Turn the steering wheel left then right until the

indicator light shows that 4-wheel steer has engaged.
Se
The front and rear wheels are now back in phase.
762190-2
H
258
C B
Fig 306.
9821/1300-1
258
Routine Maintenance
Wear Pads
Wear Pads
Extending Dipper Wear Pads
Inspecting the Top Wear Pads

P2-3010_2
The extending dipper wear pads are bolt-on replaceable

items. They support and guide the inner dipper section
during extension and retraction. The following procedures
explain how to inspect, and where applicable, adjust the
pads.
es
There is a front and rear set of pads, each set comprises

top wear pads A and bottom wear pads B.
The bottom wear pads B are adjustable and take up the

wear on both the top and bottom pads. They must also be
replaced with new pads when the top pads are changed.
K Adjusting the Bottom Wear Pads ( T 260).
rv
New wear pads A and B must be replaced as a set and

fitted by a qualified service engineer.
ic
The top wear pads A are not adjustable and must be

replaced with new pads once they have worn to their limit.
K Inspecting the Top Wear Pads ( T 259).
Se
259
C005980-3
Fig 307.
Park the machine on level ground. Engage the park

brake and put the transmission in neutral. Position the
boom and dipper. K Fig 307. ( T 259). Retract the
extending dipper D. Make sure that the bucket is clear
of the ground and the dipper is supported.
Renew the pads when, or before, they are worn down

to the depth of the chamfer as shown at E. If the pads
are worn near to their limit then inspect them more
frequently than recommended in the Service
Schedules. To avoid damage to the dipper or wear
pad make sure the pads are fitted the correct way
round as shown at J.
Item
C
9821/1300-1
Table 15. Torque Values

Nm (lbf ft)
49 (36)
259
Routine Maintenance
Wear Pads
rv
ic
es
Adjusting the Bottom Wear Pads
795380-3
Fig 308.
Park the machine on level ground. Engage the park

brake and put the transmission in neutral. Support the
boom and dipper. K Fig 308. ( T 260). Stop the
engine.
Clean the sliding faces of the inner dipper with a
suitable solvent.
Start the engine. Retract the extending dipper D.

Make sure that the bucket is clear of the ground and
the dipper is supported. Stop the engine.
With grease, mud etc. removed from the sliding faces

visually check the gap between inner dipper and top
wear pad A, as shown at G. The gap should be no
greater than 1.5 mm (1/16 inch).
Tighten locknuts K. Visually re-check the gap is

no greater than 1.5mm (1/16 inch) as shown at G,
d Make sure that the inner dipper seats central to

the sides of the outer dipper.
Note: Remember to alternate sides each time an

adjustment is made. When all the threads on the adjuster
L are flush with locknut K and the clearance is greater than
1.5 mm (1/16 inch), then wear pads A and B must be
replaced as a set and fitted by a qualified service engineer.
6
When the adjustments have been completed, apply

Waxoyl to the runners of the inner dipper.
Item
If the gap is greater than 1.5mm (1/16 inch) then

adjust as follows:
Se
Table 16. Torque Values

Nm (lbf ft)
100 (74)
Undo adjuster locknuts K.
b Screw in adjusters L equally on both sides to

achieve a 1.5mm (1/16 inch) gap.
260
9821/1300-1
260
Routine Maintenance
Wear Pads
Stabiliser Legs (Sideshift Machines

Only)
Wear Pad Adjustment
When pads A and C have worn to a minimum thickness of

0.5 mm (0.020 in.) they must be replaced with new ones.
To replace the pads, the stabiliser inner leg must be
removed (contact your JCB Distributor).
It is important to note that lower pads C are designed to
take most of the 'loading' during stabiliser leg operation, as
a consequence these pads must be checked regularly for
wear.
Remove and clean away all debris that may have built
up in stabiliser cavities.
As a guide, there should be approximately 1mm

(0.039 in.) float between the stabiliser inner and outer
leg.
Before adjusting the clearance make sure that the leg

is raised clear of the ground but not fully retracted.
To adjust the clearance, screw pad B fully in until it

just touches the inner leg and then back the pad off by
one quarter of a turn.
Note: Over-tightening the adjustable pad B will lock the

pad in position, it will not be possible to back the pad off. If
this should happen, operate the stabiliser leg as normal but
be aware that pads B and C will wear more rapidly.
Se
rv
When replacing pads, it is recommended that the complete

lower set of pads are replaced (items B and C). The top
pads should be inspected and replaced as required.
es
Upper wear pads A (4 off) are fitted to the top of the inner
leg as shown. The upper pads are available in 3 sizes and
are colour coded; 5mm (green); 6mm (red) and 7mm
(blue). Lower wear pads comprise adjustable pads B (2 off)
and fixed pads C (2 off).
ic
The wear pads support and guide the inner leg section.
They ensure that during extension and retraction the inner
leg is kept central and has a minimum amount of 'float'.
Note: It is very important that the wear pads are adjusted

at the correct service intervals, as the inner leg could
contact the outer leg and scoring could occur. Scoring will
dramatically reduce wear pad life.
261
273120-5
Fig 309.
9821/1300-1
261
Routine Maintenance
Powered Sideshift
Powered Sideshift
Chain Adjustment
Check the chain tension which should be 5 to 10 mm

(0.19 to 0.39 in) deflection A at the mid point. The
tension should be equal for all chains.
K Fig 310. ( T 262).
Park the machine on firm level ground, engage the

parking brake and set the transmission to neutral.
Lower the loader arms to the ground.
If adjustment is required, slacken locknuts C and

adjust on nuts B as required, tighten locknuts C on
completion.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the opposite pair of chains.
Position the carriage centrally and rest the bucket on

the ground, remove the starter key.
Note: When there is no thread left for adjustment fit new

chains.
The chain tension must be checked. Refer to the Service

Schedule for the correct intervals.
Checking the Chain Tension

1
Operate the carriage side to side several times and

re-check the deflection.
Se
rv
ic
es
262
326830-C2
Fig 310.
9821/1300-1
262
Routine Maintenance
Windscreen Washer
Windscreen Washer
Checking the Level
1

Open the engine cover. K Access Panels ( T 212)
Remove
the
washer
K Fig 311. ( T 263).
Fill the windscreen washer bottle with a suitable

liquid. The liquid should contain a de-icing fluid to
prevent freezing. Do not use engine coolant
antifreeze.
Install the washer bottle cap A.
A.
es
cap
ic
bottle
Se
rv
263
T053750
Fig 311.
9821/1300-1
263
Routine Maintenance
Fire Extinguisher (if fitted)
Fire Extinguisher (if fitted)

T3-022
Checking the Fire Extinguisher

Check the fire extinguisher for damage, security and signs
of leaking.
Check that the gauge A indicates that the extinguisher is
charged i.e. the needle is in the GREEN segment.
es
Note: If the needle is in or very near the RED segment at

either end of the gauge, the extinguisher must be serviced
or replaced.
Make sure the safety pin B is fitted and secure.
Se
rv
ic
The extinguisher should be serviced every 12 months by a

suitably qualified person.
Fig 312.
264
9821/1300-1
264
Introduction
T4-002_3
!MWARNING
Practice using attachments off the job before working with

them for the first time.
2-4-5-2_1
!MCAUTION
If you have an attachment which is not covered in the
Operator Manual do not install it, use it or remove it
until you have obtained, read and understood the
pertinent information. Install attachments only on the
machines for which they were designed.
If your machine needs the hydraulic system adapting to

facilitate the use of auxiliary attachments, you must consult
your distributor. Only suitably qualified personnel must reroute hydraulic hoses.
All optional attachments will have limits on their operation.
i.e. lifting capacity, speeds, hydraulic flow rates, etc.
Always check in the literature supplied with the attachment
or in the Specification section of this manual. Some
specification limits may also be displayed on the
attachments Data/Rating Plate.
rv
5-5-1-1_2
es
The use of non-approved attachments could invalidate

your warranty.
JCB attachments are designed and manufactured

specifically to suit the machine's hydraulic system,
mounting arrangements and safe load requirements.
Attachments which are not designed for use with this
machine may cause damage and create safety hazards for
which JCB cannot be held responsible. In addition the
machine's warranty and any other legislative compliance
may be affected by the use of non JCB approved
attachments.
ic
Use only the JCB approved attachments that are

specified for your machine. Operating with nonspecified attachments can overload the machine,
causing possible damage and machine instability
which could result in injury to yourself or others.
Se
A wide range of optional attachments are available to

increase the versatility of your machine. Only JCB
approved attachments are recommended for use with your
machine. Consult your JCB Distributor for the full list of
approved attachments available.
This part of the manual includes general information on
attachment operation and instructions for installation and
removal of attachments.
!MCAUTION
Some attachments may contact parts of the machine

when in the fully folded position. Take extra care to
avoid damage to the machine.
3-4-1-4
Some attachments are supplied complete with instructions

on safety, installing and removing, operation and
maintenance. Read and fully understand the information
before fitting, using and servicing the attachment. If there
is anything you do not understand, ask your JCB
Distributor.
Before using any attachment, read again Working With

The Machine in the Operation section and consider how
the attachment is going to affect operational safety. With
the attachment fitted, there may be changes in the
machine's centre of gravity or overall dimensions. This
could have an effect on, for example, machine stability, the
gradients on which it is safe to operate or the safe distance
from power lines.
265
9821/1300-1
265
Attachments For Your Machine
Attachments For Your Machine

Attachments will help increase the productivity of your
machine, for more information contact your JCB
Distributor.
Remember, do not operate attachments until you have
read and fully understand the attachment operating
instructions.
es
Important: Do not operate or work with attachments until

the machine hydraulic oil has reached its normal working
temperature.
Se
rv
ic
Note: Patch Planer is NOT suitable for use with this

machine.
266
9821/1300-1
266
Connecting/Disconnecting Hydraulic Hoses

T4-004_2
Connecting the Hydraulic Hoses
!MWARNING
immediately.
Make the machine safe. Refer to Routine

Maintenance,
Prepare
the
Machine
for
Maintenance.
Vent the hydraulic system. Refer to Routine

Maintenance, Releasing the Hydraulic Pressure.
If necessary, remove the blanking caps.
Check the hoses and adaptors for damage. Refer to

Routine Maintenance, Checking for Damage.
Connect the hoses.
!MWARNING
If the hoses have quick releases couplings, refer to

Quick Release Couplings.
a
Make sure that the hose is not twisted. Pressure

applied to a twisted hose can cause the hose to
fail or the connections to loosen.
rv
Hydraulic Pressure
the hoses are open.
ic
INT-3-1-10_3
es
Introduction
INT-3-1-11_2
Se
Some attachments are hydraulically powered. The

following procedures show how to connect and disconnect
the hydraulic hoses safely.
b Make sure that the hose does not touch hot parts.
High ambient temperatures can cause the hose to
fail.
c
Make sure that the hose does not touch parts

which can rub or cause abrasion.
d Use the hose clamps (where possible) to support

long hose runs and keep the hoses away from
moving parts, etc.
H
267
T037400
Fig 313.
9821/1300-1
267
Disconnecting the Hydraulic Hoses

1

Maintenance,
Prepare
the
Machine
for
Maintenance.
Vent the hydraulic system.

Refer to Routine
Disconnect the hoses.
T037420
To allow for length changes when the hose is

pressurised, do not clamp at the bend. The curve
absorbs the change.
If the hoses have quick releases couplings, then refer

to Quick Release Couplings.
es
Fig 314.
Check the hoses and adaptors for damage. Refer to

Routine Maintenance, Checking for Damage.
If necessary, install the blanking caps
Check for leaks.
ic
Start the engine.
rv
b Operate the related control to increase the

pressure in the hydraulic system.
c
T037410
Fig 315.
Check for leaks.
a
d Check for indications of leakage at the hose

connections. Correct, as necessary.
Se
Stop the engine then remove the starter key.
Start the engine.
b Operate the related control to increase the

pressure in the hydraulic system.
c
Stop the engine then remove the starter key.
d Check for indications of leakage at the hose

connections. Correct, as necessary.
268
9821/1300-1
268
Quick Release Couplings
by dirt in the coupling or physical damage due to

abuse.
2-4-1-15
Flat face quick release couplings allow the operator to

remove and install attachments swiftly and efficiently.
Generally, your machine pipework will be fitted with a
female coupling A and a male coupling B. The optional
attachment hoses will also be fitted with a female coupling
A and a male coupling B. K Fig 316. ( T 270).
The quick release couplings should be trouble free and
relatively easy to connect and disconnect, provided they
are kept clean and used correctly. The recommendations
listed below should always apply when using flat face
quick release couplings.
Avoid damage to the coupling faces. Burrs and

scratches cause damage to the seals and cause
leaks. They can also impede connection and
disconnection of the couplings.
Periodically lubricate the internal locking balls on the
female half of the coupling with silicone grease.
Essential Don'ts
Never attempt to reconnect using a damaged half

coupling as this will destroy the seals in the mating
half and necessitate replacement of both halves.
Do not leave the coupling where it may be run over by
a vehicle or otherwise crushed - this will distort the
sleeve and prevent connection and disconnection.
Never try to turn the sleeve when the coupling is
disconnected since this will cause the locking ball to
jam under the locking sleeve and damage the
coupling.
rv
Finally, please read the correct fitting and releasing

procedures before you install or remove any optional
attachment fitted with quick release couplings.
When fitting couplings, only apply the spanner or

grips to the hexagon and nowhere else.
es
The external surfaces of the couplings must be clean

before connecting or disconnecting. Ingress of dirt
will cause fluid leaks and difficulty in connecting or
disconnecting. You could be killed or seriously injured
by faulty Quick Release Couplings.
Connect and disconnect new couplings two or three

times to work the PTFE seals. Sometimes a new
coupling will stick if the seal has not been worked.
ic
!MWARNING
Essential Do's
Se

hoses.
Never try to strip the coupling down, there are no user

serviceable parts. If the coupling is damaged it should
be replaced with a new one. See coupling guides for
a reference.
Always wipe the two mating faces clean before

connecting.
Use caps and plugs when the couplings are
disconnected.
Always align the external locking ball (if used) with the
notch in the locking sleeve and then pull the locking
sleeve back fully to disconnect.
If a coupling sticks, first check that pressure has been

released. Ensure the locking ball and notch in the
locking sleeve are aligned, pull back the sleeve and
twist the couplings apart. Sticking is normally caused
269
Never hit the centre poppet of the coupling to try and

release locked in pressure. This can cause
irreparable damage to the coupling and serious injury.
When fitting couplings, never clamp on the sleeve of
the female or nose of the male - this will cause
distortion and/or damage.
Never subject the couplings to external forces,
especially side load. This can reduce the life of the
coupling or cause failure.
Never allow the torsional forces transmitted from
hoses to unscrew/screw together couplings.
Never use a coupling as a plug.
Do not connect and disconnect with pressure in the
line unless the coupling type is specifically designed
to do so.
9821/1300-1
269
Remove any residual hydraulic pressure trapped in

the service line hose.
Wipe the two faces of the male and female couplings

and make sure they are clean.
Make sure that ball C in the female coupling is located

in one of its slots.
Fit the male coupling into the female coupling.
Where applicable, rotate sleeve E half a turn and

make sure that the locking ball C does not align with
the slot D.
es
Connecting Quick Release Couplings
Disconnecting Quick Release Couplings

Remove any residual hydraulic pressure trapped in
the service line hose.
Where applicable, align the slot D with ball C.
Pull back sleeve E to release the coupling.
Se
rv
ic
C007100-1
Fig 316.
270
9821/1300-1
270
Directly Mounted Backhoe Attachments
Directly Mounted Backhoe Attachments

Installing Directly Mounted Backhoe
Attachments
Various auxiliary attachments can be used to increase the
productivity and versatility of your machine. The same
principles apply to all attachments. Your JCB Distributor
will gladly answer any queries.
The descriptions below describe how to install attachments
directly mounted to the backhoe. The removal procedure
is a reversal of the installation procedure.
!MWARNING
B-2-1-8
rv
Note: This job is easier done by two people - one to

operate the controls and one to line up the pivots.
ic
or injured.
Set the attachment flat on level ground as shown. Use

safe and correct lifting equipment to move the
attachment.
Position the machine:
B
D
Se
es
Position the machine so that the attachment

mounting area on the dipper aligns with the
attachment.
Fig 317.
Fit the hoses. K Connecting/Disconnecting

Hydraulic Hoses ( T 267).
b Engage the park brake.

c
Disengage the drive.
Operate the controls to line up hole A in the dipper

with holes B on the attachment. Insert pivot pin C, fit
washer G and secure it with lynch pin D.
K Fig 317. ( T 271).
Operate the controls to line up the hole F in the tipping

link with the remaining pair of holes in the attachment.
Insert pivot pin C, fit washer G and secure it with lynch
pin D.
271
9821/1300-1
271
Auxiliary Attachment Operation (If Fitted)
Auxiliary Attachment Operation (If Fitted)

Auxiliary Return Hose Options
There are two options of auxiliary hydraulic circuit
available, one option has a 3/4 inch hydraulic return line,
the other option has a 1 inch hydraulic return line. The
differences can be identified in the illustrations below:
1 inch. K Fig 318. ( T 272).
3/4 inch. K Fig 319. ( T 272).
es
!MCAUTION
Using an attachment, which is not able to accept the
back pressure generated could damage the
attachment.
Due to the back pressure of up to 12 bar (174 lbf/in) in the

3/4 inch return line, the service is unsuitable for any motor
driven attachment, i.e. compactor plate, patch planer or
older hammers.
Se
rv
Before using any attachment with the 3/4 inch return

circuit, check to make sure the attachment is suitable for
the back pressure generated.
ic
A-2-1-5
Fig 319. 3/4 inch return
Fig 318. 1 inch return
272
9821/1300-1
272
Loader Quickhitch (If Fitted)

Loader Quickhitch Carriage
Introduction
The Loader Quickhitch carriage is fitted to the loader arms

as shown. The Quickhitch permits rapid removal and
installation of the shovel (and other attachments). If forks
are used with the Quickhitch, please take note of the
warning below.
es
Installing the Loader Quickhitch Carriage

Position the machine so that the loader arms

mounting area aligns with the Quickhitch mounting.
Engage the park brake and set the transmission to
neutral.
!MWARNING
Fig 320.
Se
or injured.
B-2-1-8
ic
Set the Quickhitch carriage on firm level ground. Use

safe and correct lifting equipment to move the
Quickhitch carriage.
Operate the controls to line up holes in the link with

the holes in the Quickhitch carriage. Insert pivot pin A
and secure in position with bolt B and nut C.
K Fig 320. ( T 273).
rv
Operate the controls to line up holes in the loader

arms with holes in the Quickhitch carriage, shown at
D. Insert pivot pin A and secure in position with bolt B
and nut C. K Fig 320. ( T 273).
Stop the engine.
b Operate the auxiliary attachment control lever E to

release any hydraulic pressure trapped in the
system. K Fig 321. ( T 274).
c
Remove any blanking plugs and fit the Quickhitch

carriage hoses to the machine couplings as
shown at F. The hoses should not be crossed
over.
Note: Use anti-seize paste on the pivot pin before fitting.
Connect the Hydraulic Hoses (Hydraulic Type

Quickhitch Only):
273
9821/1300-1
273
es
Removing The Loader Quickhitch Carriage
Se
rv
Removal of the Quickhitch carriage is a reversal of the

installation procedure. Pay particular attention to safety
notices.
ic
Fig 321.
274
9821/1300-1
274
Loader Quickhitch Attachments
Introduction
Various auxiliary attachments can be used with the
Quickhitch. The following procedures show a shovel being
installed/removed. If forks are used with the Quickhitch,
please take note of the warning below.
Remove any attachment fitted to the machine.

Quickhitch
Attachments
K Removing
(Powered) ( T 276).
Position the machine so that the Quickhitch carriage
is parallel to the attachment. Lower the loader arms to
bring pivot shaft A below the level of hooks B.
K Fig 322. ( T 275).
1. Manual Controls
es

2. Easy Controls
3. Advanced Easy Controls
Important: Make sure the locking pins are correctly

engaged.
ic
Make sure that the park brake is engaged and the

transmission is set to neutral.
b Press and hold the rocker switch J, move the

auxiliary control lever / switch (1, 2 or 3) to F to
engage the Quickhitch locking pins. When the
indicator pins K are fully engaged, release the
rocker switch J and auxiliary control lever (1, 2 or
3). K Fig 323. ( T 275).
Installing the Quickhitch Attachments (Powered)
Engage the lock pins:
rv
Se
F
G
Fig 323.
Engage the attachment:
Drive the machine slowly forward, stop the

movement when pivot shaft A touches the
attachment.
F
2
T044290
Fig 322.
If an attachment, is hydraulically operated, connect

the hydraulic hoses. K Connecting/Disconnecting
b Engage the park brake and set the transmission

to neutral.
c
Raise the loader arms so that pivot shaft A

engages with hooks B. K Fig 322. ( T 275).
d Use the loader controls to roll the attachment back

(as if gathering a load). Stop the movement when
the locking holes in the carriage align with those in
the attachment. K Fig 323. ( T 275).
275
9821/1300-1
275
Removing Quickhitch Attachments (Powered)
to withdraw pivot shaft A from hooks B.

K Fig 325. ( T 276)
Note: Deposit Quickhitch attachments on firm level ground

whenever possible. This will make later refitting easy and
safe.
If an attachment is hydraulically operated, disconnect

the hydraulic hoses. K Connecting/Disconnecting
Disengage the lock pins:

a
es
b Carefully reverse the machine away from the

attachment.

transmission is set to neutral.
Press and hold the rocker switch J, move the

auxiliary control lever (1, 2 or 3) to G to disengage
the Quickhitch locking pins. When the indicator
pins K are fully extended, release the rocker
switch J and auxiliary control lever (1, 2 or 3).
K Fig 324. ( T 276).
rv
ic
b Start the engine.
1. Manual Controls
2. Easy Controls
Se
3. Advanced Easy Controls
Fig 325.
2
G
F
G
G
Fig 324.
4
Disengage the attachment:

a
276
Tilt the carriage forward slowly (as if dumping a

load) to withdraw the lower end of the carriage
from the attachment. Then lower the loader arms
9821/1300-1
276
Installing Quickhitch Attachments (Manually)
Set the attachment on firm level ground. Use safe and

correct lifting equipment to move the attachment.
Remove any attachment fitted to the machine.

Quickhitch
Attachments
K Removing
(Powered) ( T 276).
Position the machine so that the Quickhitch carriage

is parallel to the attachment. K Fig 322. ( T 275).
Lower the loader arms to bring pivot shaft A below the
level of hooks B.
Fig 326.
Drive the machine slowly forward, stop the

movement when pivot shaft A touches the
attachment.
Engage the lock pins:

a

transmission is set to neutral. Stop the engine and
remove the starter key.
rv
b Engage the park brake and set the transmission

to neutral.
ic
es
Various auxiliary attachments can be used with the

Quickhitch. The following procedures show a shovel being
installed/removed. If forks are used with the Quickhitch,
please take note of the warning below.
Raise the loader arms so that pivot shaft A

engages with hooks B. K Fig 322. ( T 275).
Secure lever E in position using the pin.
Se
d Use the loader controls to roll the attachment back

(as if gathering a load). Stop the movement when
the locking holes in the carriage align with those in
the attachment.
b At the carriage, move the manual locking lever E

to engage the locking pins H. If a second person
is to do this job, keep your hands and feet away
from the controls until he is clear of the machine.
K Fig 327. ( T 277).
277
H
T045070
Fig 327.
9821/1300-1
277
!MWARNING

immediately.
If an attachment is hydraulically operated, disconnect

the
hydraulic
hoses
D
as
follows:K Fig 328. ( T 278).
a

INT-3-1-10_3
b Operate the auxiliary attachment control lever,

this will release any hydraulic pressure trapped in
the system.
Disconnect the hydraulic hose(s). K Connecting/

Disconnecting Hydraulic Hoses ( T 267).
es
If an attachment, is hydraulically operated, connect

the
hydraulic
hoses
D
as
follows:
K Fig 328. ( T 278).
Operate the auxiliary attachment control lever,
this will release any hydraulic pressure trapped in
the system.
Start the engine and operate the attachment for a

few minutes to build up the hydraulic pressure.
rv
ic
b Fit the attachment hoses to the carriage quick

release
couplings.
K Connecting/
d Switch off the engine and check for leaks - take

note of the safety warning.
Se
Removing Quickhitch Attachments (Manually)
Note: Deposit Quickhitch attachments on firm level ground

whenever possible. This will make later refitting easy and
safe.
1

!MWARNING
Disengage the lock pins:a

b At the carriage, move the manual locking lever E

to disengage the locking pins. If a second person
is to do this job, keep your hands and feet away
from the controls until he is clear of the machine.
K Fig 329. ( T 279).

immediately.
Fig 328.
INT-3-1-10_3
278
9821/1300-1
278
es
H
T045070
Fig 329.
5-5-1-3_1
Disengage the attachment:

a
Start the engine.
Fig 330.
rv
Keep other people clear of the area while you

disengage the attachment. If a second person is to be
involved in this procedure, ensure that he keeps clear
of the machine and attachment until signalled by you
to proceed.
ic
!MWARNING
Carefully reverse the machine away from the

attachment.
Se
b Tilt the carriage forward slowly (as if dumping a

load) to withdraw the lower end of the carriage
from the attachment. Then lower the loader arms
to withdraw pivot shaft A from hooks B.
K Fig 325. ( T 276).
279
9821/1300-1
279
Backhoe Quickhitch - Mechanical Type (If Fitted)

The Backhoe Quickhitch is fitted to the dipper as shown.
The Quickhitch permits rapid removal and installation of
the bucket (and other attachments). It is mechanically
operated and does not require any hydraulic connections.
Read the following pages for instructions on how to
correctly install and remove the Quickhitch assembly and
its attachments.
es
Installing The Quickhitch
or injured.
B-2-1-8
ic
!MWARNING
Fig 331.
Operate the controls to line up holes in the dipper with

holes on the Quickhitch. Insert pivot pin B and secure
in position with bolt C, collar D and nut E.
rv

Set the Quickhitch on firm level ground. Use safe and
correct lifting equipment to move the Quickhitch.
K Fig 331. ( T 280).
Position the machine so that the Quickhitch mounting

area on the dipper aligns with the Quickhitch. Engage
the park brake and set the transmission to neutral.
K Fig 331. ( T 280).
Se
280
D
E
Fig 332.
9821/1300-1
280
4
Operate the controls to line up the holes in the tipping

link F with holes in the Quickhitch. Insert pivot pin G
and secure in position with bolt H, collar J and nut K.

a
Put the Quickhitch in the position shown. Make

sure that the lock pin F has been REMOVED.
K Fig 334. ( T 281).
ic
es
H
G
K
Fig 333.
Fig 334.
b Use the backhoe controls to engage slot B onto

the pivot pin C of the attachment.
K Fig 335. ( T 281).
Se
Removing The Quickhitch
rv
Removal of the Quickhitch is a reversal of the installation

procedure. Pay particular attention to safety notices.
Installing Backhoe Quickhitch

Attachments
Note: Various auxiliary attachments can be used with the

Quickhitch. The following procedures show a bucket being
installed/removed.
Set the attachment on firm level ground. Use safe and

correct lifting equipment to move the attachment. If
there is already an attachment fitted to the machine
Backhoe
Quickhitch
then.
K Removing
Attachments ( T 282).
Position the machine so that the Quickhitch mounting

area aligns with the attachment pivot pins. Engage
the park brake and set the transmission to neutral.
281
9821/1300-1
Fig 335.
c
Use the backhoe controls and roll the Quickhitch

forward. Stop the movement when latch hook D
281
has fully engaged
K Fig 336. ( T 282).
on
pivot
pin
E.
es
Fig 336.
d Fit the latch hook locking pin F. Make sure that the
latch
hook
has
fully
engaged.
K Fig 334. ( T 281).
If the attachment is hydraulically operated, connect
the hydraulic hose(s).K Connecting/Disconnecting
If the attachment is hydraulically operated,

disconnect the hydraulic hose(s).K Connecting/
Disengage the attachment. Make sure that the lock

pin F has been REMOVED. K Fig 338. ( T 282).
Insert a bar into the hole of the latch hook H.

K Fig 338. ( T 282).
rv
ic
Fig 337.
Se
Removing Backhoe Quickhitch

Attachments
Park the machine on firm level ground. Engage the

park brake and set the transmission to neutral.
Position the attachment so that it is approximately

150
mm
(6
inches)
from
the
ground.
K Fig 337. ( T 282).
282
Fig 338.
9821/1300-1
282
!MWARNING
The attachment will roll forward when released. Stand
clear and to one side when releasing the attachment.
2-4-4-1
Apply a downward pressure on the bar to release the

pivot pin E from the latch hook. K Fig 338. ( T 282).
e
Slowly roll the Quickhitch and raise the dipper arm

simultaneously to release slot B from pivot pin C.
K Fig 339. ( T 283).
rv
ic
es
Rest the attachment on the ground.
Se
Fig 339.
283
9821/1300-1
283
Shovel - Forks (If Fitted)

Safety and Control
Preparing the Forks for Use
!MWARNING
Each fork weighs approximately 26 kg (57 lb). Take
care when swinging them over the shovel.
Position the 6-in-1 shovel approximately 150 mm (6

in) off the ground and slightly rolled forward.
Remove lynch pin B and fork retaining pin A and slide

the forks to the ends of the fork mounting rails.
K Fig 340. ( T 284).
The forks project in front of the machine. Drive

carefully when the forks are in the operating position.
es
If you use the forks and the loader shovel at the same
time you could overload the front of the machine. Do
not use the forks while there is material in the shovel.
2-4-2-4_2
The forks are operated by the loader control lever.
Se
Driving Up and Down Gradients
rv
Always operate the controls slowly and carefully when

using the forks. Space the forks as wide as possible for the
load. Drive slowly and carefully when the forks are loaded.
Keep the forks low to the ground and tilted up at the front
when travelling with a load.
ic
If the forks are tilted downwards, the load can slip off
and cause an accident. Keep loaded forks tilted
upwards.
To ensure maximum traction do the following when driving

on a gradient.
Drive an unladen machine forward down a gradient and in
reverse up a gradient.
Drive a laden machine forward up a gradient and in

reverse down a gradient.
284
Fig 340.
9821/1300-1
284
!MWARNING
Each fork weighs approximately 26kg (57lb). Take care
when swinging them over the shovel.
Roll the loader shovel forward so that the forks are

allowed to hang freely. K Fig 342. ( T 285).
Adjust the width setting of the forks to suit the load.
2-4-2-11
Daily Maintenance
Manually lift the forks over the shovel until the fork
carriage plate rests on the shovel.
Keep a grip on the fork arm, allow the arm to lower
under its own weight until the heel of the fork rests
against the clam blade.
Clean with the rest of the machine.
Check for damage.
Grease (if necessary) the fork mounting rails D. Use

JCB MPL Grease. K Fig 342. ( T 285).
Fit fork retaining pins A and lynch pins B.

K Fig 340. ( T 284).
es
!MWARNING
Fig 341.
Se
2-4-2-12
rv
With the forks locked in the 'ready for use' position,

opening the clam and rolling the shovel back quickly
will throw the forks over the back of the shovel. Do not
use the clam and shovel to throw the forks over the
back of the shovel, otherwise you could cause injury
and/or damage to personnel and equipment. Always
manually lift the forks over the shovel. When using the
forks, operate the controls slowly and carefully.
ic
Note: Fork retaining pin A and lynch pin B must be fitted

before using the forks (as shown at C), otherwise, in
extreme positions, it is possible for the fork heels to be
trapped in the clam.
Preparing For Road Travel
Remove the lynch pins B and retaining pins A.
Swing each fork back over the shovel and engage it

in its stowage bracket.
Fit the retaining pins A and the lynch pins B.

K Fig 341. ( T 285).
Preparing For Site Travel
Unless using the forks to carry a load, put the forks in the
stowage position as detailed above.
Fig 342.
Adjust The Fork Spacing

1
Raise or lower the loader arms to bring the forks

approximately horizontal.
285
9821/1300-1
285
Tool Carrier and Forks (If Fitted)
!MWARNING
Safety and Control
Forks are heavy. Take care when spacing forks or

folding back the forks.

using the forks. Space the forks as wide as possible for the
load. Drive slowly and carefully when the forks are loaded.
Keep the forks low to the ground and tilted up at the front
when travelling with a load.
0002
Manually lift the forks over until the fork carriage plate
rests on the ground. To prevent loss, replace retaining
pin B and locking pin A.
Driving Up and Down Gradients
Remove locking pin D and retaining pin C, roll the

hitch back, fit fork retaining pin C and locking pin D to
lock the forks in position. K Fig 344. ( T 286).
To ensure maximum traction do the following when driving

on a gradient.
Drive an unladen machine forward down a gradient and in
reverse up a gradient.
rv
Preparing the Forks for Use
ic
Drive a laden machine forward up a gradient and in

reverse down a gradient.
es
The forks are operated by the loader control lever.
Remove the shovel. K Removing Quickhitch

Attachments (Powered) ( T 276).
Roll the hitch forward, remove locking pin A and fork

retaining pin B. K Fig 343. ( T 286).
Fig 344.
Se
286
Fig 343.
9821/1300-1
286
Adjust the Fork Spacing
Preparing for Road Travel
Raise or lower the loader arms to bring the forks

approximately horizontal. K Fig 345. ( T 287).
Roll the hitch forward so that the forks are allowed to

hang freely.
Loosen clamp F, adjust the width setting of the forks

to suit the load, then tighten clamp.
!MWARNING
Forks are heavy. Take care when spacing forks or
folding back the forks.
0002
Swing each fork back. To prevent loss, replace

retaining pin C and locking pin D.
Roll the hitch forward, remove locking pin A and fork

retaining pin B. K Fig 343. ( T 286).
Position the forks until they align with the stow

brackets, manually lift the forks over until in the stow
position.
es
ic
Remove locking pin D and fork retaining pin C.

K Fig 344. ( T 286).
Fit fork retaining pin B and locking pin A.
Preparing for Site Travel
rv
Unless using the forks to carry a load, put the forks in the
road travel position as detailed above.
Preparing for Shovel Operation
Se
Put the forks in the road travel position as detailed above.
Fig 345.
Fit the shovel. K Installing the Quickhitch Attachments

(Powered) ( T 275).
Check for damage.
Grease (if necessary) the fork mounting rails. Use

JCB MPL Grease.
Daily Maintenance
287
9821/1300-1
287
Hammer (If Fitted)
Hammer (If Fitted)

Hammer Operation (Manual and Easy
Control Machines)
OFF
Important: In countries complying to EN474 make sure

you have the decal JCB IMPACT PROTECTION on your
rear window, and the rear window is closed before starting
any hammer operations.
ON
es
B
T009090-3
Fig 347.
rv
The procedure details the engine speeds and hydraulic

speed control switch position required to operate hammers
with varying hydraulic flow requirements.
ic
T037230-1
Fig 346.
If you have any queries concerning hammer operation,

consult your local JCB distributor.
Fit the hammer. K Directly Mounted Backhoe

Attachments ( T 271).
Connect
hydraulic
hoses.
K Connecting/
Sideshift machines only, clamp the kingpost

assembly to the cross rails. Refer to Operation,
Kingpost Clamps.
Lock the seat in the rear facing position.
Se
!MCAUTION

hydraulic flow or hydraulic back pressure could
damage the attachment or reduce the performance
capability.
2-4-5-10
N
M
T050000-8
Fig 348. Switch Locations
Hammer Mode Switch
Flow Switch (ECO / LO)
Note: High flow / Low flow is selected using the ECO / LO

switch, ECO = High Aux, LO = Low Aux
6
The hammer rocker switch M is a two position switch.
Check the hammer flow and back pressure

requirement. This can be found in the hammer owner
operator manual, specifications section.
To determine the engine rpm use.
288
9821/1300-1
288
Hammer (If Fitted)
7
Explanation of how to use the table.K Table 17.

( T 289).
a
The flow rates and back pressure are the

maximum for a given engine speed and ECO / LO
rocker switch position.
D
E
b Find the flow rate and back pressure most

applicable to your hammer.
Select the ECO / LO switch position that is most
suitable for your hammer.
Return Line
Back
Pressure
(bar)
1500
LO
47 -53
8.2
1500
ECO
80 - 100
13.0
1800
LO
56 - 63
9.7
1800
ECO
96 - 120
16.2
2000
LO
63 - 70
10.5
2000
ECO
106 - 133
18.3
LO
69 - 77
2340 (Flight)
LO
73 - 82
T039550-22
Fig 349.
rv
2200
ic
Table 17.
ECO/LO
Flow to
Switch
Breaker
position
(Litre per
min.)
Engine
Speed (rpm)
es
11.6
12.7
Se
Note: Do not exceed the maximum back pressure limit

specified in the hammer manual. K Table 17. ( T 289).
Using the excavator controls, position the hammer as

required.
Set the engine hand throttle lever E to the required

engine rpm.
10
Press down the floor mounted switch D to operate the

hammer. K Fig 349. ( T 289).
11
To prevent inadvertent operation of the hammer,

select hammer rocker switch to position A when not
in use. K Fig 347. ( T 288).
289
9821/1300-1
289
Hammer (If Fitted)
High and Low Flow Attachments

(Advanced Easy Control Machines)
Attachments fitted to the backhoe are operated by either a

high flow of hydraulic fluid or a low flow of hydraulic fluid.
On machines fitted with the appropriate hydraulic hoses
and pipework, the operator has the option of operating a
high flow attachment or a low flow attachment. However,
notice that hoses and pipework may have to be manually
re-coupled.
With rocker switch in position 3 the high flow option

(120 litres per min.) is activated. To operate the
attachment press and hold switch G.
Make sure that the rocker switch is in the correct position

to suit the type of attachment fitted, this is especially so
when operating a low flow attachment.
C
1
es
For further information. K Auxiliary Return Hose

Options ( T 272).
Low Flow
This circuit provides hydraulic flow in both directions.
Low or High Flow
T039550-53
Fig 350. Advanced Easy Control Machine
In this option the hydraulic flow is single direction.
rv
Hammer Information
Auxiliary attachments that operate with a high flow rate of

hydraulic fluid are:
Patch Planer; Compactor.
ic
Low flow is selected using the rocker switch at 2. Operate

the attachment with thumb switch C.
It is permissible to use the new type Hammer with high flow

but the engine rpm must be restricted as listed.
1
Se
Auxiliary attachments that operate with a low flow rate of

hydraulic fluid are:
80 litres/minute - 1200 rpm.

100 litres/minute - 1400 rpm.
Hammer (New type painted Black).
!MCAUTION
Using a high flow of hydraulic fluid to operate a low

flow optional attachment could damage the
attachment. Make sure that the control switch is in the
low flow position (switch not pressed down) to
operate low flow attachments.
2-4-1-10
With the rocker switch in position 1 the circuit is

isolated.
With the rocker switch in position 2 the low flow option

(80 litres per minute) is activated. To operate the
attachment press and hold switch G.
290
9821/1300-1
290
Hammer (If Fitted)

Maintenance,
Prepare
the
Machine
for
Maintenance.
Vent the hydraulic system. Refer to Routine

From underneath the machine, unscrew the filter

element A and discard.
Smear the seal on the new filter element with

hydraulic oil. Screw on the element until it touches the
filter housing and then tighten a further half turn.
Run the engine and check for leaks.
Se
rv

contamination.
ic
es
Changing the 1 inch (Diameter) Return

Line Filter (If Fitted)
T038300
Fig 351.
291
9821/1300-1
291
Bi-Directional and Hammer Circuits (If fitted)
If you have any doubts or queries concerning auxiliary

attachment operation please consult your JCB distributor.
Procedure
1
Back Pressure When operating a single acting

attachment such as a hammer/breaker
(in hammer mode) the back-pressure
on the attachment is often a limiting
factor. K Fig 352. ( T 292) shows the
back pressure against oil flow which will
be exerted at the 1coupler C2.
K Fig 354. ( T 293).
Bi-directional and hammer circuits operate in two

different modes to suit the attachment being used.
The two modes are bi-directional and hammer they
provide different characteristics and attachments
must only be used in the correct mode setting. First
determine which mode is suited to the attachment you
are intending to use.
Note: The values are approximate, if in

doubt please consult your JCB
distributor.
es
The following procedure details the method for mounting

and operating attachments using the bi-directional and
hammer circuit.
30.0
Check your attachments pressure and flow

requirements and limitations and make sure the
circuit is suitable for use with your attachment.
ic
10.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
20.0
40.0
60.0
80.0
100.0
120.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
Oil Flow (Litres per minute)

T050040-2
Fig 352. Back pressure (bar) at C2 v Oil Flow Hammer

mode setting (Litres per minute)
20
In both modes feed flow is determined

by three factors:
25
Backpressure (bar)
Feed Pressure In both modes the feed pressure is

limited to 207Bar. ARVs may be
changed if this limit is not suitable for
your attachment. Please consult your
JCB distributor with regards to changing
ARVs.
Feed Flow
15.0
Se
20.0
rv
Bi-Directional Mode For double acting

attachments (i.e. feed flow is required in both
directions). Examples of this include jaw buckets,
augers and tilting buckets.
Backpressure (bar)
25.0
Hammer Mode - For single acting attachments (i.e.

feed flow is only required in one direction). Examples
of this include hammers/breakers and patch planers.
15
10
a. Pump size
b. Engine speed
c. Flow mode setting
292
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
Oil Flow (US Gallons per minute)
T050040-3
Fig 353. Back pressure (bar) at C2 v Oil Flow Hammer

mode setting (US Gallons per minute)
9821/1300-1
292
c
Switch OFF the machine and then turn the ignition

only ON.
Note: Do not switch the engine ON.

d With the ignition ON, switch the machine into bidirectional mode, K Fig 355. ( T 294), and
K Fig 357. ( T 294).
Switch the flow switch into High Flow
K Fig 356. ( T 294). Once in the correct modes
actuate the bi-directional thumb roller in both
directions 6 times, hold in each position for 1 to 2
and
seconds
K Fig 358. ( T 294)
K Fig 359. ( T 295).
es
Connect the hydraulic hoses (make sure the feed and

return lines are fitted correctly for single acting
attachments) - Refer to Quick Release Couplings,
Optional Attachments (9811/5200).
Lock the operator seat in the rear facing position.
ic
!MCAUTION
C2
rv
C1

hydraulic flow or hydraulic back pressure could
damage the attachment or reduce the performance
capability.
2-4-5-10
T050010-1
C1
Quick Release Coupler Feed line when in

hammer mode.
C2
1Quick Release Coupler Return line when in

hammer mode.
Once suitability of the circuit to run the attachment

has been established the auxiliary attachment(s) can
be fitted. Refer to Directly Mounted Backhoe
Attachments, Optional Attachments (9811/5200).
Set the hydraulic oil flow switch to the required

position for the attachment. K Fig 356. ( T 294). For
flow switch N location. K Fig 357. ( T 294).
Set the hand throttle E to the required engine RPM for

the attachment, the attachment is now ready for
operation. The controls for use are as follows:
a
Before you connect or disconnect the hydraulic

couplers, Make sure you Vent the system
pressure.
Switch the engine ON.
b Fully retract the boom and dead head the ram for
ten seconds to purge the hydraulics.
293
Set the system to the correct mode for operation

using the mode switch. K Fig 355. ( T 294). For
mode switch M location. K Fig 357. ( T 294).
Se
Fig 354. Quick Release Coupler Connection Points
Manual Controls K Fig 358. ( T 294).
b Easy Controls K Fig 359. ( T 295).

Note: To prevent inadvertent operation of the auxiliary
attachments when not in use, set the mode switch to the
OFF position, K Fig 355. ( T 294). This will make sure
that the flow to the other excavator services is not being
limited by the Bi-Directional and Hammer system.
9821/1300-1
293
T050000-4
Fig 355. Mode Switch
N
X
Hammer mode. (For use with single

acting attachments).
OFF.
Bi-Directional mode. (For double acting

attachments).
ic
T050000-8
Fig 357. Switch Locations
Mode Switch
Flow Switch
Se
ECO
rv
es
LO
T050000-6
Fig 356. Flow Switch

High flow.
Low flow
E
T050030

D
Foot Button (used to operate the attachment in

Hammer mode)
Engine hand throttle
Scroll Button (used to operate the attachment in

Bi-Directional mode)
es
E
T050040-1
Se
rv
ic
Fig 359. Easy Controls
295
9821/1300-1
295
Hydraulic Tool Circuit (H.T.C) (If fitted)

To allow the use of hand held tools, the machine is fitted
with a B.H.T.M.A. Class 'C' hydraulic circuit (20 litres/min.
at 138 bar), only tools to this standard should be fitted.
Quick release couplings A and B, to which the tools
connect, are mounted as shown in the illustration.
HTC
!MWARNING
es
Hydraulic Pressure
the hoses are open.
Connecting the Hand Held Tool

Maintenance,
Prepare
the
Machine
for
Maintenance.
rv
ic
INT-3-1-11_2
Make sure that the hydraulic tool circuit switch (item

C) is in the OFF position. K Fig 360. ( T 296).
Se
!MCAUTION
T039550-48
Fig 360.
The springs inside the couplings are strong.

Considerable force is required to engage them.
Ensure that the couplings have fully engaged.
2-4-1-16
!MWARNING
Ensure that the hydraulic tool circuit is disabled

before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hand
held tool hoses.
2-4-1-18
Connect the hand tool quick release couplings to the

machine couplings A and B. K Connecting/
Fig 361.
296
9821/1300-1
296
Operating The Tool
!MWARNING
Do not move the machine when the hydraulic tool
circuit is in use.
Make sure the transmission is in neutral. Start the

engine and use the hand throttle to increase the
engine speed to 1500 r.p.m.
Press the hydraulic tool circuit enable switch C, to the

ON position. K Fig 360. ( T 296).
Operate the hand held tool in accordance with the

relevant tool Operator Manual.
es
2-4-1-17

Maintenance,
Prepare
the
Machine
for
Maintenance.
rv
!MWARNING
ic
Disconnecting the Hand Held Tool
Ensure that the hydraulic tool circuit is disabled

before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hand
held tool hoses.
2-4-1-18
Disable the hydraulic tool circuit, make sure that the

hydraulic tool circuit switch C is in the OFF position
and the engine stopped. K Fig 360. ( T 296).
Operate the hydraulic hand tool a few times to release

any pressure trapped in the hoses.
Disconnect the hand tool quick release couplings.

Hydraulic
K Connecting/Disconnecting
Hoses ( T 267).
Se
297
9821/1300-1
297
Hose Reel (If fitted)
Hose Reel (If fitted)

Location on Machine
Using the Hose Reel
The Extendable Hose Reel connects into the existing hand

held tool circuit.
Note: The hose reel works on a ratchet mechanism to

prevent it from retracting unintentionally. Always hold the
hose until the ratchet has engaged. Never release the
hose to retract under its own power.
rv
ic
es
Note: Never attempt to move the machine if the hose is not

fully retracted.
T051710-5
Se
Fig 362.
The following procedure details the method for mounting

and operating the Hose Reel.
If you have any doubts or queries concerning the hose reel

operation please consult your JCB dealer.
298
T051710-6
Fig 363.
Extending the hose from the reel

Grip the end of the hose firmly, pull the hose out of the reel
to the required length. Check that the ratchet has engaged
before you release the hose.
Retracting the hose into the reel

Grip the end of the hose firmly and pull to release the
ratchet. Maintain a firm grip and control the speed of
retraction as the hose pulls back into the reel.
9821/1300-1
298
Side Tip Shovel (If Fitted)

Safety Decals
Illegible or missing decals can have serious
consequences. Replace safety decals that are missing or
damaged.
Table 18.
Definition
Data plate.
Warning, Applicable to 2CX Airmaster machines only.
Warning, Machine can become unstable when operating the bucket.
Warning, Ensure the bucket is locked horizontal before using as a loading shovel.
Warning, How to phase the hoses. K Fig 365. ( T 299).
Label, Grease every 8 hours.
Warning, Danger of cutting to fingers, hands and feet.
rv
ic
es
Label
Se
Fig 364.
Fig 365. Hose decal
299
9821/1300-1
299
Safety and Control
Side Tip Operation
The side tip mechanism must only be used to discharge a

load. The side tip shovel mechanism is operated by the
auxiliary control lever.

using a side tip shovel.
Note: Make sure the locking pin clip ring C is positioned

over the locking stud to prevent the locking pin from falling
out.
Read and understand connecting and disconnecting

hydraulic
couplings.
K Connecting/Disconnecting
When connecting the hydraulic hoses, make sure the
hoses are phased so that the shovel can be operated
without damaging the hoses.
!MWARNING
Position the locking pin in the unlocked position as

shown at B. K Fig 367. ( T 301).
Note: Make sure the locking pin clip ring C is positioned

over the locking stud to prevent the locking pin from falling
out.
rv
Before starting work, check that the attachment is fitted

correctly and all functions operate correctly.
To use the side tip facility, park the machine on firm

level ground. Select the transmission to neutral.
Switch OFF the engine and remove the starter key.
es
Read and understand working with the loader. Refer to

Operation, Working with the Loader.
ic
Read and understand safety precautions before working

with the machine and attachment. Refer to Operation,
Working with the Machine.
When using the shovel for conventional digging and

materials handling, the side tip facility must be locked
as shown at A. K Fig 366. ( T 300).
0179_2
Se
Controls
seated.
!MWARNING
or injured.
C
Fig 366. Locked
B-2-1-8
300
9821/1300-1
300
7
When the shovel is empty operate the control lever in

the opposite direction to level the side tip shovel.
Lower the loader arms to the ground.
On completion of side tip operation, level the shovel

and lock in position as shown at A.
K Fig 366. ( T 300).
Daily Maintenance
Fig 367. Unlocked

Start the engine, get the machine in the required
position to empty the shovel.
!MWARNING
Check for damage.
Grease (3 grease points). Use JCB MPL Grease.
es
rv
It is recommended that the shovel is cleaned after

use, before any remaining material has time to
solidify.
ic
2-4-5-11
Se
Keep the load as low as possible or the machine could

become unstable. If the machine starts to feel unstable
lower the load immediately.
Raise the loader arms and crowd the shovel.
!MWARNING

service.
2-2-7-13
!MWARNING
The shovel must not be fully side tipped if solid

material remains in the shovel. The shovel must only
be used with free flowing material.
2
Fig 368.
2-4-5-12
Operate the auxiliary control lever to tip the shovel.
301
9821/1300-1
301
Work Platforms
Work Platforms
P5-4006_3
!MDANGER
Forks/Working Platform
Using the forks alone as a working platform is
hazardous; you can fall off and be killed or injured.
Never use the forks as a working platform.
5-1-5-3
ic
Se
rv
JCB supply integrated work platforms solely for use in

Europe which comply with the requirements of European
Directive 2006/42/EC. Contact your dealer for further
details. Health and safety legislation also varies from
territory to territory. Customers should check the latest
health and safety legislation for the territory in which the
work platform is to be used prior to operation.
es
The use of work platforms with this machine is subject to

legislation which varies from territory to territory. It is the
responsibility of the owner/operator and supplier of the
work platform to ensure compliance with the relevant
legislation in the relevant territory. In the case of
uncertainty, guidance should be sought from the relevant
local or government authority.
302
9821/1300-1
302
Specifications
Lifting (Object Handling) Regulations and Safe Working Loads
Introduction
Lifting (Object Handling) Regulations
rv
Note: In certain countries Safety Regulations in force call

for the application of specific safety factors. Consult your
JCB distributor for information.
ic
Your machine may be used for object handling if it has

been fitted with an approved lifting point such as a hook /
shackle or hose burst check valve, if it has been tested,
plated and certified for its safe working load, and if all other
regulation requirements have been met (consult your JCB
distributor).
es
The owner and/or operator must make sure that he fully

understands the laws and regulations concerning the use
of the JCB Backhoe Loader as an earthmover and as an
object handling machine. Consult your JCB distributor for
further information.
Note: All figures and lift capacities in this section are

based on the machine being on level, solid ground.
Se
Safe Working Loads
!MWARNING
P11-5001_3
The safe working load shown on lifting accessories

(for example chains, etc.) is not the safe working load
of the machine.
M0002
The maximum load which may be lifted depends on the

equipment fitted to the machine and the laws and
regulations in force at the time and in the country in which
the machine is being used.
If your machine is equipped to be operated under

'Exemption Certificate' rules, your Exemption Certificate
will specify the Safe Working Loads.
303
9821/1300-1
303
Specifications
Loader End
The maximum safe working load of the fork lift mounted

crane hook attachment is 1000kg (1 tonne, 2205lb).
In all cases the maximum load to be lifted by the loader unit

when used as a crane is 1000kg (1 tonne, 2205lb).
Safe Working Loads - Forks

Table 19.
Safe Working Load
Attachment
Fork Spacing
Minimum
Maximum
1000kg (2205lb)
0.4m (1ft 4in)
1.6m (5ft 5in)
6 in 1 Bucket: All Machines
1000kg (2205lb)
0.19m (0ft 7.5in)
2.17m (7ft 1in)
Note: The safe working load is at 500mm (20in) centres.

Fork spacing dimensions are taken to the outside edge of
the forks. Fork width is 80mm (3in). Fork length is 1067mm
es
Bucket Mounted Fork
(42in). Refer to Log Moving/Handling, Working with the

Machine, Operation Section.
Safe Working Loads - Loader
ic
Table 20. 3CX, 4CX Hammermaster, Sitemaster

Attachment
Safe Working Load
kg (lb.)
JCB G.P. Shovel with Forks and JCB Lifthook
1000 (2205)
Quickhitch mounted forks
Safe Working Loads - Fork Duty
rv
JCB 6 in 1 Shovel with Forks and JCB Lifthook
1000 (2205)
2000 (4410)
Se
Table 21. 3CX, 4CX (Sitemaster, Contractor and Super)

Shovel Mounted
Quickhitch Mounted
Forks
Forks
Fork Mounted
Crane Hook
1000kg (2205lb)
2000kg (4410lb)
1000kg (2205lb)
Solid, Level Ground (7-4, 7-8

Rearframe)
1000kg (2205lb)
2000kg (4410lb)
1000kg (2205lb)
Rough Terrain (7-4, 7-8 Rearframe)
304
9821/1300-1
304
Specifications
Safe Working Loads - Shovel Duty
Table 22. 3CX
1.0m3 - General Purpose Shovel
1.0m3 - 6 in 1 Shovel
7-4 Rearframe
3479kg (7654lb)
3229kg (7104lb)
7-8 Rearframe
3439kg (7566lb)
3169kg (6972lb)
Table 23. 3CX Sitemaster/ Contractor

Heavy Lift
3229kg (7104lb)
4308kg (9478lb)
7-8 Rearframe
3169kg (6972lb)
4248kg (9346lb)
Table 24. 3CX Super

1.0m3 - 6 in 1
Shovel
4368kg (9610lb)
4378kg (9632lb)
Note: All weights are based on the following figures
1.1m3 - General
Purpose Shovel
1.3m3 - 6 in 1
Shovel
4368kg (9610lb)
4378kg (9632lb)
ic
7-4 Rearframe
1.0m3 - General
Purpose Shovel
es
Standard Lift
7-4 Rearframe
Table 25.
Shovel Width
Weight
1.0m3 - General Purpose Shovel
92
384kg (845lb)
3
1.1m - General Purpose Shovel

3
92
723kg (1591lb)
92
472kg (1038lb)
92
836kg (1839lb)
Se
1.3m - 6 in 1 Shovel
rv
Attachment
305
9821/1300-1
305
Specifications
Excavator End
Loads can only be lifted by the excavator if the Object
handling kit has been installed on your machine. The
charts shown should be cross referenced to the label in
your machine. Refer to Lifting (Object Handling),
Operation Section for details on the correct use of the
charts.
Load Charts
332/F0476-1
4CX
3CX
2CX
3C
SWL
(kgs)
718
718
440
158
SWL
(lbs)
1583
1583
969
348
SWL
332/D6029
332/D6029-1
332/F0478-1
rv
Fig 369. Non EN474 Countries
ic
MACHINE
es
Fig 372. 88 Sideshift, 14 fix boom, Standard Lift
Se
Fig 373. 88 Sideshift, 14 fix boom, Heavy Lift
332/F0242-1
Fig 370. 92 Sideshift, 14 fix boom, Heavy Lift
L
W
W (kgs)
'L'
4.5m
5.3m
5.6m
1537
1528
1374
1071
1537
1364
1017
920
1395
1041
791
1.7m
2.25m
3.0m
3.75m
3638
2793
1269
3638
2793
1269
3638
2208
1269
719
332/F0528
332/F0528-1
Fig 374. 92 Sideshift, 14 ext boom, Heavy Lift
332/F0474-1
Fig 371. 92 Sideshift, 14 fix boom, Standard Lift
306
9821/1300-1
306
Specifications
L
W
W (kgs)
'L'
4.5m
5.3m
1332
1394
1134
787
1332
1390
1048
787
1332
1078
831
1.7m
2.25m
3.0m
3.75m
3076
2096
1114
3076
2096
1114
3076
2096
1114
5.6m
756
332/F0529
332/F0558-1
332/F0529-1
Fig 378. 88 Sideshift, 14 ext boom Heavy lift
rv
332/F0536-1
ic
es
Fig 375. 92 Sideshift, 14 ext boom, Standard Lift
332/F0555-1
332/F0612-1
Fig 380. Centremount, 15 fix boom
Fig 377. 92 Sideshift, 15 ext boom
332/F0560-1
Fig 379. 88 Sideshift, 14 ext boom Standard lift
Se
Fig 376. 92 Sideshift, 15 fix boom
307
9821/1300-1
307
Specifications
332/F0626-1
332/F0632-1
Fig 384. Centremount, 14 ext. boom Heavy lift
rv
332/F0630-1
ic
es
Fig 381. Centremount, 15 ext. boom
332/F0633
Fig 385. Centremount, 14 ext. boom Standard lift
Se
Fig 382. Centremount, 14 fix boom Heavy lift
332/F0631-1
Fig 383. Centremount, 14 fix boom Standard lift
308
9821/1300-1
308
Specifications
3CX / 4CX Backhoe Excavator Bucket Weights And Dimensions

Note: All weights are approximate.
General Purpose Buckets (Standard Profile) - Bolt on Teeth

Width
Table 26.
Struck Capacity
Rated Capacity
Weight
m3 (ft3)
m3 (ft3)
kg (lbs)
250 (10)
0.06 (2.1)
0.054 (1.9)
98 (216)
300 (12)
0.08 (2.8)
0.064 (2.3)
105 (231
350 (14)
0.09 (3.2)
0.078 (2.8)
400 (16)
0.12 (4.2)
0.096 (3.4)
450 (18)
0.14 (4.9)
0.11 (3.9)
500 (20)
0.16 (5.6)
0.124 (4.4)
600 (24)
0.2 (7.1)
0.152 (5.4)
800 (32)
0.28 (9.9)
0.209 (7.4)
900 (36)
0.32 (11.3)
0.237 (8.4)
177 (389* see WARNING)
1100 (44)
0.4 (14.1)
0.289 (10.2)
es
mm (in)
106 (233)
106 (233)
110 (242)
117(257)
133 (293)
ic
Width
m (ft )
300 (12)
0.09 (3.2)
450 (18)
600 (24)
800 (32)
900 (36)
m (ft )
kg (lbs)
0.07 (2.5)
110 (242)
Se
400 (16)
Table 27.
Struck Capacity
Rated Capacity
mm (in)
350 (14)
rv
General Purpose Buckets (Deep Profile) - Bolt on Teeth
0.09 (3.2)
117 (257)
0.11 (3.9)
124 (273)
0.15 (5.3)
0.13 (4.6)
135 (297)
0.23 (8.1)
0.18 (6.4)
156 (343)
0.32 (11.3)
0.24 (8.5)
186 (409 * see WARNING)
0.39 (13.8)
0.30 (10.6)
0.47 (16.6)
0.34 (12)
1100 (44)
0.11 (3.9)
0.13 (4.6)
Weight
309
9821/1300-1
309
Specifications
Heavy Duty Buckets (Standard Profile) - Bolt on Teeth

Width
Rated Capacity
Table 28.
Struck Capacity
Weight
m3 (ft3)
m3 (ft3)
kg (lbs)
250 (10)
0.06 (2.1)
0.054 (1.9)
104 (229)
300 (12)
0.08 (2.8)
0.068 (2.4)
113 (249)
400 (16)
0.12 (4.2)
0.096 (3.4)
116 (255)
450 (18)
0.14 (4.9)
0.11 (3.9)
124 (273)
500 (20)
0.16 (5.6)
0.124 (4.4)
132 (290)
600 (24)
0.2 (7.1)
0.152 (5.4)
152 (334
es
mm (in)
0.28 (9.9)
0.209 (7.4)
900 (36)
0.32 (11.3)
0.237 (8.4)
Se
rv
ic
800 (32)
310
9821/1300-1
310
Specifications
Heavy Duty Buckets (Standard Profile) - USA

Width
Table 29.
Struck Capacity
Rated Capacity
Weight
mm (in)
m3 (ft3)
m3 (ft3)
kg (lbs)
300 (12)
0.07 (2.5)
0.06 (2.1)
122 (268)
450 (18)
0.14 (4.9)
0.12 (4.2)
135 (297)
0.16 (5.6)
0.13 (4.6)
143 (315)
600 (24)
0.2 (7.1)
0.16 (5.6)
160 (352)
750 (30)
0.27 (9.5)
0.2 (7.1)
188 (414)
900 (36)
0.34 (12.0)
0.24 (8.5)
es
500 (20)
Ditching / Grading Buckets

Width
Rated Capacity
Table 30.
Struck Capacity
Weight
kg (lbs)
mm (in)
m (ft )
m (ft )
1500 (60)
0.22 (7.8)
0.155 (5.5)
150 (330)
1800 (72)
0.26 (9.2)
0.186 (6.6)
ic
rv
Tapered Ditching Buckets
111 (244)
0.07 (2.5)
185 (407)
Table 31.
Rated Capacity
Width
mm (in)
Struck Capacity
m (ft )
400/1700 (16/67)
Jaw Bucket
m (ft )
0.12 (4.2)
Se
300/1100 (12/43)
Weight
kg (lbs)
Table 32.
Width
Rated Capacity
Struck Capacity
Weight
m (ft )
m (ft )
kg (lbs)
300 (12)
0.07 (2.5)
225 (495)
450 (18)
0.14 (4.9)
255 (561)
600 (24)
0.20 (7.1)
280 (616)
mm (in)
!MWARNING
the machine.
2-4-5-6
Buckets indicated above with an asterisk (*) must not

be used on 4CX Super Sitemaster (Extradig) machines
if the carriage is to be fully offset and the excavator
extended over the side. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in injury and or damage to
311
9821/1300-1
311
Specifications
Fig 386.
Type
Market
Excavator
es
Excavator Quick Hitch

Excavator Control Type SWL
Weight
kg (lbs)
Mechanical
Europe
All
Lift eye 1000kgs 95 (209)
Mechanical
USA/ROW
All
Hydraulic
USA/ROW
4 Ext. Dipper
All
Hydraulic
USA/ROW
5-6 Ext. Dipper
All
Hydraulic
USA/ROW
4 Ext. Dipper
Advanced Easy Controls Lift eye 1000kgs 103 (227)
Hydraulic
USA/ROW
5-6 Ext. Dipper
Advanced Easy Controls Lift eye 1000kgs 103 (227)
Lift eye 1000kgs 95 (209)
ic
Lift eye 1000kgs 103 (227)
Se
rv
Lift eye 1000kgs 103 (227)
312
9821/1300-1
312
Specifications
3CX/ 4CX Loader Bucket Weights And Dimensions

Loader Shovels
Description
Type
Width
Table 33.
Rated
SWL Kgs
Capacity
mm (in)
m3
Mounting
Weight
kgs
with
pins
with t/plate with

teeth
6 in 1
2235 (88)
1.0
Direct
698
709
775
734
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.0
Direct
712
723
792
748
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.0
Direct
720
731
800
756
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.2
Direct
730
741
810
766
Clam
6 in 1
2438 (96)
1.3
Direct
850
861
934
886
Clam
6 in 1
2438 (96)
1.3
Quickhitch
890
901
974
926
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.0
Quickhitch
745
756
825
781
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.2
Quickhitch
760
771
840
796
Clam
6 in 1
2438 (96)
1.3
Quickhitch
825
836
909
861
Clam
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.0
Quickhitch
750
761
830
786
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2235 (88)
1.0
Forks
1000kg
Direct
853
864
930
889
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.1
Forks
1000kg
Direct
870
881
950
906
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.0
Forks
1000kg
Direct
880
891
960
916
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.2
Forks
1000kg
Direct
895
906
975
931
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2337 (92)
1.2
Forks
1000kg
Direct
915
926
995
951
Clam and
Forks
6 in 1
2438 (96)
1.3
Forks
1000kg
Direct
1005
1016
1089
1041
GP Shovel
Standard
2235 (88)
1.0
Direct
360
371
437
396
GP Shovel
Standard
2337 (92)
1.1
Direct
373
384
453
409
GP Shovel
Heavy Duty 2337 (92)
1.1
Quickhitch
489
500
569
525
GP Shovel
1.1
Quickhitch
480
491
560
516
GP Shovel
1.2
Quickhitch
532
543
616
568
GP Shovel
1.1
Direct
478
489
558
514
Se
rv
ic
es
Clam
GP Shovel
1.0
Direct
449
460
526
485
GP Shovel
1.1
Direct
461
472
541
497
GP Shovel
1.1
Direct
556
567
636
592
GP Shovel
1.1
Direct
586
597
670
622
313
9821/1300-1
313
Specifications
Description
Type
Width
Rated
SWL Kgs
Capacity
mm (in)
Mounting
kgs
with
pins
with t/plate with

teeth
Direct
518
529
598
554
Direct
620
631
700
656
m3
GP Shovel
1.3
GP Shovel
and Forks
1.1
Forks
1000kg
Weight
Loader Quickhitches
Width
mm (in)
Quickhitch
Hydraulic
No Forks
Quickhitch
Mechanical
No Forks
Quickhitch
Hydraulic
Integrated
Forks
Table 34.
Rated
SWL Kgs
Capacity
m3
Forks
2000kg
Type
Width
Fork Frame
Fork Frame
Fork Guard
Fork Set
Fork Set
Class 2
1500 (59)
with
pins
165
176
209
220
2000kg
1500 (59)
Weight
kgs
Quickhitch
204
Quickhitch
204
with
pins
with t/ with
plate teeth
77
1220 (48)
2000kg
115
1200 (47.2)
2000kg
120
1000kg
33
Fork Mounted
with t/ with
plate teeth
259
Mounting
m3
Class 2
Class 1B
kgs
Hook
Table 35.
Rated SWL Kgs
Capacity
Se
mm (in)
Weight
248
rv
Fork Frames, Forks and Accessories

Description
Mounting
es
Type
ic
Description
314
9821/1300-1
314
Specifications
Static Dimensions
Static Dimensions
3CX Machines
es
B
C
D
A
ic
807590-3
Fig 387.
rv
Table 36. Machine Dimensions

3CX
3CX Sitemaster
3CX Contractor
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
5.62 (18-5)
5.62 (18-5)
5.62 (18-5)
3.61 (11-10)
3.61 (11-10)
3.61 (11-10
2.87 (9-5)
2.91 (9-6)
2.91 (9-6)
Wheelbase
2.17 (7-1)
2.17 (7-1)
2.17 (7-1)
Ground clearance - stabiliser
0.37 (1-2)
0.37 (1-2)
0.37 (1-2)
Ground clearance - kingpost
0.52 (1-8)
0.52 (1-8)
0.52 (1-8)
Shovel width
2.35 (7-8)
2.35 (7-8)
2.35 (7-8)
Slew centre to rear axle
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
Rear frame width
2.35 (7-8)
2.35 (7-8)
2.35 (7-8)
Overall length
Overall height
Height to top of cab
D
E
Se
Attachment
Standard dipper and GP shovel
Extending dipper, 6 in 1 shovel with forks
Table 37. Machine Weights

3CX
3CX Sitemaster
kg (lb.)
kg (lb.)
7370 (16250)
8070 (17800)
8070 (17800)
8070 (17800)
Note: Machine Weights / Dimensions may vary dependent

on options fitted. Dimensions are based on 18 front and
26 rear tyres and 7-8 rear frame.
315
3CX Contractor
kg (lb.)
For Backhoe and Loader dimensions contact your JCB

Distributor.
9821/1300-1
315
Specifications
Static Dimensions
R1
es
R2
Fig 388.
Front Tyre Size
Table 38.
R2 (Kerb to kerb)
ic
Model
m (ft-in)
16
2WD
18
3CX
4WD
18
3CX
2WD
20
3CX
4WD
20
TBA
rv
2WD
3CX
m (ft-in)
TBA
8.7 (28-6)
11.0 (36-1)
9.4 (30-10)
11.6 (38-0)
11.4 (37-5)
13.2 (43-3)
12.1 (39-7)
13.7 (44-11)
Se
3CX
R1 (Wall to Wall)
316
9821/1300-1
316
Specifications
Static Dimensions
3CX Super Machines
B
C
es
D
G
807610-3
ic
Fig 389.

3CX Super
3CX Super Sitemaster
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
Overall length
Overall height
Wheelbase
0.48 (1-7)
0.48 (1-7)
Shovel width
2.23 (7-4)
2.23 (7-4)
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
Rear frame width
2.24 (7-4)
2.24 (7-4)
5.91 (19-5)
3.48 (11-5)
3.56 (11-10)
2.86 (9-4)
2.86 (9-4)
2.22 (7-3)
2.22 (7-3)
0.33 (1-1)
0.33 (1-1)
Se
Attachment
5.91 (19-5)
rv

3CX Super
3CX Super Sitemaster

kg (lb.)
7725 (17000)
Extending dipper, 6 in 1 shovel with forks
8425 (18550)
8425 (18550)
kg (lb.)

on options fitted. Dimensions are based on 24 tyres.
Distributor.
317
9821/1300-1
317
Specifications
Static Dimensions
R2
es
R1
T033610-1
Fig 390.
Table 41.
Front Tyre Size
R2 (Kerb to kerb)
AWS
24
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
8.8 (28-11)
10.7 (35-1)
Se
rv
3CX Super
R1 (Wall to Wall)
ic
Model
Model
3CX Super
318
2WS
R1
R2
T033600-1
Fig 391.
Front Tyre Size
Table 42.
R2 (Kerb to kerb)
24
9821/1300-1
R1 (Wall to Wall)
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
14.0 (45-11)
15.9 (52-2)
318
Specifications
Static Dimensions
4CX Machines
es
D
G
807600-2
ic
Fig 392.

4CX
4CX SM
4CX Super
4CX Super SM
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
5.91 (19-5)
5.91 (19-5)
5.91 (19-5)
3.54 (11-7)
3.62 (11-10)
3.90 (12-9)
3.93 (12-10)
2.84 (9-3)
2.88 (9-5)
2.88 (9-5)
2.88 (9-5)
2.22 (7-3)
2.22 (7-3)
2.22 (7-3)
2.22 (7-3)
0.34 (1-1)
0.34 (1-1)
0.34 (1-1)
0.34 (1-1)
0.50 (1-8)
0.50 (1-8)
m (ft-in)
Overall length
5.91 (19-5)
Overall height
Wheelbase
0.50 (1-8)
0.50 (1-8)
Se
rv
Shovel width
2.33 (7-8)
2.33 (7-8)
2.33 (7-8)
2.33 (7-8)
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
1.36 (4-6)
Rear frame width
2.36 (7-9)
2.36 (7-9)
2.36 (7-9)
2.36 (7-9)

4CX
4CX SM
4CX Super
4CX Super SM
kg (lb.)
kg (lb.)
kg (lb.)
Attachment
kg (lb.)
7950 (17500)
Extending dipper, 6 in 1 shovel with forks 8660 (19050)
8130 (17900)
8660 (19050)
8880 (19550)
8880 (19550)

on options fitted. Dimensions are based on 28 tyres.
Distributor.
319
9821/1300-1
319
Specifications
Static Dimensions
R1
es
R2
T033600-1
Fig 393.
Front Tyre Size

2WS
24
4CX
2WS
28
R1 (Wall to Wall)
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
14.0 (45-11)
15.9 (52-2)
18.0 (59-1)
19.5 (64-0)
rv
4CX
Table 45.
R2 (Kerb to kerb)
ic
Model
Se
R2
Model
Front Tyre Size
R1
T033610-1
Fig 394.
Table 46.
R2 (Kerb to kerb)
R1 (Wall to Wall)
m (ft-in)
m (ft-in)
4CX
AWS
24
8.8 (28-11)
10.7 (35-1)
4CX
AWS
28
10.8 (35-6)
12.4 (40-8)
320
9821/1300-1
320
Specifications
Hydraulic Hose Burst Pressures
Hydraulic Hose Burst Pressures

The information is included to advise the machine operator
of the hydraulic hose burst pressures for all hoses used on
this machine.
The heading at the top of the left-hand column is 'JCB

Prefix Number', this number can be found stamped on the
swaged end of a hose immediately behind the hose nut.
The number is the prefix of the part number, e.g., 612/
21100.
Table 47.
BORE SIZE
RANGE
MAXIMUM
WORKING
PRESSURE
MINIMUM BURST
PRESSURE
19.05 mm
Medium Pressure
611/
6.35 mm
High Pressure
235 bar
950 bar
400 bar
1600 bar
612/
9.525 mm
High Pressure
330 bar
1320 bar
613/
12.7 mm
High Pressure
275 bar
1100 bar
614/
15.875 mm
High Pressure
615/
19.05 mm
High Pressure
250 bar
1000 bar
275 bar
1100 bar
629/
5 mm
SAE 100 R7 (or 3/16 in)
207 bar
827 bar
631/
6.35 mm
Low Pressure
190 bar
760 bar
632/
9.525 mm
Low Pressure
155 bar
620 bar
633/
12.7 mm
Low Pressure
140 bar
550 bar
634/
15.875 mm
Low Pressure
100 bar
415 bar
635/
19.05 mm
Low Pressure
85 bar
345 bar
637/
25.4 mm
Low Pressure
70 bar
275 bar
Se
rv
es
607/
ic
JCB PREFIX
321
9821/1300-1
321
Specifications
Noise Data
Noise Data
Introduction
All Machines
T5-008_2
To assist in compliance with European Directives 2000/14/

EC and 2005/88/EC, the noise data values for this type of
machine have been provided on the following page(s) and
may be used for the assessment of risks to exposure from
noise.
Table 48.
LpA
Engine rating(1) Fan ratio
LwA
63.0 2WS
68.6 2WS
The noise data values shown only apply to CE marked

machines.
74.2 2WS
Definition of terms:
LwA
A-weighted sound pressure level measured at the

operator's station.(1)
Equivalent A-weighted sound power level emitted
by the machine.(2)
1.0:1
74
102
1.0:1
74
102
1.16:1
75
102
1.0:1
73
102
1.16:1
74
102
1.0:1
74
103
1.16:1
74
103
1.35:1
75
103
74.2 AWS
74
102
1.16:1
1.0:1
75
102
1.25:1
75
103
(1) Nett Installed power (kW) to ISO14396
Se
rv
(1) Determined in accordance with the test method

defined in ISO 6396 and the dynamic test conditions
defined on 2000/14/EC.
(2) Guaranteed equivalent sound power (external noise)
determined in accordance with the dynamic test
conditions defined in 2000/14/EC.
102
ic
LpA
74
es
68.6 AWS
For information relating to this machine when used with
other JCB approved attachments, please refer to the
literature accompanying the attachments.
0.85:1
322
9821/1300-1
322
Specifications
Vibration Data
Vibration Data
Introduction
Minimising Exposure to Vibration

T5-001
Vibration values are determined from measurements in

three
perpendicular
axes
(X,
Y
and
Z).
K Fig 395. ( T 323). The highest weighted (rms) value is
used to specify the vibration emission.
Use of a machine equipped with an appropriate seat,

keeping the seat maintained and adjusted.
Checks to ensure that the machine is properly
maintained, reporting and correcting any faults.
Steering, braking, accelerating, shifting
moving the attachments and load smoothly.
gears,
Adjusting the machine speed and travel path to

minimize the vibration level.
Keeping the terrain on worksites where the machine
is working and travelling in good condition, removing
any large rocks or obstacles and filling in any ditches
and holes.
Choosing routes that avoid rough surfaces and, if this
is not possible, drive more slowly to avoid bumping
and jolting.
rv
Note: The axis upon which the highest weighted (rms)

value occurs is stated on the vibration chart for each of the
Machine Operating Duties, see Dominant Axis (X, Y or
Z).
Selection of the correct size and capacity of machine,

equipment and attachments for a particular
application.
es
Unless otherwise indicated for a specific operating

condition, vibration values are determined with the
machine equipped with standard attachments (i.e. bucket,
shovel, fork, etc.) for the respective operating condition.
Exposure to vibration can be minimised through:
ic
To assist in compliance with European Directive 2002/44/

EC, duty specific vibration emission values for this
machine type have been provided on the following page(s)
and may be used for the assessment of risks to exposure
from vibration.
Travelling over longer distances at an adjusted

(medium) speed.
Se
Avoiding bad postures, i.e. slumping in your seat,

constantly leaning forward or sideways or driving with
your back twisted.
Fig 395.
323
9821/1300-1
323
Specifications
Vibration Data
4CX, 3CX Super

Table 49. Whole-Body Vibration Emission Under Representative Operating Conditions (According to the Intended
Use)
Se
rv
ic
es
Dominant Axis (X, Y or Z)
Machine Operating Duties
Whole-body vibration emission determined in accordance

with ISO 2631-1:1997 for this machine type is 0.34 m/s2
normalised to an 8-hour reference period [A(8)] and based
upon a test cycle comprising of excavating, loader work
(soil).
Hand-arm vibration determined in accordance with
dynamic test conditions defined in ISO 5349-2: 2001 does
not exceed 2.5 m/s2.
D1
Low Idle
D2
Roading (tarmac)
D3
Roading (rough terrain)
D4
Excavating
D5
Loader work (soil)
D6
Loader work (stone)
Note: Error bars are due to variations in vibration

emissions due to measurement uncertainty (50% in
accordance with EN 12096:1997).
324
9821/1300-1
324
Specifications
Vibration Data
Operator Seat Specification
T5-007
This machine has an operator seat which meets the criteria

of EN ISO 7096:2000 (representing vertical vibration input
under severe but typical operating conditions). The input
spectral class which relates to this machine and seat
combination is:
EM5 - Backhoe Loader (Operating capacity = > 4500 kg).
Se
rv
ic
es
EM8 - Backhoe Loader (Operating capacity = < 4500 kg).
325
9821/1300-1
325
Specifications
Vibration Data
3CX
Table 50. Whole-Body Vibration Emission Under Representative Operating Conditions (According to the Intended
Use)
Se
rv
ic
es
Dominant Axis (X, Y or Z)
Whole-body vibration emission determined in accordance

with ISO 2631-1:1997 for this machine type is 0.28 m/s2
normalised to an 8-hour reference period [A(8)] and based
upon a test cycle comprising of excavating, loader work
(soil).
Hand-arm vibration determined in accordance with

dynamic test conditions defined in ISO 5349-2: 2001 does
not exceed 2.5 m/s2.
Note: Error bars are due to variations in vibration
emissions due to measurement uncertainty (50% in
accordance with EN 12096:1997).
326
D1
Low Idle
D2
Roading (tarmac)
D3
Roading (rough terrain)
D4
Excavating
D5
Loader work (soil)
D6
Loader work (stone)
9821/1300-1
326
Specifications
Vibration Data
Operator Seat Specification
T5-007
This machine has an operator seat which meets the criteria

of EN ISO 7096:2000 (representing vertical vibration input
under severe but typical operating conditions). The input
spectral class which relates to this machine and seat
combination is:
EM5 - Backhoe Loader (Operating capacity = > 4500 kg).
Se
rv
ic
es
EM8 - Backhoe Loader (Operating capacity = < 4500 kg).
327
9821/1300-1
327
Specifications
Tyre Sizes And Pressures

Item
Size x Ply
Pattern
Table 51. All Wheel Steer Machines - Front and Rear

Make
Name
Front Pressure
2
bar (lbf/in )
14.9x24x12 INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
INDUSTRIAL SURE
GRIP
2(1)
16.9x24x12 INDUSTRIAL TITAN
R4 TL INDUSTRIAL LUG 2.6 (38)
INDUSTRIAL SURE
GRIP
2.0 (30)
4(1)
16.9x24x12 INDUSTRIAL FIRESTONE
R4 ALL TRACTION
UTILITY
2.6 (38)
5(1)
16.9x24x12 INDUSTRIAL GALAXY
R4 EZ RIDER
2.6 (38)
460/70R24
TRACTION
GOODYEAR
IT520
15.5x25R
TRACTION
MICHELIN
XTLA
(1)
(1)
SURE GRIP LUG
(1)
16.9x28X12 INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
10(1)
2.75 (40)
2.6 (38)
2.5 (36)
2.6 (38)
2.5 (36)
2.0 (30)
2.0 (30)
INDUSTRIAL SURE
GRIP
2.0 (30)
2.2 (32)
16.9x28x12 INDUSTRIAL TITAN
R4 TL IND. LUG
2.6 (38)
11(1)
16.9x28x12 INDUSTRIAL FIRESTONE
R4 ALL TRACTION
UTILITY
2.6 (38)
12(1)
16.9x28x12 INDUSTRIAL GALAXY
R4 EZ RIDER
2.6 (38)
16.9x28x12 INDUSTRIAL JCB
SITEMASTER
2.6 (38)
XMCL
2.4 (35)
14(1)
15(1)
15a
16
(1)
(1)
rv
13
(1)
440/80R28
TRACTION
MICHELIN
440/80R28
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
IT530
2.0 (30)
2.4 (35)
440/80R28
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
IT520
2.0 (30)
2.4 (35)
500/70R28
TRACTION
IT520
2.0 (30)
2.2 (32)
Se
ic
(1)
bar (lbf/in2)
es
1(1)
Rear Pressure
GOODYEAR
(1) Items must have steering lock restriction stops fitted, consult your JCB Distributor for advice.
Note: 12 ply tyres must be fitted on rear wheels when any

backhoe attachment is used. For the correct pressure see
the table.
Note: All tyres are tubeless unless otherwise stated.
328
9821/1300-1
328
Specifications
Item Size x Ply
Pattern
Table 52. Two Wheel Steer, 2 Wheel Drive Machines - Front

Make
Name
Pressure
(Recommended)(1)
bar (lbf/in2)
11Lx16x12
ROAD
TITAN
11Lx16x12
IND. SPECIAL FIRESTONE
F3
4.4 (64)
11Lx16x12
RIBBED
GALAXY
F3
4.4 (64)
11x16x12
RIBBED
FIRESTONE
RIB TRACTOR
4.1 (60)
11x16x12
RIBBED
GOODYEAR
MULTI-RIB
3.9 (57)
12.5x18x10
INDUSTRIAL
JCB
SITEMASTER
3.0 (43.5)
bar (lbf/in2)
F3 TL CONTRACTOR 4.4 (64)
4.75 (69)
es
Pressure
(Continuous
Loader work) (2)
(1) These tyre pressures are recommended if it is impractical to adjust tyre pressures.
(2) These tyre pressures are recommended for continual loader work to cope with pry out loads.
Se
rv
ic
329
9821/1300-1
329
Specifications
Item
Size x Ply
Table 53. Two Wheel Steer, 4 Wheel Drive Machines - Front

Pattern
Make
Name
Pressure
(Recommended)(1)
bar (lbf/in2)
14x17.5x10
ROAD
TITAN
TL NHS
CONTRACTOR
3.8 (55)
2 (3)
14x17.5x10
ROAD
TITAN
SKID MASTER
3.8 (55)
(3)
14x17.5x10
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
SURE GRIP LUG
3.8 (55)
(3)
14x17.5x10
INDUSTRIAL SOLIDEAL
SKS
3.8 (55)
5 (3)
14x17.5x10
INDUSTRIAL FIRESTONE
SUPER TRACTION 3.8 (55)

DUPLEX
6 (3)
14x17.5x10
INDUSTRIAL GALAXY
R4 MARATHONER 3.4 (50)
(4)
12.5x18x10
INDUSTRIAL GALAXY
BEEFY BABY R4
3.1 (46)
INDUSTRIAL GALAXY
BEEFY BABY R4
4.3 (63)
12.5x18x10
INDUSTRIAL JCB
SITEMASTER
3.0 (43.5)
9 (4)
SURE GRIP LUG
4.25 (62)
7a
12.5/80x18x10
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
9a
(4)
12.5/80x18x14
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
10
(4)
340/80x18R
TRACTION
11
(4)
400/70x18R
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
400/70x18R
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
12 (3)(4)
12.5x20x10
13 (3)(4)
SURE GRIP LUG
3.9 (57)
XMCL
4.0 (58)
IT530
2.4 (35)
3.1 (45)
IT520
2.4 (35)
3.1 (45)
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
MPT SURE GRIP
3.0 (43.5)
3.5 (51)
MICHELIN
rv
11a
(4)
ic
12.5x18x14
8 (4)
(4)
bar (lbf/in2)
es
1(3)
Pressure
(Continuous
Loader work) (2)
5.0 (72.5)
TRACTION
MICHELIN
XMCL
3.2 (46)
16.0/70x20x10
TRACTION
GOODYEAR
SURE GRIP ALL

SERVICE
2.3 (33)
3.0 (43.5)
15 (3)(4)
16.0/70x20x10
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
SURE GRIP LUG
2.3 (33)
3.0 (43.5)
16 (3)(4)
400/70R20
TRACTION
GOODYEAR
IT520
2.3 (33)
3.0 (43.5)
17 (3)(4)
400/70R20
INDUSTRIAL GOODYEAR
IT530
2.3 (33)
3.0 (43.5)
(3)(4)
400/70R20
TRACTION
XMCL
3.6 (52)
14
18
MICHELIN
These tyre pressures are recommended if it is impractical to adjust tyre pressures.

These tyre pressures are recommended for continual loader work to cope with pry out loads.
Items must have rear axle spacers fitted, consult your JCB Distributor for advice.
Items must have steering lock restriction stops fitted, consult your JCB Distributor for advice.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Se
340/80x20R
(3)(4)
Note: 12 ply tyres must be fitted on rear wheels when any

backhoe attachment is used. For the correct pressure see
the table above.
330
9821/1300-1
330
Specifications
Item
Size x Ply
Table 54. Two Wheel Steer Machines - Rear

Pattern
Make
Name
Pressure
bar (lbf/in2)
16.9x24x10
16.9x24x12
16.9x24x12
17.5Lx24x10
INDUSTRIAL
TITAN
R4 TL INDUSTRIAL LUG
2.2 (32)
INDUSTRIAL
GOODYEAR
INDUSTRIAL SURE GRIP
2.4 (35)
INDUSTRIAL
SOLIDEAL
SL R4
2.6 (38)
INDUSTRIAL
TITAN
2.2 (32)
19.5Lx24x10
INDUSTRIAL
TITAN
1.9 (28)
19.5Lx24x12
INDUSTRIAL
TITAN
2.3 (33)
19.5Lx24x12
INDUSTRIAL
FIRESTONE
R4 ALL TRACTION UTILITY
2.3 (33)
19.5Lx24x12
INDUSTRIAL
GALAXY
R4 EZ RIDER
2.3 (33)
21Lx24x10
INDUSTRIAL
GALAXY
R4 EZ RIDER
1.8 (26)
es
18.4x26x12
TRACTION
JCB
SITEMASTER TZ19
2.4 (35)
11
18.4/15x26x12
INDUSTRIAL
GOODYEAR
SURE GRIP INDUSTRIAL
2.0 (29)
12
18.4x26x12
INDUSTRIAL
GALAXY
BACKHOE INDUSTRIAL LUG
2.5 (36)
13
18.4x26x12
INDUSTRIAL
JCB
SITEMASTER
2.5 (36)
ic
10
480/80xR26
INDUSTRIAL
GOODYEAR
IT530
2.0 (29)
15
480/80xR26
TRACTION
GOODYEAR
IT520
2.0 (29)
16
16.9/14x28x12
INDUSTRIAL
GOODYEAR
INDUSTRIAL SURE GRIP
2.1 (30)
17
16.9x28x12
INDUSTRIAL
JCB
SITEMASTER E58
2.4 (35)
18
16.9x28x12
INDUSTRIAL
JCB
SITEMASTER
2.6 (38)
19
440/80R28
TRACTION
MICHELIN
XMCL
2.3 (33)
500/70xR28
TRACTION
GOODYEAR
IT520
2.1 (30)
18.4x30x14
INDUSTRIAL
GOODYEAR
SURE GRIP LUG
2.0 (29)
21
(1)
(1) Tube Tyre
Se
20
rv
14
331
9821/1300-1
331
Specifications
Travel Speed
Travel Speed
Se
rv
ic
es
The maximum travel speed of the 3CX/4CX Backhoe

loader is 25mph (40kph).
332
9821/1300-1
332
Machine Service Record Sheet
T6-003
Installation Checklist
3000 Hrs./36 Month

Annual insurance
Date:
Date:
es
Hour reading:
3500 Hrs./42 Month
Date:
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
ic
1st 100 Hrs./1 Month
500 Hrs./6 Month
4000 Hrs./48 Month

Annual insurance
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
Date:
Hour reading:
4500 Hrs./54 Month
Se
1000 Hrs./12 Month

Annual insurance
rv
Date:
1500 Hrs./18 Month
Date:
Hour reading:
5000 Hrs./60 Month
Annual insurance
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
2000 Hrs./24 Month
5500 Hrs./66 Month
Date:
Annual insurance
Date:
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
2500 Hrs./30 Month
6000 Hrs./72 Month

Annual insurance
Date:
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
333
9821/1300-1
333
9500 Hrs./114 Month
Date:
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
7000 Hrs./84 Month
10000 Hrs./120 Month
Annual insurance
Annual insurance
Date:
Date:
Hour reading:
Hour reading:
es
6500 Hrs./78 Month
Date:
Hour reading:
8000 Hrs./96 Month
rv
Annual insurance
ic
7500 Hrs./90 Month
Date:
Se
Hour reading:
8500 Hrs./102 Month
Date:
Hour reading:
9000 Hrs./108 Month
Annual insurance
Date:
Hour reading:
334
9821/1300-1
334
Registration Information
T6-001
Customer Copy
Dealer Copy
Dealer
JCB Model
JCB Model
P.I.N./Machine Serial Number
P.I.N./Machine Serial Number
V.I.N.
V.I.N.
Vehicle Registration Number
Vehicle Registration Number
ic
es
Dealer
Registration Date
Registration Date
Installing Engineer
rv
Installing Engineer
Customer's Name
Dealer Copy (U.K. and Eire only) - Do not send back

to JCB Service. A copy of the registration details to be
sent direct to:
Se
Address
The Equipment Register Ltd. (T.E.R.)

Bath and West Buildings
P.D.I. Date
Lower Bristol Road

Bath, BA2 3EG
Owner's Plant Reference No.
Tel: 01225 464599 (24 Hour)

Fax: 01225 317698
Alpha Dot Security System Yes/No

Please send details of: 'JCB Assetcare Machinery
Protection Plan' Yes/No
Customer Copy - Do not remove this portion from the

Operator Manual.
335
9821/1300-1
335
Se
rv
ic
es
336
9821/1300-1
336

EC Declaration of Conformity
Introduction
TS-006_3
A completed copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity is

supplied with all machines manufactured according to EC
type examination and/or self-certification requirements.
Se
rv
ic
es
A sample copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity and a

summary of the information that can appear is provided.
Refer to Explanation of the EC Declaration of
Conformity.
337
9821-1300-1
337
Se
rv
ic
es
9814-0850-4-GB
Fig 396.
338
9821-1300-1
338

Explanation of the EC Declaration of

Conformity
A. V. Technology
A. V. House
Birdhall Lane
K Fig 396. ( T 338).
Stockport
A
J.C. Bamford Excavators Limited
Cheshire
Lakeside Works
United Kingdom
Rocester
SK3 0XU
Staffordshire
United Kingdom
Refer to Noise Data (Specification Section).
Refer to Noise Data (Specification Section).
Rocester
Managing Director
Excavator-Loader (Wheeled)
Refer to Machine Model and Serial Number
(Introduction Section).
Refer to Typical Product Identification Number
(PIN) (Introduction Section).
EN 474-1:2006+A1:2009
EN 474-4:2006 +A1:2009
Chief Engineer
Backhoe loader
Se
J.C. Bamford Excavators Limited
rv
ic
es
ST14 5JP
Lakeside Works
Rocester
Staffordshire
United Kingdom
ST14 5JP
G
Mr C J Knowles
J. C. Bamford Excavators Limited

Lakeside Works
Rocester
Staffordshire
United Kingdom
ST14 5JP
339
ANNEX VI PROCEDURE 1
9821-1300-1
339

Se
rv
ic
es
340
9821-1300-1
340

Manual Operador Bobcat 3x

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Operador Bobcat 3x

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Even if you have operated this type of equipment before,

it is very important that your new machines operations and

Dear JCB Customer

Following the installation you will know how to gain

Please contact your local JCB dealer if the Installation

THIS MANUAL SHOULD ALWAYS STAY WITH THE MACHINE

BACKHOE LOADER - 3CX, 4CX ECO

Copyright 2004 JCB SERVICE.

A4-2-BHL - Printed In England

The Operator Manual

Do not operate the machine without an Operator Manual,

In this publication and on the machine, there are safety

Denotes an extreme hazard exists. If proper

Treat the Operator Manual as part of the machine. Keep it

You and others can be killed or seriously injured if you

This safety alert system identifies

Denotes a hazard exists. If proper precautions are not

Denotes a reminder of safety practices. Failure to

Page left intentionally blank

Left Side, Right Side

This manual provides information for the following

3CX / 4CX from 2000000 onwards

This is so whether you are facing the loader (front) or the

Using this Manual

This manual is arranged to give you a good understanding

General warnings in this chapter are repeated throughout

The illustrations in this manual are for guidance only.

This manual contains original instructions, verified by the

This manual frequently makes references to the cab. For

The manufacturer's policy is one of continuous

All optional equipment included in this manual may not be

In this publication, page cross references are made by

The Backhoe Loader is a self propelled wheeled machine

Hydraulic oil tank

The machine is intended to be used under normal

regulations must be followed and the machine must be

The JCB Backhoe Loader

Toolbox (If Fitted)

Wheel Brace and Tommy Bar

Safety Check List

Safety - Yours and Others

But safety is not just a matter of responding to the

Care and Alertness

If you are unsure of anything, about the machine or the job,

To operate the machine safely you must know the

In this manual and on the machine you will find warning

All machinery can be hazardous. When a machine is

Switch off and do not use your mobile phone when

Make sure that no-one goes near the machine while

Banks and Trenches

Keep the machine controls clean and dry. Your hands

There is a minimum clearance required for working

If you have an attachment which is not covered in the

Airborne particles of light combustible material such

You are strongly advised to make sure that the safety

Electrical Power Cables

Use only the JCB approved attachments that are

Travelling at High Speeds

The engine has exposed rotating parts. Switch OFF the

Touching hot surfaces can burn skin. The engine and

Do not operate the machine if you cannot see clearly.

You could be killed or seriously injured if you operate

Keep Your Hands and Feet Inside the Vehicle

Should the machine start to roll over, you can be